HP M4345 LaserJet MFP Service Manual
Reklama
Reklama
HP LaserJet M4345 MFP
Service Manual
HP LaserJet M4345 MFP
Service Manual
Copyright and License
© 2006 Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
Part number CB425-90908
Edition 1, 10/2006
Trademark Credits
Java™ is a US trademark of Sun
Microsystems, Inc.
Windows ® , Windows ® XP, and Windows
NT ® are U.S. registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
Linux is a U.S. registered trademark of
Linus Torvalds.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The
Open Group.
Adobe® and PostScript® are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
PANTONE®* *Pantone, Inc.'s checkstandard trademark for color.
ENERGY STAR ® and the ENERGY STAR logo ® are U.S. registered marks of the
United States Environmental Protection
Agency.
Table of contents
Envelopes with double side seams ................................................... 15
Envelopes with adhesive strips or flaps ............................................ 16
Envelope margins .............................................................................. 16
Envelope storage ............................................................................... 16
Label construction ............................................................................. 16
Card stock construction ..................................................................... 17
Card stock guidelines ........................................................................ 17
Connecting the fax accessory to a phone line .................................. 28
Configuring and using the fax features ............................................. 29
ENWW iii
Remove software from Macintosh operating systems ....................................... 35
Supported operating systems ............................................................ 37
Supported browsers .......................................................................... 37
3 Manage and maintain the device
iv ENWW
ENWW
Open the embedded Web server by using a network connection ...................................... 87
Clean the document feeder delivery system ...................................................... 97
v
Using FTP to upgrade the firmware on a network connection ........................ 102
Using HP Web Jetadmin to upgrade the firmware .......................................... 104
Using MS-DOS commands to upgrade the firmware ...................................... 104
HP Memory Enhancement technology ............................................................ 116
vi ENWW
ENWW
Media-size detection ....................................................................... 141
Cassette media-size detection ....................................... 141
Media-length detection ................................................... 141
Media-width detection ..................................................... 141
Cassette pickup operation ............................................................... 141
Lifter-driver operation ...................................................................... 143
Multifeed prevention ........................................................................ 143
Distance-between-pages adjustment .............................................. 144
Fuser-delivery stationary jam when feeding regular-size media ..................... 152
Fuser-delivery stationary jam when feeding custom-size media ..................... 152
Reversing delay jam (face-down delivery only) ............................................... 152
Reversing stationary jam (face-down delivery only) ........................................ 152
Delivery delay jam during face-down delivery ................................................. 153
Delivery stationary jam during face-down delivery .......................................... 153
Delivery stationary jam during face-up delivery ............................................... 153
vii
viii
Duplex-unit-pickup delay jam .......................................................... 158
Duplex-unit stationary jam ............................................................... 159
Duplex-unit delay jam ...................................................................... 159
Registration sensor jam ................................................................... 203
Read sensor jam ............................................................................. 203
Exit sensor jam ................................................................................ 203
ENWW
Tray 2 jam-access-cover switch, SW105 ......................................................... 208
ENWW ix
x
ENWW
ENWW xi
xii
ENWW
ENWW xiii
Appendix B Product warranty statements
xiv ENWW
Appendix C Regulatory information
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union .... 617
ENWW xv
xvi ENWW
1 Product information
The HP LaserJet M4345 is designed to be shared by a workgroup. Use the MFP to copy and print black-and-white documents or to digitally send black-and-white documents. The MFP is a standalone copier that does not require connection to a computer. With the optional
HP LaserJet Analog Fax
Accessory 300 User Guide
(included with some models), the MFP can also send and receive faxes.
If you have not done so, see the HP LaserJet M4345 Getting Started Guide for setup instructions.
This chapter introduces the following topics:
●
●
●
●
ENWW 1
Device comparison
HP LaserJet M4345 MFP (base model) HP LaserJet M4345x MFP
The HP LaserJet M4345 is the base model, and comes standard with the following items:
●
A 100-sheet multipurpose input tray (tray 1)
●
Three 500-sheet input trays
●
Automatic document feeder (ADF) that holds up to 50 pages
●
HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a
10/100Base-T network
●
256 megabytes (MB) synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM)
HP LaserJet M4345xs MFP
The HP LaserJet M4345x includes all of the features of the base model plus the following items:
●
Automatic duplex printing accessory (duplexer)
●
Additional 500-sheet feeder (tray 3)
●
33.6 kbps analog-fax accessory
HP LaserJet M4345xm MFP
The HP LaserJet M4345xs includes all of the features of the base model plus the following items:
●
Automatic duplex printing accessory (duplexer)
●
Additional 500-sheet feeder (tray 3)
●
33.6 kbps analog-fax accessory
●
Stapler/stacker accessory
●
Cabinet/stand
The HP LaserJet M4345xm includes all of the features of the base model plus the following items:
●
Automatic duplex printing accessory (duplexer)
●
Additional 500-sheet feeder (tray 3)
●
33.6 kbps analog-fax accessory
●
3-bin mailbox accessory
●
Cabinet/stand
2 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Features comparison
Feature
Functions
Speed and throughput
ENWW
Resolution
Memory
User interface
Language and fonts
HP LaserJet M4345
●
Two-sided copying (duplexing)
●
Image modification
●
Color digital sending
●
Document finishing
●
45 pages per minute (ppm) when scanning and printing on letter-size paper; 43(ppm) when copying and printing on A4-size paper
●
25% to 400% scalability when using the scanner glass
●
25% to 200% scalability when using the automatic document feeder (ADF)
●
Less than 10 seconds to print the first page
●
Transmit Once, Raster Image Processing (RIP) ONCE technology
●
Duty cycle of up to 200,000 pages per month
●
1200 dots per inch (dpi) with Resolution Enhancement technology (REt)
●
FastRes1200 provides 1200 dpi quality at full speed
●
Up to 220 levels of gray
●
256 megabytes (MB) of random-access memory
(RAM), expandable to 512 MB by using an industry standard 100-pin double data rate memory module
(DDR SDRAM DIMM)
●
Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) that automatically compresses data to use RAM more efficiently
●
Graphical touchscreen control panel
●
An embedded Web server to gain access to support and order supplies (for network-connected products)
●
HP Easy Printer Care software (a Web-based status and troubleshooting tool).
●
HP PCL 6
●
HP PCL5
●
Printer Management Language
●
●
XHTML
●
80 scalable TrueType typefaces
●
HP PostScript 3 emulation
Features comparison 3
Copying and sending
Print cartridge
Paper Input
4 Chapter 1 Product information
●
Modes for text, graphics, and mixed text and graphics formats
●
A job-interrupt feature (at copy boundaries)
●
Xenon lamp for instant-on copying
●
Multiple pages per sheet
●
Operator attendance animations (for example, jam recovery)
●
E-mail compatibility
●
A sleep feature that saves energy
●
Automatic duplex (two-sided) scanning
NOTE
An automatic duplex printing accessory is required for two-sided copying.
NOTE
To use e-mail functionality, the device must be connected to an IP-based server that has simple mail transfer protocol (SMTP). This server can be on the local area network or at an outside Internet service provider (ISP). HP recommends that the device be located on the same local area network
(LAN) as the SMTP server. If you are using an ISP, you must connect to the ISP by using a digital subscriber line (DSL) connection. If you obtain email services from an ISP, ask the ISP to provide the correct SMTP address.
Dial-up connections are not supported. If you do not have an SMTP server on your network, you can purchase third-party software that allows you to create an SMTP server.
●
Prints up to 18,000 pages at 5% coverage.
●
No-shake cartridge design
●
Authentic HP print cartridge detection
●
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray):
A multipurpose tray for paper, transparencies, labels, and envelopes. Holds up to 100 sheets of paper or 10 envelopes.
●
Tray 2 and optional trays 3, 4, and 5:
500-sheet trays. These trays automatically detect standard paper sizes up to Legal and accommodate printing on customsize paper.
●
Automatic document feeder (ADF):
Holds up to 50 sheets of paper.
●
Duplex printing and copying:
With the optional duplexing accessory, provides two-sided printing and copying (printing on both sides of the paper).
●
ADF duplex scanning:
The ADF has an automatic duplex feature for scanning two-sided documents.
●
Optional envelope feeder:
Holds up to 75 envelopes.
ENWW
ENWW
Paper output
Connectivity
Environmental features
Security features
●
Standard output bin:
The standard output bin is located on the left side of the device. This bin can hold up to 500 sheets of paper.
●
ADF output bin:
The ADF output bin is underneath the
ADF input tray. The bin holds up to 50 sheets, and the device automatically stops when this bin is full.
●
Optional stapler/stacker:
The stapler/stacker staples up to 30 sheets and stacks up to 500 sheets.
●
Optional 3-bin mailbox:
One bin stacks up to 500 sheets, and two bins stack up to 100 sheets each for a total capacity of 700 sheets.
●
A Foreign interface harness (FIH) connection (AUX) for connecting other devices
●
Local area network (LAN) connector (RJ-45) for the embedded HP Jetdirect print server
●
Optional analog-fax card
●
Optional HP Digital Sending Software (DSS)
●
High-speed USB 2.0
●
Jetlink for paper handling solutions
●
Optional HP Jetdirect enhanced input/output (EIO) print server cards:
●
LocalTalk
●
Fast Ethernet 10/100TX
●
Ethernet 802.11b wireless
●
Bluetooth wireless printer adapter
●
Infrared adapter
●
The Sleep setting saves energy (meets ENERGY
STAR guidelines).
●
Foreign interface harness (FIH)
●
Secure Disk Erase
●
Security lock
●
Job retention
●
DSS authentication
Features comparison 5
Walkaround
3
4
1
2
5
6
Document-feeder assembly
Document-feeder top cover
Document-feeder input tray
Top cover (provides access to the print cartridge)
Top-cover lever
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)
7
8
Jam-access lever
Tray-number indicator
9
Paper-level indicator
10
Control-panel keypad
11
Control-panel display
12
Control-panel status lights
13
Scanner lock
6 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
14
Output bin
15
Optional duplexer
16
On/off switch
17
Power connection
18
Interface ports
19
Formatter cover (provides access to the memory DIMM slot, hard disk, and analog-fax accessory)
Accessories and supplies
ENWW
3
4
5
1
2
500-sheet feeder (Q5968A)
Duplexer (Q5969A)
Envelope feeder (Q2438B)
Stapler/stacker (Q5691A)
Memory DIMM
Walkaround 7
6
7
HP Jetdirect print server (EIO card)
Hard-disk accessory (EIO card)
8
Storage cabinet/stand (Q5970A)
9
3-bin mailbox (Q5692A)
10
Staple cartridge (C8091A)
11
Print cartridge (Q5945A)
12
HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 (Q3701A)
NOTE
The device accommodates up to three optional 500-sheet feeders. HP recommends using a cabinet when using the optional 500-sheet feeders.
Interface ports
3
4
1
2
5
EIO slot
Network connection (embedded HP Jetdirect print server)
Foreign interface harness (FIH) port
High-speed USB 2.0 device port
Telephone-line connection (for the optional analog-fax accessory)
Locking and unlocking optional accessories
For more stability to prevent the device from tipping over, the optional 500-sheet feeders and the cabinet are automatically locked to the bottom of the device. When accessories are installed, verify that the lock on each accessory is in the rear (locked) position.
To unlock the accessories, slide the lever to the forward (unlocked) position.
8 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
ENWW Walkaround 9
Media specifications
Select print media
Table 1-1
Supported types of media
Type of media Tray 1 Trays 2, 3,
4, and 5
Optional duplexer Optional envelope feeder
Plain
Preprinted
Letterhead
Transparency
Prepunched
Labels
Bond
Recycled
Color
Cardstock
Rough
Envelope
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3-bin mailbox or stacker part of stapler/stacker
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Stapler part of stapler/stacker
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
2
Face-up delivery only.
If a 3-bin mailbox is installed, select the bottom bin when printing on cardstock. Media weights that are 200g/m 2 or greater are supported only in the bottom bin.
10 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Table 1-2
Tray 1 supported sizes and weights
Size
Letter
A4
Legal
Executive
Statement
8.5 x 13
A5
B5 (JIS)
Executive (JIS)
D Postcard (JIS)
16K
Custom
Envelope Commercial #10
Envelope DL ISO
Envelope C5 ISO
Envelope B5 ISO
Envelope Monarch #7-3/4
Weight
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)
210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 inches)
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
184 x 267 mm (7.3 x 10.5 inches)
140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches)
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 inches)
182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 inches)
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
148 x 200 mm (5.8 x 7.9 inches)
197 x 273 mm (7.75 x 10.75 inches)
Minimum: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches)
60 to 200g/m
2
(16 to 53 lb)
Maximum: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
105 x 241 mm (4.1 x 9.5 inches)
110 x 220 mm (4.3 x 8.7 inches)
162 x 229 mm (6.4 x 9.0 inches)
176 x 250 mm (6.9 x 9.8 inches)
98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 inches)
75 to 105g/m 2 (20 to 28 lb)
Capacity
100 sheets of 75g/m
2
(20 lb) paper
10 envelopes
1
2
The MFP supports a wide range of sizes. Check the MFP software for supported sizes.
Capacity can vary depending on paper weight and thickness, as well as environmental conditions.
ENWW Media specifications 11
Table 1-3
Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5 supported sizes and weights
Size
Letter
A4
Executive
Legal
B5 (JIS)
A5
8.5 x 13
Executive (JIS)
16K
Custom
Dimensions
Weight
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)
210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 inches)
184 x 267 mm (7.3 x 10.5 inches)
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 inches)
148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 inches)
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
197 x 273 mm (7.75 x 10.75 inches)
Minimum: 148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3
inches)
Maximum: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
60 to 120g/m
2
(16 to 32 lb)
500 sheets of 75g/m
2
(20 lb) paper
1
2
The MFP supports a wide range of sizes. Check the MFP software for supported sizes.
Capacity can vary depending on paper weight and thickness, as well as environmental conditions.
Table 1-4
Optional duplexer supported sizes and weights
Weight
60 to 120g/m 2 (16 to 32 lb)
Size
Letter
A4
Executive
Legal
B5 (JIS)
A5
8.5 x 13
Executive (JIS)
16K
Dimensions
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)
210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 inches)
184 x 267 mm (7.3 x 10.5 inches)
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 inches)
148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 inches)
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
197 x 273 mm (7.75 x 10.75 inches)
12 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Table 1-5
Optional envelope feeder supported sizes and weights
Size
Monarch #7-3/4
Commercial #10
DL ISO
C5 ISO
B5 ISO
Dimensions Weight
98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 inches)
105 x 241 mm (4.1 x 9.5 inches)
110 x 220 mm (4.3 x 8.7 inches)
162 x 229 mm (6.4 x 9.0 inches)
176 x 250 mm (6.9 x 9.8 inches)
75 to 105g/m
2
(20 to 28 lb)
Capacity
75 envelopes
Table 1-6
Optional 3-bin mailbox or stacker part of the stapler/stacker supported sizes and weights
Size
Letter
A4
Executive
Legal
B5 (JIS)
A5
Statement
8.5 x 13
Executive(JIS)
DPostcard (JIS)
16K
Envelope #10
Envelope Monarch #7-3/4
Envelope B5 ISO
Custom
Dimensions
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)
210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 inches)
184 x 267 mm (7.3 x 10.5 inches)
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 inches)
148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 inches)
140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches)
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
148 x 200 mm (5.8 x 7.9 inches)
197 x 273 mm (7.75 x 10.75 inches)
105 x 241 mm (4.1 x 9.5 inches)
98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 inches)
162 x 229 mm (6.4 x 9.0 inches)
110 x 220 mm (4.3 x 8.7 inches)
176 x 250 mm (6.7 x 9.8 mm)
Minimum: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches)
Maximum: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
Weight Capacity
For the stacker on the stapler/ stacker or the lower bin on the
3-bin mailbox: 500 sheets of
75g/m 2 (20 lb) paper
For the top two bins on the 3bin mailbox: each can hold 100 sheets of 75g/m
2
(20 lb) paper.
1
2
3
The MFP supports a wide range of sizes. Check the MFP software for supported sizes.
Capacity can vary depending on paper weight and thickness, as well as environmental conditions.
Face-up delivery only.
ENWW Media specifications 13
Table 1-7
Stapler part of the optional stapler/stacker supported sizes and weights
Size
Letter
A4
Legal
8.5 x 13
Executive(JIS)
Dimensions
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)
210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 inches)
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
Weight
For plain media: 60 to 120g/ m 2 (16 to 32 lb)
For thick media: 128 to 199g/ m 2 (34 to 53 lb)
Capacity
For plain media: 30 sheets of 75g/ m 2 (20 lb) paper
For glossy media: 20 sheets
For thick media: the stack height must not exceed 7 mm (0.27 inch)
Table 1-8
ADF supported sizes and weights
Size
Letter
A4
A5
Legal
Dimensions
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)
210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 inches)
148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 inches)
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
Weight Capacity
60 to 120g/m 2 (16 to 32 lb) 50 sheets of 75g/m 2 (20 lb) paper
General media specifications
For complete paper specifications for all HP LaserJet devices, see the
HP LaserJet Printer Family
Print Media Guide
(available at http://www.hp.com/support/ljpaperguide ) .
Category
Acid content
Caliper
Curl in ream
Cut edge conditions
Fusing compatibility
Grain
Moisture content
Smoothness
Specifications
5.5 pH to 8.0 pH
0.094 to 0.18 mm (3.0 to 7.0 mils)
Flat within 5 mm (0.02 in)
Cut with sharp blades with no visible fray.
Must not scorch, melt, offset, or release hazardous emissions when heated to 200°
C (392°F) for 0.1 second.
Long grain
4% to 6% by weight
100 to 250 Sheffield
Media considerations
Envelopes
Envelope construction is critical. Envelope fold lines can vary considerably, not only between manufacturers, but also within a box from the same manufacturer. Successful printing on envelopes
14 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
depends upon the quality of the envelopes. When selecting envelopes, consider the following components:
●
Weight:
The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 105g/m 2 (28 lb) or jamming might occur.
●
Construction:
Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm (0.25 inch) curl, and should not contain air.
●
Condition:
Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
●
Temperature:
You should use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the printer.
●
Size:
You should use only envelopes within the following size ranges.
●
Minimum
: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches)
●
Maximum
: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
NOTE
Use only tray 1 or the optional envelope feeder to print envelopes. You might experience some jams when using any media with a length less than 178 mm (7 inches). This might be caused by paper that has been affected by environmental conditions. For optimum performance, make sure you are storing and handling the paper correctly. Also, choose envelopes in the printer driver.
Envelopes with double side seams
Double side-seam construction has vertical seams at both ends of the envelope rather than diagonal seams. This style might be more likely to wrinkle. Be sure the seam extends all the way to the corner of the envelope as illustrated below.
ENWW
1
2
Acceptable envelope construction
Unacceptable envelope construction
Media specifications 15
Envelopes with adhesive strips or flaps
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the heat and pressure in the printer. The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or even jams and might even damage the fuser.
Envelope margins
The following gives typical address margins for a commercial #10 or DL envelope.
Type of address
Return address
Delivery address
Top margin
15 mm (0.6 inch)
51 mm (2.0 inches)
Left margin
15 mm (0.6 inch)
89 mm (3.5 inches)
NOTE
For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm (0.6 inch) from the edges of the envelope. Avoid printing over the area where the envelope's seams meet.
Envelope storage
Proper storage of envelopes helps contribute to print quality. Envelopes should be stored flat. If air is trapped in an envelope, creating an air bubble, then the envelope might wrinkle during printing.
Labels
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the MFP, use only labels recommended for laser printers.
Never print on the same sheet of labels more than once or print on a partial sheet of labels.
Label construction
When selecting labels, consider the quality of each component:
●
Adhesives:
The adhesive material should be stable at 200°C (392°F), the printer's fusing temperature.
●
Arrangement:
Only use labels with no exposed backing between them. Labels can peel off sheets with spaces between the labels, causing serious jams.
●
Curl:
Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm (0.5 inch) of curl in any direction.
●
Condition:
Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation.
NOTE
Choose labels in the printer driver.
Transparencies
Transparencies used in the printer must be able to withstand 200°C (392°F), the printer's fusing temperature.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the MFP, use only transparencies recommended for use in
HP LaserJet printers, such as HP-brand transparencies.
16 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
NOTE
Choose transparencies in the printer driver.
Card stock and heavy media
You can print many types of card stock from the paper input tray, including index cards and postcards. Some card stock performs better than others because its construction is better suited for feeding through a laser printer.
For optimum printer performance, do not use paper heavier than 157g/m 2 (42 lb). Paper that is too heavy might cause misfeeds, stacking problems, paper jams, poor toner fusing, poor print quality, or excessive mechanical wear.
NOTE
You might be able to print on heavier paper if you do not fill the input tray to capacity and if you use paper with a smoothness rating of 100-180 Sheffield.
Card stock construction
●
Smoothness
: 135-157g/m
2
(36-42 lb) card stock should have a smoothness rating of 100-180
Sheffield. 60-135g/m
2
Sheffield.
(16-36 lb) card stock should have a smoothness rating of 100-250
●
Construction
: Card stock should lie flat with less than 5 mm (0.2 in.) of curl.
●
Condition
: Make sure that the card stock is not wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
●
Sizes
: Only use card stock within the following size ranges:
●
Minimum
: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.)
●
Maximum
: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14.0 in.)
Card stock guidelines
Set margins at least 2 mm (0.08 in.) away from the edges.
Letterhead and preprinted forms
Many manufacturers now offer premium paper advertised as laser-compatible or laser-guaranteed.
Some of the rougher surface finishes, such as cockle, laid, or linen, might require the special fuser modes that are available on some printer models in order to achieve adequate toner adhesion.
NOTE
Some page-to-page variation is normal when printing with laser printers. This variation cannot be observed when printing on plain paper. However, this variation is obvious when printing on preprinted forms because the lines and boxes are already placed on the page.
To avoid problems when using preprinted forms, embossed paper, and letterhead, observe the following guidelines:
●
Avoid using low-temperature inks (the kind used with some types of thermography).
●
Use preprinted forms and letterhead paper that have been printed by offset lithography or engraving.
ENWW Media specifications 17
●
Use forms that have been created with heat-resistant inks that will not melt, vaporize, or release undesirable emissions when heated to 200°C (392°F) for 0.1 second. Typically, oxidation-set or oil-based inks meet this requirement.
●
When the form is preprinted, be careful not to change the moisture content of the paper, and do not use materials that change the paper's electrical or handling properties. Seal the forms in moisture-proof wrap to prevent moisture changes during storage.
●
Avoid processing preprinted forms that have a finish or coating.
●
Avoid using heavily embossed or raised-letterhead papers.
●
Avoid papers that have heavily textured surfaces.
●
Avoid using offset powders or other materials that prevent printed forms from sticking together.
Select the correct fuser mode
The device automatically adjusts the fuser mode based on the media type to which the tray is set.
For example, heavy paper, such as card stock, might need a higher fuser-mode setting in order to make the toner adhere better to the page, but transparencies need a lower fuser-mode setting to avoid damage to the device. The default setting generally provides the best performance for most print-media types.
The fuser mode can be changed only if the media type has been set for the tray that you are using.
After the media type has been set for the tray, then the fuser mode for that type can be changed on the Administration menu in the Print Quality submenu at the device control panel. See
Print Quality menu on page 75 .
NOTE
Using the High 1 or High 2 fuser mode setting improves the ability of the toner to adhere to paper, but it might cause other problems, such as excessive curl. The device might print at a slower speed when the fuser mode is set to High 1 or High 2 . The table below describes the ideal fuser mode setting for supported media types.
18 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Media type
Plain
Preprinted
Letterhead
Transparency
Prepunched
Labels
Bond
Recycled
Color
Light
Card stock
Rough
Envelope
Fuser mode setting
Normal
Normal
Normal
Low 2
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Low 1
Normal
High 1
Normal
To reset the fuser modes to the default settings, touch the Administration menu at the device control panel. Touch Print Quality , touch Fuser Modes , and then touch Restore Modes .
ENWW Media specifications 19
20 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
2 Installation
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
●
●
●
Optional output and input devices
●
Connect to a computer or network
●
●
●
ENWW 21
Site preparation
Below are recommendations for the printer location and placement.
Operating environment
The printer must be kept in a proper location to maintain the performance level that has been set at the factory.
The printer must have the required clearance around it.
863.6 mm
34 inches
546 mm
21.5 inches
122 mm
4.8 inches
419.1 mm
16.5 inches
109.2 cm
43 inches
787mm
30 inches
Figure 2-1
Printer dimensions
Place the MFP in a location that offers the following:
●
A well-ventilated, dust-free area
●
A constant temperature and humidity (Do not install near water sources, humidifiers, air conditioners, refrigerators, or other major appliances.)
●
A hard, level surface (not more than a 2° angle)
Keep the MFP away from the following:
●
Direct sunlight, dust, open flames, or water
●
Direct flow of exhaust from air ventilation systems
●
Magnets and devices that emit a magnetic field
22 Chapter 2 Installation ENWW
●
Areas subject to vibration
●
Walls or other objects. There must be enough space around the printer for proper access and ventilation
ENWW Site preparation 23
Installation checklist
When setting up the MFP for the first time, perform the following tasks to ensure that the MFP is installed correctly.
Table 2-1
Installation checklist
Task Details
Connect the MFP to an adequate power source.
Install the MFP in a location that has enough space.
Place the MFP on a sturdy, level surface.
Install media in tray 2 and install the print cartridge.
The MFP requires a minimum of 15 amps for 110-volt models or 8 amps for 220-volt models. Do not connect the MFP to a power strip or to an uninterruptible power supply (UPS). Attaching other devices to the same power source can cause intermittent problems.
Make sure that all sides of the MFP are easily accessible. If the space around the MFP is too tight, clearing jams and servicing the MFP are more difficult.
Place the MFP on a hard surface so it does not shift when opening and closing the MFP components. If the
MFP is on a cabinet/stand, make sure that the feet are level and stable.
Use media that meets HP specifications. See the
HP
LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide
, which is available for download in .PDF format at http://www.hp.com/support/ljpaperguide .
Connect the network cable to the HP Jetdirect port on the left side of the MFP. Also connect the fax line if an
HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300 is installed.
Be sure to remove the sealing tape from the print cartridge. It is possible to insert the print cartridge without removing the sealing tape, but an error message appears on the control-panel display.
The fax should be connected to a single analog telephone line that will be used for the fax only and not shared with a telephone or other device.
Move the scanner shipping lock to the unlocked position.
Raise the ADF. The scanner shipping lock is to the left of the scanner glass. Move the switch toward the front of the MFP to unlock it.
Set the correct language, date, and time.
During initial setup, follow the directions on the control panel when prompted to set the language, date and time.
To change the language after initial setup, touch
Administration , Device Behavior , and Language . Then select the desired language from a list.
Prepare the MFP for digital sending by configuring the e-mail gateways.
If a fax accessory is installed, configure it for sending and receiving faxes.
To change the current date and time after initial setup, touch Administration , Time/Scheduling , and Date/Time .
From the Home screen, touch Administration , Initial
Setup , E-mail Setup , Find Send Gateways , and OK . If auto-discovery does not find the e-mail gateways, obtain the addresses from your network administrator and manually configure these on the MFP.
Use the Fax Wizard to set up the fax for the first time.
To make changes later, use the following procedure:
From the Home screen, touch Administration , Initial
Setup , Fax Setup , and Required Settings . Provide the
24 Chapter 2 Installation ENWW
ENWW
Table 2-1
Installation checklist (continued)
Task Details
Print the Configuration page to verify that the MFP is able to print.
Verify that each of the following items is listed on the
Configuration page:
●
The LDAP Gateway Address
●
The SMTP Gateway Address
●
All optional devices
●
If a fax accessory is installed, the Modem Status should indicate “Operational/Enabled.”
●
On the embedded Jetdirect page, make sure that the IP address is valid and that the Status indicates
“I/O Card Ready.”
Make a copy by using the scanner glass to verify that the scanner is working.
Make a copy by using the ADF to verify that it is working.
If a fax accessory is installed, send a test fax to verify that it is set up correctly.
Digitally send a document by using the e-mail feature.
Send a print job to the MFP from a computer to verify that the printer driver software is installed correctly.
Make sure that all users are aware of the user-training
CD that came with the MFP.
date, time, location, and fax-header information. See details in the
HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300
User Guide
.
From the Home screen, touch Administration ,
Information , Configuration Page , Configuration Page , and Print .
Installation checklist 25
Optional output and input devices
Several paper-handling devices are available for the MFP.
●
A 3-bin mailbox
●
A stapler/stacker
●
Up to three 500-sheet feeders
●
An envelope feeder
●
A cabinet/stand (use with the optional 500-sheet feeders)
Each of these accessories comes with an installation guide that explains how to install it. After installing an accessory, print a Configuration page to verify that the accessory was installed successfully. If the accessory is installed correctly, it is listed on the Configuration page in the section for
Paper trays and options
.
26 Chapter 2 Installation ENWW
Connect to a computer or network
The MFP has five ports for connecting to a computer or a network. The ports are at the left, rear corner of the MFP.
3
4
1
2
5
EIO slot
Network connection (embedded HP Jetdirect print server)
Foreign interface harness (FIH) port
High-speed USB 2.0 device port
Telephone-line connection (for the optional analog-fax accessory)
USB configuration
This device supports a USB 2.0 connection. You must use an A-to-B type USB cable for printing.
ENWW Connect to a computer or network 27
Figure 2-2
USB connection
1
2
USB connector
USB port (type B)
Network connection
When installing the MFP on a network, connect the network cable to the embedded HP Jetdirect print server before installing the MFP software.
For complete information about installing the MFP on a network, see the network installation guide that was included with the MFP.
Fax connection
The HP LaserJet M4345x MFP, HP LaserJet M4345xs MFP, and HP LaserJet M4345xm MFP models come with an HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300 already installed. For the HP LaserJet
M4345 MFP (base model), you can order this accessory as an option. Microsoft
®
Windows
®
users can also install the optional HP Digital Sending Software (HP DSS), which provides digital faxing services, and the Send Fax driver, which allows you to use a computer to send a fax through the MFP.
For complete instructions for configuring the fax accessory and for using the fax features, see the
HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide
. This guide is included on the software CD that comes with the MFP.
Analog faxing
When the HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300 is installed, the MFP can function as a standalone fax machine.
Connecting the fax accessory to a phone line
When connecting the fax accessory to a phone line, ensure that the phone line being used for the fax accessory is a dedicated line that is not used by any other devices. Also, this line should be an analog line because the fax will not function correctly if it is connected to some digital PBX systems.
If you are not sure whether you have an analog or digital phone line, contact your telecom provider.
28 Chapter 2 Installation ENWW
NOTE
HP recommends using the phone cord that comes with the fax accessory to ensure that the accessory functions correctly.
Follow these instructions to connect the fax accessory to a phone jack.
1.
Locate the phone cord that is included with the fax accessory kit. Connect one end of the phone cord into the fax accessory phone jack that is on the formatter. Push the connector until it clicks.
CAUTION
Be sure to connect the phone line to the fax accessory port , which is near the bottom of the formatter. Do not connect the phone line to the HP Jetdirect LAN port, which is nearer the top of the formatter.
2.
Connect the other end of the phone cord into the phone jack on the wall. Push the connector until it clicks or until it is firmly seated. Because different types of connectors are used in different countries/regions, the connector might not make an audible click.
Configuring and using the fax features
Before you can use the fax features, you must configure them in the control-panel menus. For complete information about configuring and using the fax accessory, and for information about troubleshooting problems with the fax accessory, see the
HP LaserJet Analog Fax
Accessory 300 User Guide
, which is provided with the fax accessory.
Use the Send Fax driver to send a fax from a computer without going to the MFP control panel. See the
HP LaserJet MFP Analog Fax Accessory 300 Send Fax Driver Guide
for more information.
The
HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide
and the
HP LaserJet MFP Analog Fax
Accessory 300 Send Fax Driver Guide
are both available on the MFP software CD.
Digital faxing
Digital faxing is available when you install the optional HP Digital Sending Software. For information about ordering this software, go to http://www.hp.com/go/ljm4345mfp_software .
With digital faxing, the MFP does
not
need to be connected directly to a phone line. Instead, the MFP can send a fax in one of three ways:
●
LAN fax
sends faxes through a third-party fax provider.
●
Microsoft Windows 2000 fax
is a fax modem and Digital Sender Module on a computer that allows the computer to operate as a turnkey gateway fax.
●
Internet fax
uses an Internet fax provider to process faxes, and the fax is delivered on a traditional fax machine or sent to the user’s e-mail.
For complete information about using digital faxing, see the documentation that is provided with the
HP Digital Sending Software.
ENWW Connect to a computer or network 29
Device software
The printing-system software is included with the device. See the getting started guide for installation instructions.
The printing system includes software for end users and network administrators, and printer drivers for access to the features and communication with the computer.
NOTE
For a list of printer drivers and updated software, go to http://www.hp.com/go/ m4345_software .
Supported operating systems
The CD-ROM that accompanies the device contains software that runs on the following operating systems:
●
Microsoft Windows 98 and Windows Millennium Edition (Me)
●
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 (printer driver only)
●
Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
●
Macintosh OS Version 9.1 and later, and Macintosh OS X Version 10.1 and later
The most recent printer drivers for all the supported operating systems are available at http://www.hp.com/support/ljm4345mfp . If you do not have access to the Internet, see the support flyer that came in the box for information about obtaining the most recent software.
The following table lists the available software for the HP LaserJet M4345 Series MFP.
Software UNIX/Linux OS/2
Windows Installer
PCL 5
PCL 6
PostScript emulation
HP Easy Printer Care
Macintosh Installer
Macintosh PostScript Printer
Description (PPD) files
x x x x x
Windows 98/Me Windows
2000/XP/
Server 2003 x x x x x x
Mac OS x x
x x x x
1
2
3
Install by using the
Add Printer
wizard.
Mac OS X V10.2 or higher, TCP/IP required
Available only on the World Wide Web.
30 Chapter 2 Installation ENWW
NOTE
You can also purchase the optional HP Digital Sending Software, which provides digital-fax capability. For more information, go to http://www.hp.com/support/ljm4345mfp .
Supported operating systems
The device supports the following operating systems:
Full software installation
●
Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit)
●
Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)
●
Windows 2000
●
Mac OS X V10.2.8, V10.3, V10.4 and later
Printer driver only
●
Linux (Web only)
●
UNIX model scripts (Web only)
NOTE
For Mac OS V10.4 and later, PPC and Intel Core Processor Macs are supported.
ENWW Device software 31
Select the correct printer driver
Printer drivers allow you to gain access to the features of the device and allow the computer to communicate with the device (using a printer language). Check the installation notes and readme files on the CD for additional software and languages.
The device uses the PCL 5, PCL 6, and PostScript 3 emulation printer description language (PDL) drivers.
●
Use the PCL 6 printer driver for the best overall performance.
●
Use the PCL 5 printer driver for general office printing.
●
Use the PS driver for printing from PostScript-based programs, for compatibility with PostScript
Level 3 needs, or for PS flash font support.
PCL5 PCL6 PS3 emulation
Operating system
Windows XP (32-bit)
Windows Server 2003 (32-bit)
Windows Server 2003 (64-bit)
Mac OS X V10.2 and later
1
Not all features are available from all drivers or operating systems.
2 For Windows 2000 and Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit), download the PCL5 driver from http://www.hp.com/go/m4345_software .
3 For Windows XP (64-bit), download the PCL6 driver from http://www.hp.com/go/m4345_software .
The printer drivers include online Help that has instructions for common printing tasks and also describes the buttons, checkboxes, and drop-down lists that are in the printer driver.
Universal printer drivers
The HP Universal Print Driver Series for Windows includes separate HP postscript level 3 emulation and HP PCL 5 versions of a single driver that provides access to almost any HP device while providing system administrator with tools to manage devices more effectively. The Universal Print
Driver is included on the device CD, under the Optional Software section. For more information, go to www.hp.com/go/universalprintdriver .
Driver Autoconfiguration
The HP LaserJet PCL 5, PCL 6, and PS level 3 emulation drivers for Windows 2000 and
Windows XP feature automatic discovery and driver configuration for device accessories at the time of installation. Some accessories that the Driver Autoconfiguration supports are the duplexing unit, optional paper trays, and dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).
32 Chapter 2 Installation ENWW
Update Now
If you have modified the device configuration since installation, the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration. In the
Properties
dialog box (see
Open the printer drivers on page 34 ), on the
Device Settings
tab, click the
Update Now
button to update the driver.
HP Driver Preconfiguration
HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that you can use to customize and distribute HP software in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP Driver
Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators can preconfigure the printing and default settings for HP printer drivers before installing the drivers in the network environment. For more information, see the
HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide
, which is available at www.hp.com/go/ hpdpc_sw .
Priority for print settings
Changes to print settings are prioritized depending on where the changes are made:
NOTE
The names of commands and dialog boxes might vary depending on your software program.
●
Page Setup dialog box
: Click
Page Setup
or a similar command on the
File
menu of the program you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed here override settings changed anywhere else.
●
Print dialog box
: Click
,
Print Setup
, or a similar command on the
File
menu of the program you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed in the
dialog box have a lower priority and do
not
override changes made in the
Page Setup
dialog box.
●
Printer Properties dialog box (printer driver)
: Click
Properties
in the
dialog box to open the printer driver. Settings changed in the
Printer Properties
dialog box do not override settings anywhere else in the printing software.
●
Default printer driver settings
: The default printer driver settings determine the settings used in all print jobs,
unless
settings are changed in the
Page Setup
,
, or
Printer Properties
dialog boxes.
●
Printer control panel settings
: Settings changed at the printer control panel have a lower priority than changes made anywhere else.
ENWW Device software 33
Open the printer drivers
Operating System To change the settings for all print jobs until the software program is closed
Windows 2000, XP, and Server 2003
Mac OS X V10.2.8,
V10.3, V10.4 and later
1.
On the software program, click
.
File
menu in the
2.
Select the driver, and then click
Properties
or
Preferences
.
The steps can vary; this procedure is most common.
1.
On the
File
menu, click
.
2.
Change the settings that you want on the various pop-up menus.
To change the default settings for all print jobs
1.
Click
Start
, click and then click
Settings
Printers
Printers and Faxes
.
or
2.
Right-click the driver icon, and then select
Printing
Preferences
.
,
To change the device configuration settings
1.
Click and then click
Printers
Printers and Faxes
.
or
2.
Right-click the driver icon, and then select
Properties
.
3.
Click the
Device Settings
tab.
Start
, click
Settings
1.
On the
File
menu, click
.
1.
In the Finder, on the
Go
menu, click
Applications
.
2.
Change the settings that you want on the various pop-up menus.
2.
Open
Utilities
, and then open
Print Center
(OS X
V10.2.8) or
Printer Setup
Utility
.
3.
On the
Presets
pop-up menu, click
Save as
and type a name for the preset.
3.
Click on the print queue.
4.
On the
Printers
menu, click
Show Info
.
These settings are saved in the
Presets
menu. To use the new settings, you must select the saved preset option every time you open a program and print.
5.
Click the
Options
Installable
menu.
NOTE
Configuration settings might not be available in Classic mode.
,
34 Chapter 2 Installation ENWW
Software for Macintosh computers
The HP installer provides PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files, Printer Dialog Extensions
(PDEs), and the HP Printer Utility for use with Macintosh computers.
For network connections, use the embedded Web server (EWS) to configure the device.
The printing system software includes the following components:
●
PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files
The PPDs, in combination with the Apple PostScript printer drivers, provide access to device features. Use the Apple PostScript printer driver that comes with the computer.
●
HP Printer Utility
Use the HP Printer Utility to set up device features that are not available in the printer driver:
●
Name the device.
●
Assign the device to a zone on the network.
●
Assign an internet protocol (IP) address to the device.
●
Download files and fonts.
●
Configure the device for IP or AppleTalk printing.
You can use the HP Printer Utility when your device uses a universal serial bus (USB) cable or is connected to a TCP/IP-based network.
NOTE
The HP Printer Utility is supported for Mac OS X V10.2 or later.
Remove software from Macintosh operating systems
To remove the software from a Macintosh computer, drag the PPD files to the trash can.
ENWW Device software 35
Utilities
The device is equipped with several utilities that make it easy to monitor and manage the device on a network.
HP Web Jetadmin
HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool for HP Jetdirect-connected printers within your intranet, and it should be be installed only on the network administrator’s computer.
To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host systems, visit www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin .
When installed on a host server, any client can gain access to HP Web Jetadmin by using a supported Web browser (such as Microsoft® Internet Explorer 4.x or Netscape Navigator 4.x or later) by navigating to the HP Web Jetadmin host.
Embedded Web server
The device is equipped with an embedded Web server, which provides access to information about device and network activities. This information appears in a Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet
Explorer or Netscape Navigator.
The embedded Web server resides on the device. It is not loaded on a network server.
The embedded Web server provides an interface to the device that anyone who has a networkconnected computer and a standard Web browser can use. No special software is installed or configured, but you must have a supported Web browser on your computer. To gain access to the embedded Web server, type the IP address for the device in the address line of the browser. (To find the IP address, print a configuration page. For more information about printing a configuration page, see
Use information pages on page 82 .)
For a complete explanation of the features and functionality of the embedded Web server, see
Embedded Web server on page 36
.
36 Chapter 2 Installation ENWW
HP Easy Printer Care software
The HP Easy Printer Care software is a program that you can use for the following tasks:
●
Checking the device status
●
Checking the supplies status
●
Setting up alerts
●
Viewing device documentation
●
Gaining access to troubleshooting and maintenance tools
You can view the HP Easy Printer Care software when the device is directly connected to your computer or when it is connected to a network. To download the HP Easy Printer Care software, go to http://www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare .
Supported operating systems
For information about supported operating systems, go to www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare .
Supported browsers
To use the HP Toolbox FX, you must have one of the following browsers:
●
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or later
●
Netscape Navigator 7.0 or later
●
Opera Software ASA Opera 6.05 or later
All pages can be printed from the browser.
Other components and utilities
Windows
●
Software installer — automates the printing system installation
●
Online Web registration
Macintosh OS
●
PostScript Printer Description files (PPDs) — use with the Apple PostScript drivers that come with the Mac OS
●
The HP Printer Utility — change device settings, view status, and set up printer-event notification from a Mac.
This utility is supported for Mac OS X V10.2 and later.
ENWW Device software 37
Network configuration
You might need to configure certain network parameters on the device. You can configure these parameters in the following locations:
●
Installation software
●
Device control panel
●
Embedded Web server
●
Management software (HP Web Jetadmin or HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh)
NOTE
For more information about using the embedded Web server, see
Embedded Web server on page 36
For more information on supported networks and network configuration tools, see the
HP Jetdirect
Print Server Administrator’s Guide
. The guide comes with printers in which an HP Jetdirect print server is installed.
This section contains the following information about configuring network parameters:
●
●
●
Disable network protocols (optional)
●
HP Jetdirect EIO print servers
Configure TCP/IPv4 parameters
If your network doesn't provide automatic IP addressing through DHCP, BOOTP, RARP, or another method, you might need to enter the following parameters manually before you can print over the network:
●
IP address (4 bytes)
●
Subnet mask (4 bytes)
●
Default gateway (4 bytes)
Change the IP address
You can view the current IP address of the device from the control-panel Home screen by touching
Network Address .
Use the following procedure to change the IP address manually.
1.
Scroll to and touch Administration .
2.
Scroll to and touch Initial Setup .
3.
Touch Networking and I/O .
4.
Touch Embedded Jetdirect .
5.
Touch TCP/IP .
38 Chapter 2 Installation ENWW
6.
Touch IPV4 Settings .
7.
Touch Config Method .
8.
Touch Manual .
9.
Touch Save .
10.
Touch Manual Settings .
11.
Touch IP Address .
12.
Touch the IP Address text box.
13.
Use the touchscreen keypad to type the IP address.
14.
Touch OK .
15.
Touch Save .
Set the subnet mask
1.
Scroll to and touch Administration .
2.
Scroll to and touch Initial Setup .
3.
Touch Networking and I/O .
4.
Touch Embedded Jetdirect .
5.
Touch TCP/IP .
6.
Touch IPV4 Settings .
7.
Touch Config Method .
8.
Touch Manual .
9.
Touch Save .
10.
Touch Manual Settings .
11.
Touch Subnet Mask .
12.
Touch the Subnet Mask text box.
13.
Use the touchscreen keypad to type the subnet mask.
14.
Touch OK .
15.
Touch Save .
Set the default gateway
1.
Scroll to and touch Administration .
2.
Scroll to and touch Initial Setup .
3.
Touch Networking and I/O .
ENWW Network configuration 39
4.
Touch Embedded Jetdirect .
5.
Touch TCP/IP .
6.
Touch IPV4 Settings .
7.
Touch Config Method .
8.
Touch Manual .
9.
Touch Save .
10.
Touch Manual Settings .
11.
Touch Default Gateway .
12.
Touch the Default Gateway text box.
13.
Use the touchscreen keyboard to type the default gateway.
14.
Touch OK .
15.
Touch Save .
Configure TCP/IPv6 parameters
For information about configuring the device for a TCP/IPv6 network, see the
HP Jetdirect Print
Server Administrator's Guide
.
Disable network protocols (optional)
By factory default, all supported network protocols are enabled. Disabling unused protocols has the following benefits:
●
It decreases device-generated network traffic.
●
It prevents unauthorized users from printing to the device.
●
It provides only pertinent information on the configuration page.
●
It allows the device control panel to display protocol-specific error and warning messages.
Disable IPX/SPX
NOTE
Do not disable this protocol in Windows-based systems that print to the printer through IPX/SPX.
1.
Scroll to and touch Administration .
2.
Scroll to and touch Initial Setup .
3.
Touch Networking and I/O .
4.
Touch Embedded Jetdirect .
5.
Touch IPX/SPX .
6.
Touch Enable .
40 Chapter 2 Installation ENWW
7.
Touch Off .
8.
Touch Save .
Disable AppleTalk
1.
Scroll to and touch Administration .
2.
Scroll to and touch Initial Setup .
3.
Touch Networking and I/O .
4.
Touch Embedded Jetdirect .
5.
Touch AppleTalk .
6.
Touch Enable .
7.
Touch Off .
8.
Touch Save .
Disable DLC/LLC
1.
Scroll to and touch Administration .
2.
Scroll to and touch Initial Setup .
3.
Touch Networking and I/O .
4.
Touch Embedded Jetdirect .
5.
Touch DLC/LLC .
6.
Touch Enable .
7.
Touch Off .
8.
Touch Save .
HP Jetdirect EIO print servers
HP Jetdirect print servers (network cards) can be installed in the EIO slot. Supported networking features depend on the print server model. For available HP Jetdirect EIO print server models, go to http://www.hp.com/go/jetdirect .
NOTE
Configure the card through the control panel, the printer installation software, or
HP Web Jetadmin. Refer to the HP Jetdirect print server documentation for more information.
ENWW Network configuration 41
Security features
Several important security features are available for the MFP. Use the information in this section to configure these features to meet the customer's needs.
Securing the embedded Web server
You can assign a password for access to the embedded Web server so that unauthorized users cannot change the MFP settings.
1.
Open the embedded Web server.
2.
Click the
Settings
tab.
3.
On the left side of the window, click
Security
.
4.
Type the password next to
New Password
, and type it again next to
Verify Password
.
5.
Click
Apply
. Make note of the password, and store it in a safe place.
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH)
The Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) provides a portal on the MFP. By using the FIH and third-party equipment, you can track information about copies that are made on the MFP.
Requirements
●
Windows 9
X
, Windows Me, Windows NT ® 4.0, Windows 2000, or Windows XP
●
Access to third-party accounting hardware solutions, such as Equitrac or Copitrak devices
Using the FIH
To use the FIH, you must download and install the FIH software. The software is available from http://www.hp.com/go/ljm4345mfp_software . The software is used to enable or disable the FIH portal. Use the software to set and change the administrator personal identification number (PIN).
Administrators can use the PIN option to configure the FIH to prevent any unauthorized changes.
Changes can be made only with the correct PIN authentication.
NOTE
It is important to remember the PIN that is assigned to the FIH administration software. The PIN is required to make any changes to the FIH.
Enable the FIH portal
1.
Double-click the FIH.EXE file. The
Foreign Interface Harness
dialog box appears.
2.
Click
OK
.
3.
Click
Enable
.
4.
If you have not entered a PIN before, click
No
. If you have entered a PIN before, click
Yes
. If you click
No
, type and confirm the PIN, and then click
OK
. If you click
Yes
, type the PIN and click
OK
.
42 Chapter 2 Installation ENWW
NOTE
The PIN must be numeric.
5.
Click the appropriate button for the type of connection:
Direct
or
Network
. If you select
Direct
, type the MFP port. If you select
Network
, type the IP address and port for the MFP.
NOTE
The IP address for the MFP can be found on the Configuration page. You can print a Configuration page from the control panel by touching Menu , touching
INFORMATION
, and then touching
PRINT CONFIGURATION
.
If you typed an incorrect IP address, you will receive an error message. Otherwise, the portal is enabled.
Disable the FIH portal
1.
Double-click the FIH.EXE file. The
Foreign Interface Harness
dialog box appears.
2.
Click
OK
.
3.
Click
Disable
.
4.
Type the PIN and click
OK
.
5.
Click the appropriate button for the type of connection:
Direct
or
Network
. If you selected
Direct
, type the MFP port and click
OK
. If you selected
Network
, type the IP address and port for the MFP, and then click
OK
. The portal is disabled.
NOTE
If you lose the PIN number and the portal needs to be disabled, try using the default
PIN that is listed to disable it. For assistance, use the HP Instant Support service, which is available through the embedded Web server or at http://instantsupport.hp.com
.
Secure Disk Erase
You might need to protect deleted data from unauthorized access on the MFP hard drive. Secure
Disk Erase is a security feature that you can use to securely erase print and copy jobs from the hard drive.
Secure Disk Erase offers the following levels of disk security:
●
Non-Secure Fast Erase
. This is a simple file-table erase function. Access to the file is removed, but actual data is retained on the disk until it is overwritten by subsequent datastorage operations. This is the fastest mode. Non-Secure Fast Erase is the default erase mode.
●
Secure Fast Erase
. Access to the file is removed, and the data is overwritten with a fixed identical character pattern. This is slower than Non-Secure Fast Erase, but all data is overwritten. Secure Fast Erase meets the U.S. Department of Defense 5220-22.M requirements for the clearing of disk media.
●
Secure Sanitizing Erase
. This level is similar to the Secure Fast Erase mode. In addition, data is repetitively overwritten by using an algorithm that prevents any residual data persistence. This mode will impact performance. Secure Sanitizing Erase meets the U.S. Department of Defense
5220-22.M requirements for the sanitization of disk media.
ENWW Security features 43
Data affected
Data affected (covered) by the Secure Disk Erase feature includes stored jobs, proof and hold jobs, disk-based fonts, disk-based macros (forms), and temporary files that are created during the print and copying process.
NOTE
Stored jobs will be securely overwritten only when they have been deleted through the
RETRIEVE JOB
menu on the MFP after the appropriate erase mode has been set.
This feature will not impact data that is stored on flash-based product non-volatile RAM (NVRAM) that is used to store default settings, page counts, and similar data. This feature does not affect data that is stored on a system RAM disk (if one is used). This feature does not impact data that is stored on the flash-based system boot RAM.
Changing the Secure Disk Erase mode does not overwrite previous data on the disk, nor does it immediately perform a full-disk sanitization. Changing the Secure Disk Erase mode changes how the
MFP cleans up temporary data for jobs after the erase mode has been changed.
Gaining access to Secure Disk Erase
Use HP Web Jetadmin to gain access to and set the Secure Disk Erase feature.
Additional Information
For additional information about the HP Secure Disk Erase feature, see the HP support flyer or go to http://www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin/ .
Job-storage features
Several job-storage features are available for this MFP. These features include printing private jobs, storing print jobs, quick-copying jobs, and proofing and holding jobs.
HP DSS authentication
Optional HP Digital Sending Software (HP DSS) for the MFP is available for purchase separately.
The software provides an advanced sending program that contains an authentication process. This process requires users to type a user identification and a password before they can use any of the
HP DSS features that require authentication.
Locking the control-panel menus
To prevent someone from changing MFP configuration, you can lock the control-panel menus. This prevents unauthorized users from changing the configuration settings such as the SMTP server. The following procedure describes how to restrict access to the control-panel menus by using the
HP Web Jetadmin software.
1.
Open the HP Web Jetadmin program.
2.
Open the
DEVICE MANAGEMENT
folder in the drop-down list in the
Navigation
panel.
Navigate to the
DEVICE LISTS
folder.
3.
Select the MFP.
4.
In the
Device Tools
drop-down list, select
Configure
.
44 Chapter 2 Installation ENWW
5.
Select
Security
from the
Configuration Categories
list.
6.
Type a
Device Password
.
7.
In the
Control Panel Access
section, select
Maximum Lock
. This prevents unauthorized users from gaining access to configuration settings.
Locking the formatter cage
You can place a Kensington lock on the formatter cage to prevent unauthorized access to components on the formatter.
NOTE
A Kensington lock is typically used for locking laptop computers in order to prevent theft.
The following figure indicates where you should place the lock.
ENWW Security features 45
46 Chapter 2 Installation ENWW
3 Manage and maintain the device
This chapter describes how to manage the printer:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Use the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Disable Embedded Jetdirect I/O
●
ENWW 47
Control-panel menus
Use the control panel
The control panel has a VGA touchscreen that provides access to all device functions. Use the buttons and numeric keypad to control jobs and the device status. The LEDs indicate overall device status.
Control-panel layout
The control panel includes a touchscreen graphical display, job-control buttons, a numeric keypad, and three light-emitting diode (LED) status lights.
1
4
5
6
2
3
7
8
9
10
Attention
light
Data
light
Ready
light
Brightness-adjustment dial
Touchscreen graphical display
Numeric keypad
Sleep button
Reset
Stop
Start
button
button
button
The Attention light indicates that the device has a condition that requires intervention. Examples include an empty paper tray or an error message on the touchscreen.
The Data light indicates that the device is receiving data.
The Ready light indicates that the device is ready to begin processing any job.
Turn the dial to control the brightness of the touchscreen.
Use the touchscreen to open and set up all device functions.
Allows you to type numeric values for number of copies required and other numeric values.
If the device is inactive for a long period of time, it automatically enters a sleep mode. To place the device into sleep mode or to reactivate the device, press the Sleep button.
Resets the job settings to factory or user-defined default values.
Stops the active job. While stopped, the control panel shows the options for the stopped job (for example, if you press the Stop button while the device is processing a print job, the control panel message prompts you to cancel or resume the print job).
Begins a copy job, starts digital sending, or continues a job that has been interrupted.
48 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
Home screen
The home screen provides access to the device features, and it indicates the current status of the device.
NOTE
Depending on how the system administrator has configured the device, the features that appear on the home screen can vary.
ENWW
1
2 Device status line
5
6
3
4
7
8
Features
Copy count
Help button
Scroll bar
Sign Out
Network Address
Date and time
Depending on how the system administrator has configured the device, the features that appear in this area can include any of the following items:
●
Copy
●
Fax
●
●
Secondary E-mail
●
Network Folder
●
Job Storage
●
Workflow
●
Supplies Status
●
Administration
The status line provides information about the overall device status. Various buttons appear in this area, depending on the current status. For a description of each button that can appear in the status line, see
Buttons on the touchscreen on page 50 .
The copy count box indicates the number of copies that the device is set to make.
Touch the Help button to open the embedded help system.
Touch the up or down arrows on the scroll bar to see the complete list of available features.
Touch Sign Out to sign out of the device if you have signed in for access to restricted features. After you sign out, the device restores all options to the default settings.
Touch Network Address to find information about the network connection.
The current date and time appear here. The system administrator can select the format that the device uses to show the date and time, for example 12-hour format or 24-hour format.
Control-panel menus 49
Buttons on the touchscreen
The status line on the touchscreen provides information about the status of the device. Various buttons can appear in this area. The following table describes each button.
Home button
. Touch the home button to go to the Home screen from any other screen.
Start button
. Touch the Start button to begin the action for the feature that you are using.
NOTE
The name of this button changes for each feature. For example, in the Copy feature, the button is named Start Copy .
Stop button
. If the device is processing a print or fax job, the Stop button appears instead of the Start button. Touch the Stop button to halt the current job. The device prompts you to cancel the job or to resume it.
Error button
. The error button appears whenever the device has an error that requires attention before it can continue. Touch the error button to see a message that describes the error. The message also has instructions for solving the problem.
Warning button
. The warning button appears when the device has a problem but can continue functioning. Touch the warning button to see a message that describes the problem. The message also has instructions for solving the problem.
Help button
. Touch the help button to open the built-in online Help system. For more information, see
Control-panel help system on page 50 .
Control-panel help system
The device has a built-in Help system that explains how to use each screen. To open the Help system, touch the Help button ( ) in the upper-right corner of the screen.
For some screens, the Help opens to a global menu where you can search for specific topics. You can browse through the menu structure by touching the buttons in the menu.
For screens that contain settings for individual jobs, the Help opens to a topic that explains the options for that screen.
If the device alerts you of an error or warning, touch the error ( ) or warning ( ) button to open a message that describes the problem. The message also contains instructions to help solve the problem.
Navigate the Administration menu
From the Home screen, touch Administration to open the menu structure. You might need to scroll to the bottom of the Home screen to see this feature.
The Administration menu has several sub-menus, which are listed on the left side of the screen.
Touch the name of a menu to expand the structure. A plus sign (+) next to a menu name means that it contains sub-menus. Continue opening the structure until you reach the option that you want to configure. To return to the previous level, touch Back .
50 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
To exit the Administration menu, touch the Home button ( ) in the upper-left corner of the screen.
The device has built-in Help that explains each of the features that are available through the menus.
Help is available for many menus on the right-hand side of the touchscreen. Or, to open the global
Help system, touch the Help button ( ) in the upper-right corner of the screen.
The tables in the sections that follow indicate the overall structure of each menu.
Information menu
Use this menu to print information pages and reports that are stored internally on the device.
Table 3-1
Information menu
Menu item Sub-menu item
Configuration/Status
Pages
Administration
Menu Map
Configuration Page
Supplies Status
Page
Usage Page
File Directory
Sub-menu item Values
Print (button)
Print (button)
Print (button)
Print (button)
Print (button)
Description
Shows the basic structure of the
Administration menu and current administration settings.
A set of configuration pages that show the current device settings.
Shows the status of supplies such as cartridges, maintenance kits, and staples.
Shows information about the number of pages that have been printed on each paper type and size.
A directory page that contains information for any mass-storage devices, such as flash drives, memory cards, or hard disks, that are installed in this device.
ENWW Control-panel menus 51
Table 3-1
Information menu (continued)
Menu item
Fax Reports
Sub-menu item
Fax Activity Log
Fax Call Report
Sub-menu item
Fax Call Report
Values
Thumbnail on Report Yes
No
(button)
(button)
(default)
Description
Contains a list of the faxes that have been sent from or received by this device.
A detailed report of the last fax operation, either sent or received.
Choose whether or not to include a thumbnail of the first page of the fax on the report.
Billing Codes Report
Blocked Fax List
Speed Dial List
Sample Pages/Fonts PCL Font List
PS Font List
When to Print Report Never auto print
After Any Fax Job
After Fax Send Jobs
After Any Fax Error
After Send Errors Only
After Receive Errors Only
A list of billing codes that have been used for outgoing faxes. This report shows how many sent faxes were billed to each code.
A list of phone numbers that are blocked from sending faxes to this device.
Shows the speed dials that have been set up for this device.
A list of printer control language (PCL) fonts that are currently available on the device.
A list of PostScript (PS) fonts that are currently available on the device.
Default Job Options menu
Use this menu to define the default job options for each function. If the user does not specify the job options when creating the job, the default options are used.
●
Default Options for Originals
●
Default Copy Options
●
Default Fax Options
●
Default E-mail Options (for outgoing e-mail)
●
Default Send To Folder Options (for scans to the computer)
●
Default Print Options (for jobs sent from a computer)
52 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
Default Options for Originals
Table 3-2
Default Options for Originals menu
Menu item
Paper Size
Number of Sides
Orientation
Optimize Text/Picture
Darkness
Background Cleanup
Sharpness
Values Description
1
2
Select a paper size from the list.
Select the paper size that is most often used for copy or scan originals.
Select whether copy or scan originals are most often single-sided or double-sided.
Portrait
Landscape
Select the orientation that is most often used for copy or scan originals. Select Portrait if the short edge is at the top or select
Landscape if the long edge is at the top.
Manually Adjust
Text
Photograph
Use this setting to optimize the output for a particular type of original: text, pictures, or a mixture of both.
Select Manually Adjust to specify the mix of text and pictures.
Select a value.
Adjust the value within the range. Increase the Background Cleanup setting to remove faint images from the background or to remove light background color.
Adjust the value within the range. Increase the Sharpness setting to clarify or soften the image.
ENWW Control-panel menus 53
Default Copy Options
Table 3-3
Default Copy Options menu
Menu item
Number of Copies
Sub-menu item
Number of Sides
Staple/Collate Staple
Collate
Edge-To-Edge
Values
1
2
Type the number of copies. The factory default setting is 1.
None (default)
One left angled
Off
On (default)
Normal (recommended)
(default)
Edge-To-Edge Output
Description
Set the default number of copies for a copy job.
Set the default number of sides for copies.
Set up options for stapling and collating sets of copies.
If collation is selected, the device prints a complete copy before starting on the next copy. If collation is not selected, the device prints the first page 1 of all copies, then the second page, and so on.
If the original document is printed close to the edges, use the Edge-To-Edge feature to avoid shadows that can appear along the edges. Combine this feature with the Reduce/Enlarge feature to ensure that the entire page is printed on the copies.
54 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
Default Fax Options
Table 3-4
Fax Send menu
Menu item
Resolution
Fax Header
Sub-menu item Values
Standard (100x200dpi)
(default)
Fine (200x200dpi)
Superfine (300x300dpi)
Prepend
Overlay
Description
Set the resolution for sent documents. Higher resolution images have more dots per inch (dpi), so they show more detail. Lower resolution images have fewer dots per inch and show less detail, but the file size is smaller.
Select the position of the fax header on the page.
Select Prepend to print the fax header above the fax content and move the fax content down on the page.
Select Overlay to print the fax header over the top of the fax content without moving the fax content down.
Using this option could prevent a single-page fax from flowing onto another page.
Table 3-5
Fax Receive menu
Menu item
Forward Fax
Stamp Received Faxes
Fit to Page
Fax Paper Tray
Values
Fax Forwarding
Change PIN
Enabled
Disabled (default)
Enabled
Disabled
Select from the list of trays.
Description
To forward received faxes to another fax device, select Fax
Forwarding and Custom . Type the number of the other fax device into the Fax Forwarding Number field. Set up a PIN to type every time you use this menu. This is the same PIN that is used to access the Fax Printing menu.
Add the date, time, sender’s phone number, and page number to each page of the received.
Use this feature to shrink faxes that are larger than letter-size or
A4-size so that they can fit onto a page of that size. If it this feature set to Disabled , faxes larger than letter or A4 flow across multiple pages.
Select the tray that holds the size and type of paper that you want to use for incoming faxes.
ENWW Control-panel menus 55
Default E-mail Options
Use this menu to set default options for e-mails that are sent from the device.
Menu item
Document File Type
Output Quality
Resolution
Color/Black
TIFF Version
Values
PDF (default)
JPEG
TIFF
M-TIFF
High (large file)
Medium (default)
Low (small file)
75 DPI
150 DPI (default)
200 DPI
300 DPI
Color scan (default)
Black/white scan
TIFF 6.0
(default)
TIFF (Post 6.0)
Description
Select the file format for the e-mail.
Selecting higher quality for output increases the size of the output file.
Select the resolution. Use a lower setting to create smaller files.
Specify whether the e-mail will be in black or in color.
Use this feature to specify the TIFF version to use when saving scanned files.
56 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
Default Send to Folder Options
Menu item
Color/Black
Document File Type
TIFF version
Output Quality
Resolution
Values
Color scan
Black/white scan (default)
PDF (default)
M-TIFF
TIFF
JPEG
TIFF 6.0
(default)
TIFF (post 6.0)
High (large file)
Medium (default)
Low (small file)
75 DPI
150 DPI (default)
200 DPI
300 DPI
400 DPI
600 DPI
Description
Specify whether the file will be in black or in color.
Select the file format for the file.
Specify the TIFF version to use when saving scanned files.
Choosing higher quality for output increases the size of the output file.
Use this feature to select the resolution. Use a lower setting to create smaller files.
ENWW Control-panel menus 57
Default Print Options
Table 3-6
Default Print Options menu
Menu item
Copies Per Job
Sub-menu item
Default Paper Size
Default Custom Paper
Size
Unit of measure
Print Sides
X Dimension
Y Dimension
2-Sided Format
Values Description
Type a value.
Use this feature to set the default number of copies for print jobs.
(List of supported sizes.) Choose a paper size.
Millimeters
Inches
Configure the default paper size that is used when the user selects Custom as the paper size for a print job.
Configure the width measurement for the Default
Custom Paper Size .
Configure the height measurement for the Default
Custom Paper Size .
Use this feature to select whether print jobs should be single-sided or double-sided by default.
1-sided
2-sided
Book style
Flip style
Use this feature to configure the default style for 2sided print jobs. If Book style is selected, the back side of the page is printed the right way up. This option is for print jobs that are bound along the left edge. If Flip style is selected, the back side of the page is printed upside-down. This option is for print jobs that are bound along the top edge.
Time/Scheduling menu
Use this menu to set options for setting the time and for setting the device to enter and exit sleep mode.
NOTE
Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.
58 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
Table 3-7
Time/Scheduling menu
Menu item
Date/Time
Sleep Delay
Fax Printing
Sub-menu item
Date Format
Date
Time Format
Time
Fax Printing Mode
Change PIN
Hour
Minute
AM
PM
Sub-menu item Values
YYYY/MMM/DD
(default)
MMM/DD/YYYY
DD/MMM/YYYY
Month
Day
Year
12 hour (AM/PM)
(default)
24 hour
Description
Use this feature to set the current date and time, and to set the date format and time format that are used to time-stamp outgoing faxes.
1 minute
20 minutes
30 minutes (default)
45 minutes
1 hour (60 minutes)
Store all received faxes
Print all received faxes
Use Fax Printing
Schedule
Use this feature to select the time interval that the device should remain inactive before entering Sleep Mode.
If you have concerns about the security of private faxes, use this feature to store faxes rather than having them automatically print by creating a printing schedule.
For the fax printing schedule, the control panel prompts you to select days and times to print faxes.
Select Change PIN to change the PIN number that users must provide to print faxes.
Management menu
Use this menu to set up global device-management options.
NOTE
Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.
ENWW Control-panel menus 59
Table 3-8
Management menu
Menu item Sub-menu item Values Description
Stored Job Management
Sleep mode
Manage Supplies
Quick Copy Job Storage
Limit
Quick Copy Job Held
Timeout
Select the maximum number of jobs to store
1 Hour
4 Hours
1 Day
Use this menu to view and manage any jobs that are stored on the device.
Supply Low/Order
Threshold
1 Week
Disable
Use Sleep Delay (default)
Use this feature to customize the sleep mode settings for this device.
Select Use Sleep Delay to set the device to enter sleep mode after the delay that is specified in the
Time/Scheduling menu.
Select a value in the range.
Use this menu to carry out administrative supply management tasks such as changing the threshold when supplies should be ordered.
Replace Black Cartridge Stop at low
Stop at out
Override at out (default)
Initial Setup menu
The Initial Setup menu contains the sub-menus shown:
●
Networking and I/O menu
●
Fax Setup menu
●
E-mail Setup menu
●
Send Setup menu
NOTE
Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.
Networking and I/O
Table 3-9
Networking and I/O
Menu item
I/O Timeout
Sub-menu item Values
Select a value in the range. The factory default setting is
15 seconds.
Description
I/O timeout refers to the elapsed time before a print job fails. If the stream of data that the device receives for a print job gets interrupted, this setting indicates how long the device will wait before it reports that the job has failed.
60 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
Table 3-9
Networking and I/O (continued)
Menu item Sub-menu item
Parallel Input High Speed
NOTE
This item appears only if an EIO accessory is installed.
Embedded Jetdirect
EIO <X> Jetdirect
Advanced Functions
Values
No
Yes (default)
Enabled (default)
Disabled
Description
Use the High Speed setting to configure the speed that the parallel port uses to communicate with the host.
Use the Advanced Functions setting to enable or disable bidirectional parallel communication.
See
Table 3-10 Jetdirect menus on page 61 for the list of options.
Table 3-10
Jetdirect menus
Menu item
TCP/IP
Sub-menu item
Enable
Host Name
IPV4 Settings
Sub-menu item
Config Method
DHCP Release
DHCP Renew
Values and Description
Off : Disable the TCP/IP protocol.
On (default): Enable the TCP/IP protocol.
An alphanumeric string, up to 32 characters, used to identify the device. This name is listed on the
HP Jetdirect configuration page. The default host name is NPIxxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the LAN hardware (MAC) address.
Specifies the method that TCP/IPv4 parameters will be configured on the HP Jetdirect print server.
Bootp : Use BootP (Bootstrap Protocol) for automatic configuration from a BootP server.
DHCP : Use DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol) for automatic configuration from a DHCPv4 server. If selected and a DHCP lease exists, DHCP
Release and DHCP Renew menus are available to set DHCP lease options.
Auto IP : Use automatic link-local IPv4 addressing.
An address in the form 169.254.x.x is assigned automatically.
Manual : Use the Manual Settings menu to configure
TCP/IPv4 parameters.
This menu appears if Config Method was set to
DHCP and a DHCP lease for the print server exists.
No (default): The current DHCP lease is saved.
Yes : The current DHCP lease and the leased IP address are released.
This menu appears if Config Method was set to
DHCP and a DHCP lease for the print server exists.
No (default): The print server does not request to renew the DHCP lease.
Yes : The print server requests to renew the current
DHCP lease.
ENWW Control-panel menus 61
Table 3-10
Jetdirect menus (continued)
Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item
Manual Settings
62
IPV6 Settings
Default IP
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Enable
Address
DHCPV6 Policy
Primary DNS
Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device
Values and Description
(Available only if Config Method is set to Manual )
Configure parameters directly from the printer control panel:
IP Address : The unique IP address of the printer
(n.n.n.n), where n is a value from 0 to 255.
Subnet Mask : The subnet mask for the printer
(m.m.m.m), where m is a value from 0 to 255.
Syslog Server : The IP address of the syslog server used to receive and log syslog messages.
Default Gateway : The IP address of the gateway or router used for communications with other networks.
Idle Timeout : The time period, in seconds, after which an idle TCP print data connection is closed
(default is 270 seconds, 0 disables the timeout).
Specify the IP address to default to when the print server is unable to obtain an IP address from the network during a forced TCP/IP reconfiguration (for example, when manually configured to use BootP or
DHCP).
Auto IP : A link-local IP address 169.254.x.x is set.
Legacy : The address 192.0.0.192 is set, consistent with older HP Jetdirect devices.
Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Primary DNS
Server.
Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Secondary
Domain Name System (DNS) Server.
Use this item to enable or disable IPv6 operation on the print server.
Off (default): IPv6 is disabled.
On : IPv6 is enabled.
Use this item to manually configure an IPv6 address.
Manual Settings : Use the Manual Settings menu to enable and manually configure a TCP/ IPv6 address.
Router Specified : The stateful auto-configuration method to be used by the print server is determined by a router. The router specifies whether the print server obtains its address, its configuration information, or both from a DHCPv6 server.
Router Unavailable : If a router is not available, the print server should attempt to obtain its stateful configuration from a DHCPv6 server.
Always : Whether or not a router is available, the print server always attempts to obtain its stateful configuration from a DHCPv6 server.
Use this item to specify an IPv6 address for a primary DNS server that the print server should use.
ENWW
Table 3-10
Jetdirect menus (continued)
Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item
Manual Settings
IPX/SPX
AppleTalk
DLC/LLC
Proxy Server
Proxy Port
Enable
Frame Type
Enable
Enable
Values and Description
Use this item to manually set IPv6 addresses on the print server.
Enable : Select this item and choose On to enable manual configuration, or Off to disable manual configuration.
Address : Use this item to type a 32 hexadecimal digit
IPv6 node address that uses the colon hexadecimal syntax.
Specifies the proxy server to be used by embedded applications in the device. A proxy server is typically used by network clients for Internet access. It caches
Web pages, and provides a degree of Internet security, for those clients.
To specify a proxy server, enter its IPv4 address or fully-qualified domain name. The name can be up to
255 octets.
For some networks, you may need to contact your
Independent Service Provider (ISP) for the proxy server address.
Type the port number used by the proxy server for client support. The port number identifies the port reserved for proxy activity on your network, and can be a value from 0 to 65535.
Off : Disable the IPX/SPX protocol.
On (default): Enable the IPX/SPX protocol.
Selects the frame-type setting for your network.
Auto : Automatically sets and limits the frame type to the first one detected.
EN_8023 , EN_II , EN_8022 , and EN_SNAP : Frametype selections for Ethernet networks.
Off (default): Disable the AppleTalk protocol.
On : Enable the AppleTalk protocol.
Off (default): Disable the DLC/LLC protocol.
On : Enable the DLC/LLC protocol.
ENWW Control-panel menus 63
Table 3-10
Jetdirect menus (continued)
Menu item
Security
Diagnostics
Sub-menu item
Print Sec Page
Secure Web
IPsec or Firewall
Reset Security
Embedded Test
Sub-menu item
LAN HW Test
HTTP Test
Values and Description
Yes : Prints a page that contains the current security settings on the HP Jetdirect print server.
No (default): A security settings page is not printed.
For configuration management, specify whether the embedded Web server will accept communications using HTTPS (Secure HTTP) only, or both HTTP and HTTPS.
HTTPS Required : For secure, encrypted communications, only HTTPS access is accepted.
The print server will appear as a secure site.
HTTP/HTTPS optional : Access using either HTTP or
HTTPS is permitted.
Specify the IPsec or Firewall status on the print server.
Keep : IPsec/Firewall status remains the same as currently configured.
Disable : IPsec/Firewall operation on the print server is disabled.
Specify whether the current security settings on the print server will be saved or reset to factory defaults.
No *: The current security settings are maintained.
Yes : Security settings are reset to factory defaults.
This menu provides tests to help diagnose network hardware or TCP/IP network connection problems.
Embedded tests help to identify whether a network fault is internal or external to the device. Use an embedded test to check hardware and communication paths on the print server. After you select and enable a test and set the execution time, you must select Execute to initiate the test.
Depending on the execution time, a selected test runs continuously until either the device is turned off, or an error occurs and a diagnostic page is printed.
CAUTION
Running this embedded test will erase your TCP/IP configuration.
This test performs an internal loopback test. An internal loopback test will send and receive packets only on the internal network hardware. There are no external transmissions on your network.
Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it.
This test checks operation of HTTP by retrieving predefined pages from the device, and tests the embedded Web server.
Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it.
64 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
Table 3-10
Jetdirect menus (continued)
Menu item Sub-menu item
Ping Test
Dest Type
Dest IP
Packet Size
Timeout
Count
Print Results
Sub-menu item
SNMP Test
Select All Tests
Data Path Test
Execution Time [H]
Execute
Execute
Values and Description
This test checks operation of SNMP communications by accessing predefined SNMP objects on the device.
Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it.
Use this item to select all available embedded tests.
Select Yes to choose all tests. Select No to select individual tests.
This test helps to identify data path and corruption problems on an HP postscript level 3 emulation device. It sends a predefined PS file to the device,
However, the test is paperless; the file will not print.
Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it.
Use this item to specify the length of time (in hours) that an embedded test will be run. You can select a value from 1 to 60 hours. If you select zero (0), the test runs indefinitely until an error occurs or device is turned off.
Data gathered from the HTTP, SNMP, and Data
Path tests is printed after the tests have completed.
No *: Do not initiate the selected tests.
Yes : Initiate the selected tests.
This test is used to check network communications.
This test sends link-level packets to a remote network host, then waits for an appropriate response. To run a ping test, set the following items:
Specify whether the target device is an IPv4 or IPv6 node.
IPV4 : Type the IPv4 address.
IPV6 : Type the IPv6 address.
Specify the size of each packet, in bytes, to be sent to the remote host. The minimum is 64 (default) and the maximum is 2048.
Specify the length of time, in seconds, to wait for a response from the remote host. The default is 1 and the maximum is 100.
Specify the number of ping test packets to send for this test. Select a value from 1 to 100. To configure the test to run continuously, select 0.
If the ping test was not set for continuous operation, you can choose to print the test results. Select Yes to print results. If you select No (default), results are not printed.
Specify whether to initiate the ping test. Select Yes to initiate the test, or No to not run the test.
ENWW Control-panel menus 65
Table 3-10
Jetdirect menus (continued)
Menu item Sub-menu item
Ping Results
Link Speed
Sub-menu item
Packets Sent
Packets Received
Percent Lost
RTT Min
RTT Max
RTT Average
Ping In Progress
Refresh
Values and Description
Use this item to view the ping test status and results using the control panel display. You can select the following items:
Shows the number of packets (0 - 65535) sent to the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed.
Shows the number of packets (0 - 65535) received from the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed.
Shows the percent of ping test packets that were sent with no response from the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed.
Shows the minimum detected roundtrip- time (RTT), from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and response.
Shows the maximum detected roundtrip- time (RTT), from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and response.
Shows the average round-trip-time (RTT), from 0 to
4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and response.
Shows whether a ping test is in progress. Yes indicates a test in progress, and No indicates that a test completed or was not run.
When viewing the ping test results, this item updates the ping test data with current results. Select Yes to update the data, or No to maintain the existing data.
However, a refresh automatically occurs when the menu times out or you manually return to the main menu.
The link speed and communication mode of the print server must match the network. The available settings depend on the device and installed print server. Select one of the following link configuration settings:
CAUTION
If you change the link setting, network communications with the print server and network device might be lost.
Auto (default): The print server uses auto-negotiation to configure itself with the highest link speed and communication mode allowed. If auto-negotiation fails, either 100TX HALF or 10TX HALF is set depending on the detected link speed of the hub/ switch port. (A 1000T half-duplex selection is not supported.)
10T Half : 10 Mbps, half-duplex operation.
10T Full : 10 Mbps, Full-duplex operation.
100TX Half : 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation.
66 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
Table 3-10
Jetdirect menus (continued)
Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item
Print Protocols
Values and Description
100TX Full : 100 Mbps, full-duplex operation.
100TX Auto : Limits auto-negotiation to a maximum link speed of 100 Mbps.
1000TX Full : 1000 Mbps, full-duplex operation.
Use this item to print a page that lists the configuration of the following protocols: IPX/SPX,
Novell NetWare, AppleTalk, DLC/LLC.
ENWW Control-panel menus 67
Fax Setup
Table 3-11
Fax Setup menu
Menu item
Required Settings
Sub-menu item
Location
PC Fax Send
Date/Time
Fax Header
Information
Sub-menu item
Phone Number
Company Name
Values
(Countries/regions listed)
Description
Configure the settings that are legally required for outgoing faxes.
Disabled
Enabled (default)
Use this feature to enable or disable PC
Fax Send. PC Fax Send enables users to send faxes through the device from their computers if they have the correct driver installed.
68 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
Table 3-11
Fax Setup menu (continued)
Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item
Fax Send Settings Fax Dial Volume
Error Correction
Mode
JBIG Compression
Maximum Baud Rate
TCF T.30 Delay
Timer
TCF Extend
Ring Frequency
Dialing Mode
Redial On Busy
Redial On No
Answer
Redial Interval
Detect Dial Tone
Values
Off
Medium (default)
High
Enabled (default)
Disabled
Description
Use this feature to set the volume of the tones that you hear while the device dials the fax number.
Disabled
Enabled (default)
Select a value from the list.
Default
Custom
Default
Custom
(default)
(default)
Select from a list.
When Error Correction Mode is enabled and an error occurs during fax transmission, the device sends or receives the error portion again.
The JBIG Compression reduces faxtransmission time, which can result in lower phone charges. However, using JBIG
Compression sometimes causes compatibility problems with older fax machines. If this occurs, turn off the JBIG
Compression.
Use this feature to set the maximum baud rate for receiving faxes. This can be used as a diagnostic tool for troubleshooting fax problems.
This setting should be left at the default value and only changed when directed by an HP technical support agent. Adjustment procedures associated with this setting are beyond the scope of this guide.
This setting should be left at the default value and only changed when directed by an HP technical support agent. Adjustment procedures associated with this setting are beyond the scope of this guide.
Select the interval between rings for incoming faxes.
Select whether the device should use tone or pulse dialing.
Tone (default)
Pulse
The range is between 0 and 9.
The factory default is 3 times.
Never (default)
Once
Twice
Type the number of times the device should attempt to redial if the line is busy.
Use this feature to specify the number of times the device should attempt to dial if the recipient fax number does not answer.
NOTE
Twice is available in locations other than the United
States and Canada.
The range is between 1 and 5 minutes. The factory default is 5 minutes.
Enabled
Disabled (default)
Use this feature to specify the number of minutes between dialing attempts if the recipient number is busy or not answering.
Use this feature to specify whether the device should check for a dial tone before sending a fax.
ENWW Control-panel menus 69
Table 3-11
Fax Setup menu (continued)
Menu item Sub-menu item
Dialing Prefix
Billing Codes
Ring Interval
Ringer Volume
Blocked Fax
Numbers
Sub-menu item
Fax Receive Settings Rings To Answer
Minimum Length
Add Blocked
Numbers
Remove Blocked
Numbers
Clear All Blocked
Numbers
Values
Low (default)
High
Type the fax number to add.
Select a fax number to remove.
No (default)
Yes
Description
Off
Custom
Off
(default)
(default)
Custom
Use this feature to specify a prefix number that must be dialed when sending faxes from the device.
When billing codes are enabled, a prompt appears that asks the user to enter the billing code for an outgoing fax.
The range is between 1 and 16 digits. The default is 1 digit.
The range varies by location. The factory default is 2 rings.
Use this feature to specify the number of rings that must occur before the fax modem answers.
Default (default) Use this feature to control the time between rings for incoming faxes.
Custom
Off Set the volume for the fax ring-tone.
Use this feature to add or delete numbers from the blocked fax list. The blocked fax list can contain up to 30 numbers. When the device receives a call from one of the blocked fax numbers, it deletes the incoming fax. It also logs the blocked fax in the activity log along with job-accounting information.
70 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
E-mail Setup
Use this menu to enable the e-mail feature and to configure basic e-mail settings.
NOTE
To configure advanced e-mail settings, use the embedded Web server. For more
information, see Embedded Web server on page 36 .
Table 3-12
E-mail Setup menu
Menu item
Address Validation
Find Send Gateways
SMTP Gateway
Test Send Gateway
Values
On (default)
Off
Enter a value.
Description
This option enables the device to check e-mail syntax when you type an e-mail address. Valid e-mail addresses require the "@" sign and a ".".
Search the network for SMTP gateways that the device can use to send e-mail.
Specify the IP address of the SMTP gateway that is used to send email from the device.
Test the configured SMTP gateway to see if it is functional.
Send Setup menu
Table 3-13
Send Setup menu
Menu item
Replicate MFP
Allow Transfer to New DSS
Values
Enter a value (IP Address).
NOTE
This item appears only for the
HP LaserJet M4345
MFP models.
Allow Use of Digital Send Service
NOTE
This item appears only for the
HP LaserJet M4345
MFP models.
Description
Copy the local Send settings from one device to another.
Use this feature to allow the transfer of the device from one
HP Digital Sending Software (DSS) server to another.
HP DSS is a software package that handles digital sending tasks such as faxing, e-mail, and sending a scanned document to a network folder.
This feature allows you to configure the device for use with an
HP Digital Sending Software (DSS) server.
Device Behavior menu
NOTE
Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.
ENWW Control-panel menus 71
Table 3-14
Device Behavior menu
Menu item
Language
Key Press Sound
Inactivity Timeout
Warning/Error
Behavior
Stapler/Stacker
Sub-menu item
Clearable Warnings
Continuable Events
Jam Recovery
Staple
Staples Out
Sub-menu item Values Description
Select the language from the list.
On
Off
(default)
Auto continue (10 seconds) (default)
Use this feature to select a different language for control-panel messages.
When you select a new language, the keyboard layout might also change.
Use this feature to specify whether you hear a sound when you touch the screen or press buttons on the control panel.
Type a value between 10 and 300 seconds. The factory default is 60 seconds.
Use this feature to specify the amount of time that elapses between any activity on the control panel and the device resetting to the default settings.
On
Job (default)
Use this feature to set the amount of time that a clearable warning appears on the control panel.
Use this option to configure the device behavior when the device encounters certain errors.
Touch OK to continue
Auto (default)
On
Use this feature to configure how the device handles pages that are lost during a jam.
Off
None If the optional stapler/stacker is installed, use this feature to set stapling characteristics for the device.
One
Continue (default)
Stop
72 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
Table 3-14
Device Behavior menu (continued)
Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item
Tray Behavior Use Requested Tray
MBM-3
Configuration
General Copy
Behavior
Manually Feed
Prompt
PS Defer Media
Use Another Tray
Size/Type Prompt
Duplex Blank Pages
Operation Mode
Scan Ahead
Auto Print Interrupt
Copy Interrupt
Alternative
Letterhead Mode
Values
Exclusively (default)
First
Always (default)
Unless Loaded
Description
Use this feature to control how the device handles jobs that have specified a specific input tray.
Use this feature to indicate whether a prompt should appear when the type or size for a job does not match the specified tray and the device pulls from the multipurpose tray instead.
Use this feature to choose either the
PostScript (PS) or HP paper-handling model.
Enabled (default)
Disabled
Enabled (default)
Disabled
Display
Do not display
(default)
Auto (default)
Yes
Function Separator
Mailbox
Stacker
Enabled (default)
Disabled
Use this feature to turn on or off the controlpanel prompt to select another tray when the specified tray is empty.
Use this feature to control whether the tray configuration message appears whenever a tray is opened or closed.
Use this feature to control how the device handles two-sided jobs (duplexing).
Use this feature to configure the optional 3bin mailbox accessory.
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Use this feature to turn on no-wait scanning. With Scan Ahead enabled, the pages in the original document are scanned to disk and held until the device becomes available.
When this feature is enabled, copy jobs can interrupt print jobs that are set to print multiple copies.
The copy job is inserted into the print queue at the end of one copy of the print job. After the copy job is complete, the device continues printing the remaining copies of the print job.
When this feature is enabled, a copy job that is currently printing can be interrupted when a new copy job is started. You are prompted to confirm that you want to interrupt the current job.
No(default)
Yes
ENWW Control-panel menus 73
Table 3-14
Device Behavior menu (continued)
Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item
General Print
Behavior
Override A4/Letter
Manual Feed
Courier Font
Wide A4
Print PS Errors
Print PDF Errors
Personality
Values
No
Yes (default)
Enabled
Disabled (default)
Regular (default)
Dark
Enabled
Disabled (default)
Enabled
Disabled (default)
Enabled
Disabled (default)
Auto (default)
PCL
PS
Description
Use this feature to print on letter-size paper when an A4 job is sent but no A4-size paper is loaded in the device (or to print on
A4 paper when a letter-size job is sent but no letter-size paper is loaded). This option will also override A3 with ledger-size paper and ledger with A3-size paper.
When this feature is enabled, the user can select manual feed from the control panel as the paper source for a job.
Use this feature to select which version of the Courier font you want to use.
Use this feature to change the printable area of A4-size paper. If you enable this option, eighty 10-pitch characters can be printed on a single line of A4 paper.
Use this feature to select whether a
PostScript (PS) error page is printed when the device encounters a PS error.
Use this feature to select whether a PDF error page is printed when the device encounters a PDF error.
Select the printer language that the device should use.
Normally you should not change the language. If you change the setting to a specific language, the device does not automatically switch from one language to another unless specific software commands are sent to the device.
74 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
Table 3-14
Device Behavior menu (continued)
Menu item Sub-menu item
PCL
Sub-menu item
Form Length
Orientation
Font Source
Font Number
Font Pitch
Symbol Set
Append CR to LF
Suppress Blank
Pages
Media Source
Mapping
Values
Type a value between 5 and 128 lines. The factory default is 60 lines.
Portrait (default)
Landscape
Select the source from the list.
Type the font number. The range is between 0 and
999. The factory default is 0.
Description
PCL is a set of printer commands that
Hewlett-Packard developed to provide access to printer features.
Select the orientation that is most often used print jobs. Select Portrait if the short edge is at the top or select Landscape if the long edge is at the top.
Use this feature to select the font source for the user-soft default font.
Use this feature to specify the font number for the user-soft default font using the source that is specified in the Font Source menu item. The device assigns a number to each font and lists it on the PCL font list
(available from the Administration menu).
If Font Source and Font Number indicate a contour font, then use this feature to select a default pitch (for a fixed-spaced font).
Type a value between 0.44 and
99.99. The factory default is 10.00.
PC-8 (default)
(50 additional symbol sets from which to choose)
No (default)
Yes
Use this feature to select any one of several available symbol sets from the control panel. A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the characters in a font.
No (default)
Yes
Standard
Classic
(default)
Use this feature to configure whether a carriage return (CR) is appended to each line feed (LF) encountered in backwardscompatible PCL jobs (pure text, no job control).
This option is for users who are generating their own PCL, which could include extra form feeds that would cause blank pages to be printed. When Yes is selected, form feeds are ignored if the page is blank.
Use this feature to select and maintain input trays by number when you are not using the device driver, or when the software program has no option for tray selection.
Print Quality menu
NOTE
Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.
ENWW Control-panel menus 75
Table 3-15
Print Quality menu
Menu item
Set Registration
Fuser Modes
Optimize
Resolution
REt
Economode
Toner Density
Calibration/Cleaning
Sub-menu item
Test Page
Source
<Paper Type>
Restore Modes
High Transfer
Line Detail
Restore Optimize
Auto Cleaning
Process Cleaning Page
Values
Print (button)
Description
Use Set Registration to shift the margin alignment to center the image on the page from top to bottom and from left to right. You can also align the image on the front with the image printed on the back.
Print a test page for setting the registration.
Select the source input tray for printing the Set
Registration page.
All trays
Tray <X>: <contents>
(choose a tray)
Restore (button)
Normal (default)
Increased
Off (default)
On
300
600
FastRes 1200 (default)
ProRes 1200
Off
Light
Medium (default)
Dark
Enabled
Disabled
Choose from a range of
1 to 5. 3 is the default.
Enabled
Disabled
Process (button)
Configure the fuser mode associated with each media type.
Restore the fuser modes to the default settings.
Optimizes certain parameters for all jobs rather than
(or in addition to) optimizing by paper path.
Use this feature to select the print resolution.
Enable Resolution Enhancement technology (REt), which produces print output with smooth angles, curves, and edges. All print resolutions, including
FastRes 1200, benefit from REt.
When Economode is enabled, the device prints with a reduced amount of toner per page; however, the print quality of the page is slightly reduced.
Lighten or darken the print on the page. 1 is the lightest and 5 is the darkest.
When auto-cleaning is on, the device prints a cleaning page when the page count reaches the value that is set in Cleaning Interval .
Use this feature to create and process a cleaning page for cleaning excess toner off the pressure roller in the fuser. The process takes up to 2.5 minutes.
76 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
Troubleshooting menu
NOTE
Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.
Table 3-16
Troubleshooting menu
Menu item
Event Log
Calibrate Scanner
Fax T.30 Trace
Fax Transmit Signal
Loss
Fax V.34
Fax Speaker Mode
Paper Path Sensors
Sub-menu item
Print T.30 Report
When to Print Report
Sub-menu item Values Description
Print (button)
Calibrate (button)
This feature shows the event codes and their corresponding engine cycles on the display, and it allows you to print the full event log.
Use this feature to compensate for offsets in the scanner imaging system (carriage head) for ADF and flatbed scans.
You might need to calibrate the scanner if it is not capturing the correct sections of scanned documents.
Never auto print
Print after any fax job
Use this feature to print or configure the fax
T.30 trace report. T.30 is the standard that specifies handshaking, protocols, and error correction between fax machines.
Print after fax send jobs
Print after any fax error
Print after send errors only
Print after receive errors only
A value between 0 and 30.
Normal
Off
Normal
(default)
(default)
Diagnostic
Use this feature to set loss levels to compensate for phone line signal loss. You should not modify this setting unless requested to do so by an HP service representative because it could cause the fax to stop functioning.
Use this feature to disable V.34
modulations if several fax failures have occurred or if phone line conditions require it.
This feature can be used by a technician to evaluate and diagnose fax issues by listening to the sounds of fax modulations.
The factory default setting is Normal.
Initiate a test of the paper path sensors.
ENWW Control-panel menus 77
Table 3-16
Troubleshooting menu (continued)
Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item
Paper Path Test
Finishing Paper
Path Test
Test Page
Source
Duplex
Copies
Staples
Stack
Finishing Options
Media Size
Media Type
Copies
Duplex
Print Test Page
Media Size
Media Type
Copies
Duplex
Print Test Page
Values
Print (button)
Range: 2-30,
Default=2
Off
On
Print (button)
Description
Generate a test page for testing paper handling features. You can define the path that is used for the test in order to test specific paper paths.
Specify whether the test page will be printed from all trays or from a specific tray.
All trays
Tray 1
Tray 2
(Additional trays are shown, if applicable.)
Off (default) Select whether the duplexer should be included in the Paper Path test.
On
1, 10, 50, 100, or 500
Default = 1
Select how many pages should be sent from the specified source as part of the
Paper Path test.
Choose from a list of available options.
Test paper handling features for the finisher.
Letter
Select the option that you want to test.
Select the paper size for the Finishing
Paper Path Test.
Legal
A4
8.5 x 13
Select the paper type for the Finishing
Paper Path Test.
Select the number of copies to include in the Finishing Paper Path Test.
Select whether to use the duplexer in the
Finishing Paper Path Test.
Select from a list of sizes.
Select from a list of types.
Range 2–30
Default = 2
Off
On
Print (button)
Print a test page to use for the Finishing
Paper Path Test.
Select the options that you want to use to test the stacker.
Select the type of media to use for the
Finishing Paper Path Test.
Select the number of copies to include in the Finishing Paper Path Test.
Select whether to use the duplexer in the
Finishing Paper Path Test.
Print a test page to use for the Finishing
Paper Path Test.
78 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
Table 3-16
Troubleshooting menu (continued)
Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item
Manual Sensor Test
Component Test
Print/Stop Test
Scanner Tests
Control Panel LEDs
Display
Buttons
Touchscreen
Values
Continuous value from 0 to 60,000 milliseconds. The default is 0 milliseconds.
Description
Test the device sensors and switches for correct operation. Each sensor is displayed on the control-panel screen, along with its status. Manually trip each sensor and watch for it to change on the screen. Press the Stop button to abort the test.
Exercise individual parts independently to isolate noise, leaking, or other issues. To start the test, select one of the components.
The test will run the number of times specified by the Repeat option. You might be prompted to remove parts from the device during the test. Press the Stop button to abort the test.
Isolate faults by stopping the device during the print cycle and observing where in the process the image degrades. To run the test, specify a stop time. The next job that is sent to the device will stop at the specified time in the process.
This menu item is used by a service technician to diagnose potential problems with the device scanner.
Use this feature to make sure the components of the control panel are functioning correctly.
Resets menu
Table 3-17
Resets menu
Menu item
Clear Local Address Book
Values
Clear (button)
Description
Use this feature to clear all addresses from the address books that are stored on the device.
Use this feature to clear all events from the Fax Activity Log.
Clear Fax Activity Log Yes
No (default)
Restore Factory Telecom Setting Restore (button)
Restore Factory Settings
Clear Maintenance Message
Clear Document Feeder
Message
Reset Supplies
Restore
Clear
Clear
(button)
(button)
(button)
New Maintenance Kit (Yes/No)
Use this option to restore the telephone-related settings that are in the Initial Setup menu to factory default values.
Use this feature to restore all device settings to their factory defaults.
Clear the Order Maintenance Kit and Replace Maintenance Kit warning messages.
Use this feature to clear the Order Document Feeder Kit and
Replace Document Feeder Kit warning messages.
Notify the device that a new maintenance kit or document feeder kit has been installed.
ENWW Control-panel menus 79
Menu item Values
New Document Feeder Kit (Yes/
No)
Description
Service menu
The Service menu is locked and requires a PIN for access. The PIN code for this MFP is 11434506.
Table 3-18
Service menu
Menu item
Clear Event Log
Engine Cycle Count
Refurbish Cycle Count
Maintenance Kit Count
Maintenance Kit Interval
Document Feeder Kit Count
Document Feeder Kit Interval
ADF count
Flatbed Count
ADF Simplex Count
ADF Duplex Count
Copy Scan Count
Send Scan Count
Copy Pages Count
Scanner Settings
Serial Number
Description
Select this item to clear (reset to zero) the internal event log.
Select this item to print a report that displays the number of pages the formatter has formatted.
Select this item to set the page count for a refurbished unit. This page count is stored in memory so that the correct Service ID can be restored after the MFP is refurbished.
Select this item to set a) the number of pages that have been printed since the last maintenance kit was installed, or b) the total number of pages that have been printed on this MFP if a maintenance kit has not yet been installed (during the first 225,000 pages).
Select this item to specify the number of pages that can be printed before a Perform
Printer Maintenance messages appears on the control-panel display to indicate that a maintenance kit is necessary.
Select this item to set a) the number of pages that have been printed since the last document-feeder kit was installed, or b) the total number of pages that have been printed on this MFP if a document-feeder kit has not yet been installed (during the first 90,000 pages).
Select this item to specify the number of pages that can be printed before a Replace
Document Feeder Kit messages appears on the control-panel display to indicate that a document-feeder kit is necessary.
Select this item to specify the number of pages that have been fed through the document feeder.
Select this item to specify the number of pages that have been scanned on the flatbed glass.
Select this item to set the number of simplex pages that have been fed through the document feeder.
Select this item to set the number of duplex pages that have been fed through the document feeder.
Select this item to set the number of copy pages that have been scanned.
Select this item to set the number of scanned pages that have been sent to e-mail.
Select this item to set the number of pages that have been copied.
CAUTION
The scanner settings are used for factory adjustments and should not be used by service personnel. Use the scanner calibration routine to adjust the scanner settings if necessary.
Select this item to update the serial number if you replace the formatter.
80 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
Table 3-18
Service menu (continued)
Menu item
Service ID
Cold Reset Paper
Description
Select this item to specify the date when the MFP was first used, rather than the date when a replacement formatter was installed.
Select this item to reset the default paper size when you replace the formatter or restore factory settings. For example, when you replace a formatter or restore factory settings in a country/region that uses A4 as the standard paper size, use this item to reset the default paper size to A4 . Letter and A4 are the only cold-reset values available.
ENWW Control-panel menus 81
Use information pages
From the control panel, print pages that give details about the device and its current configuration.
The table below provides the instructions for printing the information pages.
Page description
Menu map
Shows the control-panel menus and available settings.
Configuration page
Shows device settings and installed accessories.
Supplies status page
Shows print-cartridge toner levels.
Usage page
Shows a page count for each size of paper printed, the number of onesided (simplexed) or two-sided
(duplexed) pages, and the average percentage of coverage.
How to print the page
1.
From the Home screen, touch Administration .
2.
Touch Information .
3.
Touch Configuration Status Pages .
4.
Touch Administration Menu Map .
5.
Touch Print .
The content of the menu map varies, depending on the options currently installed in the device.
For a complete list of control panel menus and possible values, see
Use the control panel on page 48 .
1.
From the Home screen, touch Administration .
2.
Touch Information .
3.
Touch Configuration Status Pages .
4.
Touch Configuration Page .
5.
Touch Print .
NOTE
If the device contains an HP Jetdirect print server or an optional hard disk drive, additional configuration pages print that provide information about those devices.
1.
From the Home screen, touch Administration .
2.
Touch Information .
3.
Touch Configuration Status Pages .
4.
Touch Supplies Status Page .
5.
Touch Print .
NOTE
If you are using non-HP supplies, the supplies status page might not show the remaining life for those supplies. For more information, see
HP policy on non-HP print cartridges on page 94 .
1.
From the Home screen, touch Administration .
2.
Touch Information .
3.
Touch Configuration Status Pages .
4.
Touch Usage Page .
5.
Touch Print .
82 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
ENWW
Page description
File directory
Contains information for any mass storage devices, such as flash drives, memory cards, or hard disks, that are installed in the device.
Fax reports
Five reports show fax activity, fax calls, billing codes, blocked fax numbers, and speed-dial numbers.
NOTE
available only on device models that have fax capabilities.
Font lists
Fax reports are
Shows which fonts are currently installed in the device.
How to print the page
1.
From the Home screen, touch Administration .
2.
Touch Information .
3.
Touch Configuration Status Pages .
4.
Touch File Directory .
5.
Touch Print .
1.
From the Home screen, touch Administration .
2.
Touch Information .
3.
Touch Fax Reports .
4.
Touch one of the following buttons to print the corresponding report:
●
Fax Activity Log
●
Fax Call Report
●
Billing Codes Report
●
Blocked Fax List
●
Speed Dial List
5.
Touch Print .
For more information, see the fax guide that came with the device.
1.
From the Home screen, touch Administration .
2.
Touch Information .
3.
Touch Sample Pages/Fonts .
4.
Touch either PCL Font List or PS Font List .
5.
Touch Print .
NOTE
The font lists also show which fonts reside on a hard disk accessory or DIMM.
Use information pages 83
Configure e-mail alerts
NOTE
If your company does not have e-mail, this feature might not be available.
You can use HP Web Jetadmin or the embedded Web server to configure the system to alert you of problems with the device. The alerts take the form of e-mail messages to the e-mail account(s) that you specify.
You can configure the following:
●
The device(s) you want to monitor
●
The alerts you want to receive (for example, alerts for paper jams, paper out, supplies status, and cover open)
●
The e-mail account(s) to which the alerts should be forwarded
Software
HP Web Jetadmin
Embedded Web server
Information location
See
Use HP Web Jetadmin software on page 90
for general information about HP Web
Jetadmin.
See the HP Web Jetadmin Help system for details about alerts and how to set them up.
See
Embedded Web server on page 36 for general information about the embedded Web
server.
See the embedded Web server Help system for details about alerts and how to set them up.
84 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
HP Easy Printer Care software
The HP Easy Printer Care software is a program that you can use for the following tasks:
●
Check the device status.
●
Check supplies status.
●
Set up alerts.
●
Gain access to troubleshooting and maintenance tools.
Use the HP Easy Printer Care software when the device is directly connected to a computer or when it is connected to a network. To download the HP Easy Printer Care software, go to www.hp.com/go/ easyprintercare .
NOTE
No Internet access is needed to open and use the HP Easy Printer Care software .However, Internet access is required for the Web-based link.
Open the HP Toolbox FX
Use one of the following methods to open HP Toolbox FX:
●
On the
Start
menu, select
Programs
, select
Hewlett-Packard
, and then select
HP Toolbox FX
.
●
In the Windows system tray (in the lower-right corner of the desktop), double-click the HP
Toolbox FX icon.
●
Double-click the desktop icon.
HP Toolbox FX sections
Section Options
Device List
tab
Shows information about each device in the
Devices
list
●
●
Device information, including printer name, make, and model
An icon (if the
View as
drop-down box is set to
●
Any current alerts for the device
Tiles
, which is the default setting)
Support
tab
If you click a device in the list, the HP Toolbox FX opens the
Overview
tab for that device.
●
Provides device information, including alerts for items needing attention.
●
Provides links to troubleshooting and maintenance tools.
Provides help information and links
Supplies Ordering
window
●
Ordering list: Shows the supplies that you can order for each device. If you want to order a certain item, click the
Order
check box for that item in the supplies list.
Provides access to online or e-mail supplies ordering
●
Shop Online for Supplies
button: Opens the HP SureSupply Web site in a new browser window. If you have checked the
Order
check box for any items, the information about those items can be transferred to the Web site, where you will receive information on options for purchasing your selected supplies.
●
Print Shopping List
button: Prints the information for the supplies that have the
Order
check box selected.
ENWW HP Easy Printer Care software 85
Section
Alert Settings
window
Options
●
Alerts on or off: Activates or deactivates the alerts feature.
Allows you to configure the device to automatically notify you of device issues
●
When alerts appear: Sets when you want alerts to appear—either when you are printing to that particular device, or anytime there is a device event.
●
Alert event type: Sets whether you want alerts for only critical errors, or for any error, including continuable errors.
●
Notification method: Sets what type of alert should appear (pop-up message or desktop alert).
●
Devices
list: Shows the devices that you can select.
Overview
tab
Contains basic status information for the device
●
Device Status
section: Shows device status information. This section will indicate device alert conditions, such as an empty print cartridge. It also shows device-identification information, control-panel messages, and print-cartridge levels. After you correct a problem with the device, click the button to update the section.
●
Supplies Status
section: Shows detailed supplies status, such as the percentage of toner remaining in the print cartridge and the status of the media that is loaded in each tray.
●
Supplies Details
link: Opens the supplies status page to view more detailed information about device supplies, ordering information, and recycling information.
Find Other Printers
window
Allows you to add more printers to your printer list
Clicking the
Find Other Printers
link in the
Devices
list opens the
Find Other Printers
window.
The
Find Other Printers
window provides a utility that detects other network printers so that you can add them to the
Devices
list and then monitor those devices from your computer.
86 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
Use the embedded Web server
NOTE
When the device is directly connected to a computer, use the HP Easy Printer Care software to view the device status.
●
View status information.
●
Set the type of paper loaded in each tray.
●
Determine the remaining life on all supplies and order new ones.
●
View and change tray configurations.
●
View and change the device control-panel menu configuration.
●
View and print internal pages.
●
Receive notification of device and supplies events.
●
View and change the network configuration.
●
View support content that is specific to the current state of the device.
When the device is connected to the network, the embedded Web server is automatically available.
Open the embedded Web server from Windows 95 and later.
To use the embedded Web server, you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 and later or
Netscape Navigator 4 and later. The embedded Web server works when the device is connected to an IP-based network. The embedded Web server does not support IPX-based or AppleTalk printer connections. You do not need Internet access to open and use the embedded Web server.
Open the embedded Web server by using a network connection
1.
In a supported Web browser on your computer, type the device IP address or host name in the address/URL field. To find the IP address or host name, print a configuration page. See
Use information pages on page 82
.
NOTE
After you open the URL, you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the future.
2.
The embedded Web server has three tabs that contain settings and information about the device: the
Information
tab, the
Settings
tab, and the
Networking
tab. Click the tab that you want to view.
See
Embedded Web server sections on page 87 for more information about each tab.
Embedded Web server sections
Tab or section
Information
tab
Provides device, status, and configuration information
Options
●
Device Status
: Shows the device status and shows the life remaining of
HP supplies, with 0% indicating that a supply is empty. The page also shows the type and size of print paper set for each tray. To change the default settings, click
Change Settings
.
●
Configuration Page
: Shows the information found on the configuration page.
ENWW Use the embedded Web server 87
Tab or section
Settings
tab
Provides the ability to configure the device from your computer
Options
●
Supplies Status
: Shows the life remaining of HP supplies, with 0 percent indicating that a supply is empty. This page also provides supplies part numbers.
To order new supplies, click
Order Supplies
in the
Other Links
area on the left side of the window.
●
Event log
: Shows a list of all device events and errors.
●
Usage page
: Shows a summary of the number of pages the device has printed, grouped by size and type.
●
Device Information
: Shows the device network name, address, and model information. To change these entries, click
Device Information
on the
Settings
tab.
●
Control Panel
: Shows messages from the device control panel, such as
Ready
or
Sleep mode on
.
●
: Allows you to send print jobs to the device.
●
Configure Device
: Allows you to configure device settings. This page contains the traditional menus found on devices using a control-panel display.
●
E-mail Server
: Network only. Used in conjunction with the
Alerts
page to set up incoming and outgoing e-mail, as well as to set e-mail alerts.
●
Alerts
: Network only. Allows you to set up to receive e-mail alerts for various device and supplies events.
●
AutoSend
: Allows you to configure the device to send automated e-mails regarding device configuration and supplies to specific e-mail addresses.
●
Security
: Allows you to set a password that must be entered to gain access to the
Settings
and
Networking
tabs. Enable and disable certain features of the embedded Web server.
●
Edit Other Links
: Allows you to add or customize a link to another Web site. This link is displayed in the
Other Links
area on all embedded Web server pages.
●
Device Information
: Allows you to name the device and assign an asset number to it. Enter the name and e-mail address for the primary contact who will receive information about the device.
●
Language
: Allows you to determine the language in which to display the embedded Web server information.
●
Date & Time
: Allows time synchronization with a network time server.
●
Wake Time
: Allows you to set or edit a wake time for the device.
NOTE
The
Settings
tab can be password-protected. If this device is on a network, always consult with the system administrator before changing settings on this tab.
88 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
Tab or section
Networking
tab
Provides the ability to change network settings from your computer
Options
Network administrators can use this tab to control network-related settings for the device when it is connected to an IP-based network. This tab does not appear if the device is directly connected to a computer, or if the device is connected to a network using anything other than an HP Jetdirect print server.
NOTE
The
Networking
tab can be password-protected.
Other links
Contains links that connect you to the Internet
●
HP Instant Support™
: Connects you to the HP Web site to help you find solutions. This service analyzes your device error log and configuration information to provide diagnostic and support information specific to your device.
●
Order Supplies
: Connects to the HP SureSupply Web site, where you will receive information on options for purchasing original HP supplies, such as print cartridges and paper.
●
Product Support
: Connects to the support site for the device, from which you can search for help regarding general topics.
NOTE
You must have Internet access in order to use any of these links. If you use a dial-up connection and did not connect when you first opened the embedded Web server, you must connect before you can visit these Web sites. Connecting might require that you close the embedded Web server and reopen it.
ENWW Use the embedded Web server 89
Use HP Web Jetadmin software
HP Web Jetadmin is a Web-based software solution for remotely installing, monitoring, and troubleshooting network-connected peripherals. The intuitive browser interface simplifies crossplatform management of a wide range of devices, including HP and non-HP devices. Management is proactive, allowing network administrators the ability to resolve issues before users are affected.
Download this free, enhanced-management software at www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin_software .
To obtain plug-ins to HP Web Jetadmin, click
plug-ins
, and then click the
download
link that is next to the name of the plug-in that you want. The HP Web Jetadmin software can automatically notify you when new plug-ins are available. On the
Product Update
page, follow the directions to automatically connect to the HP Web site.
If installed on a host server, HP Web Jetadmin is available to any client through a supported Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 for Windows or Netscape Navigator 7.1 for Linux.
Browse to the HP Web Jetadmin host.
NOTE
Browsers must be Java-enabled. Browsing from an Apple PC is not supported.
90 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
Use the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh
Use the HP Printer Utility to configure and maintain a printer from a Mac OS X computer.
Open the HP Printer Utility
Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.2.8
1.
Open the Finder, and then click
Applications
.
2.
Click
Library
, and then click
Printers
.
3.
Click
hp
, and then click
Utilities
.
4.
Double-click
HP Printer Selector
to open the HP Printer Selector.
5.
Select the device that you want to configure, and then click
Utility
.
Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.3, V10.4 and later
1.
In the Dock, click the
Printer Setup Utility
icon.
NOTE
If the
Printer Setup Utility
icon does not appear in the Dock, open the Finder, click
Applications
, click
Utilities
, and then double-click
Printer Setup Utility
.
2.
Select the device that you want to configure, and then click
Utility
.
HP Printer Utility features
The HP Printer Utility consists of pages that you open by clicking in the
Configuration Settings
list.
The following table describes the tasks that you can perform from these pages.
Item
Configuration Page
Supplies Status
HP Support
File Upload
Upload Fonts
Firmware Update
Duplex Mode
Economode & Toner Density
Resolution
Lock Resources
Stored Jobs
Trays Configuration
IP Settings
Description
Prints a configuration page.
Shows the device supplies status and provides links for online supplies-ordering.
Provides access to technical assistance, online supplies ordering, online registration, and recycling and return information.
Transfers files from the computer to the device.
Transfers font files from the computer to the device.
Transfers updated firmware files from the computer to the device.
Turns on the automatic two-sided printing mode.
Turns on the Economode setting to conserve toner, or adjusts toner density.
Changes the resolution settings, including the REt setting.
Locks or unlocks storage products, such as a hard disk.
Manages print jobs that are stored on the device hard disk.
Changes the default tray settings.
Changes the device network settings and provides access to the embedded Web server.
ENWW Use the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 91
Item
Bonjour Settings
Additional Settings
E-mail Alerts
Description
Provides the ability to turn on or off Bonjour support or change the device service name that is listed on a network.
Provides access to the embedded Web server.
Configures the device to send e-mail notices for certain events.
92 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
Manage supplies
Monitor the print cartridge to ensure high-quality output.
Supplies life expectancy
The life of the print cartridge depends on both the amount of toner that print jobs require and the durability of components inside the cartridge. When printing text at approximately 5% coverage
(typical for a business letter), the HP print cartridge lasts an average of 18,000 pages. The HP pageyield specification is a general guideline. Actual yield can vary according to usage conditions.
Change the print cartridge
1.
Pull the top-cover release to open the top cover.
2.
Grasp the print cartridge by the handle, and remove it from the device.
3.
Remove the new print cartridge from the packaging.
4.
Remove any protective tape from the print cartridge.
5.
Insert the new print cartridge in the device, and close the top cover.
Manage the print cartridge
Print-cartridge storage
Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes.
Use genuine HP print cartridges
When you use a genuine new HP print cartridge, you can obtain the following supplies information:
●
Percentage of supplies remaining
●
Estimated number of pages remaining
●
Number of pages printed
ENWW Manage supplies 93
HP policy on non-HP print cartridges
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP print cartridges, either new or remanufactured. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence their design or control their quality.
NOTE
Any damage caused by a non-HP print cartridge is not covered under the
HP warranty and service agreements.
To install a new HP print cartridge, see
Change the print cartridge on page 93
. To recycle the used cartridge, follow the instructions included with the new cartridge.
Print-cartridge authentication
The device automatically authenticates the print cartridge when it is inserted into the device. During authentication, the device notifies you whether a cartridge is a genuine HP print cartridge.
If the device control-panel message states that this is not a genuine HP print cartridge and you
believe you purchased an HP print cartridge, see HP fraud hotline and Web site on page 94 .
HP fraud hotline and Web site
Call the HP fraud hotline (1-877-219-3183, toll-free in North America) or go to www.hp.com/go/ anticounterfeit when you install an HP print cartridge and the control-panel message says the cartridge is non-HP. HP will help determine if the cartridge is genuine and take steps to resolve the problem.
Your print cartridge might not be a genuine HP print cartridge if you notice the following:
●
You are experiencing a high number of problems with the print cartridge.
●
The cartridge does not look like it usually does (for example, the orange pull tab is missing, or the packaging differs from HP packaging).
94 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
Clean the device
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the product. Over time, this buildup can cause print-quality problems, such as toner specks or smearing. This product has a cleaning mode that can correct and prevent these types of problems.
Clean the exterior
Use a soft, damp, lint-free cloth to wipe dust, smudges, and stains off of the exterior of the device.
Clean the scanner glass
Dirty glass, from fingerprints, smudges, hair, and so on, slows down performance and affects the accuracy of special features such as fit-to-page and copy.
NOTE
If streaks or other defects appear only on copies produced using the automatic document feeder (ADF), clean the scanner strip (step 3). It is not necessary to clean the scanner glass.
1.
Open the scanner lid.
2.
Clean the glass by using a damp, lint-free cloth.
CAUTION
Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride on any part of the device; these can damage the device. Do not place liquids directly on the glass. They might seep under it and damage the device.
3.
Clean the scanner strip by using a damp, lint-free cloth.
ENWW Clean the device 95
Clean the scanner lid backing
Minor debris can accumulate on the white document lid backing that is located underneath the scanner lid.
1.
Open the scanner lid.
2.
Clean the white document lid backing by using a soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with a mild soap and warm water. Also, clean the scanner strip next to the ADF scanner glass.
3.
Wash the backing gently to loosen debris; do not scrub the backing.
4.
Dry the backing by using a chamois or soft cloth.
CAUTION
Do not use paper-based wipes because they might scratch the backing.
5.
If this does not clean the backing well enough, repeat the previous steps and use isopropyl alcohol to dampen the cloth or sponge, and then wipe the backing thoroughly with a damp cloth to remove any residual alcohol.
Clean the paper path
1.
From the Home screen, touch Administration .
2.
Touch Print Quality .
3.
Touch Calibration/Cleaning .
4.
Touch Create Cleaning Page .
The device prints a cleaning page.
5.
Follow the instructions printed on the cleaning page.
Clean the document feeder
Clean the document feeder only if it is visibly marked or dirty, or if you are experiencing a degradation of copy quality (such as streaking).
96 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
Clean the document feeder delivery system
1.
Open the scanner lid.
2.
Locate the white, vinyl document-feeder backing.
3.
Locate the white, vinyl calibration strips.
4.
Clean the document-feeder backing and the calibration strips by wiping them with a clean, damp, lint-free cloth. Use an ammonia-based surface cleaner only when a water-dampened cloth does not clean the document-feeder components.
5.
Clean the scanner glass by wiping it gently with a clean, slightly damp, lint-free cloth. Use an ammonia-based surface cleaner only when a water-dampened cloth does not clean the scanner glass.
6.
Close the scanner lid.
ENWW Clean the device 97
Clean the document feeder-rollers
You should clean the rollers in the document feeder if you are experiencing misfeeds or if your originals show marks as they exit the document feeder.
CAUTION
Clean the rollers only if you experience misfeeds or marks on the originals, and you notice dust on the rollers. Cleaning the rollers frequently could introduce dust into the device.
1.
Open the scanner lid.
2.
Locate the rollers near white, vinyl calibration strips.
3.
Wipe the rollers gently with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
CAUTION
Do not pour water directly onto the rollers. Doing so might damage the device.
4.
Close the scanner lid.
5.
Pull the release lever to open the document-feeder cover.
98 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
ENWW
6.
Locate the rollers.
7.
Wipe the rollers with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
CAUTION
Do not pour water directly onto the rollers. Doing so might damage the device.
8.
Locate the separation pad.
9.
Wipe the pad with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
10.
Close the document-feeder cover.
Clean the device 99
Set the real-time clock
Use the real-time clock feature to set the date and time settings. The date and time information is attached to stored print, fax, and digital-send jobs, so you can identify the most recent versions of stored print jobs. You can also set the MFP to automatically warm up and prepare for use at a set time each day.
Set the date and time
When setting the date and time you can set the date format, date, time format, and time.
Set the date format
1.
Scroll to and touch Administration .
2.
Touch Time/Scheduling .
3.
Touch Date/Time .
4.
Touch Date Format .
5.
Touch the desired format.
6.
Touch Save .
Set the date
1.
Scroll to and touch Administration .
2.
Touch Time/Scheduling .
3.
Touch Date/Time .
4.
Touch Date .
5.
Touch the appropriate options to set the correct month, date of the month, and the year.
6.
Touch Save .
Set the time format
1.
Scroll to and touch Administration .
2.
Touch Time/Scheduling .
3.
Touch Date/Time .
4.
Touch Time Format .
5.
Touch the appropriate format.
6.
Touch Save .
Set the time
1.
Press Administration .
2.
Scroll to and touch Time/Scheduling .
100 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
3.
Scroll to and touch Date/Time .
4.
Touch Time .
5.
Touch the appropriate options to set the correct hour, minute, and AM/PM setting.
6.
Touch Save .
Set the wake time
Use the wake time feature to wake the MFP at a set time each day.
1.
Scroll to and touch Administration .
2.
Touch Time/Scheduling .
3.
Touch Wake Time .
4.
Touch the day of the week for the wake time.
5.
Touch Custom .
6.
Touch Save .
7.
Touch the appropriate options to set the correct hour, minute, and AM/PM setting.
8.
If you want to wake the MFP at the same time each day, on the
Apply to All Days
screen, touch Yes . If you want to set the time for individual days, touch No , and repeat the procedure for each day.
Set the sleep delay
Use the sleep-delay feature to set the period of time that the MFP must be idle before it enters the sleep mode. The default setting is 45 minutes.
1.
Scroll to and touch Administration .
2.
Touch Time/Scheduling .
3.
Touch Sleep Delay .
4.
Touch the sleep-delay setting that you want.
ENWW Set the real-time clock 101
Upgrading the firmware
The MFP has remote firmware update (RFU) capability. Use the information in this section to upgrade the MFP firmware. The overall process involves the following steps:
1.
Determine the current level of firmware that is installed on the MFP.
2.
Go to the HP Web site and find out whether a firmware update is available. If an update is available, download the latest firmware to your computer.
3.
Transfer the new firmware from your computer to the MFP.
Determining the current level of firmware
To determine the current level of firmware, view the configuration information on the MFP control panel. To view the configuration information, follow these instructions.
1.
Press Menu .
2.
Touch
INFORMATION
.
3.
Touch
PRINT CONFIGURATION
. The Configuration page prints.
4.
The firmware datecode is listed in the section called
Device Information
. The firmware datecode has this format: YYYYMMDD XX.XXX.X. The first string of numbers is the date, where
YYYY represents the year, MM represents the month, and DD represents the date. For example, a firmware datecode of that begins with
20040225
represents February 25, 2004.
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site
To find the most recent firmware upgrade for the MFP, go to http://www.hp.com/go/ ljm4345mfp_software . This page provides instructions for downloading the new firmware version.
Transferring the new firmware to the MFP
Use one of the following methods to update the firmware.
Using FTP to upgrade the firmware on a network connection
NOTE
The MFP can receive an .RFU file update as long as it is in a "ready" state.
The elapsed time for an update depends on the I/O transfer time and the time that it takes for the
MFP to reinitialize. The I/O transfer time depends on a number of things, including the speed of the host computer that is sending the update. Any jobs that are ahead of the RFU job in the queue are completed before the update is processed.
If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before the firmware is downloaded (while
Receiving Upgrade
appears on the control panel display), the firmware file must be sent again. If power is disrupted during the flash DIMM update (while the
Performing Upgrade
message appears on the control panel display), the message
Resend Upgrade
appears (in English only) on the control panel display. Send the upgrade by using the parallel port.
Any jobs that are ahead of the RFU job in the queue are completed before the update is processed.
102 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
ENWW
Follow these instructions to perform the upgrade by using FTP.
1.
Take note of the IP address on the HP Jetdirect page, the second page of the Configuration page printout.
NOTE
Before upgrading the firmware, make sure that the MFP is not in Sleep mode.
Also make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control panel display.
2.
Open an MS-DOS command prompt.
3.
Type: ftp <TCP/IP ADDRESS>
. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type ftp 192.168.0.90
.
4.
Press Enter on the keyboard.
5.
When prompted for the user name, press Enter .
6.
When prompted for the password, press Enter .
7.
Type bin
at the command prompt.
8.
Press Enter . The message
200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files
appears in the command window.
9.
Type put <filename>
where <filename> is the name of the .RFU file that was downloaded from the Web, including the path. For example, type put C:\LJ\4345FW.RFU
, and then press
Enter.
NOTE
If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type put “C:\MY DOCUMENTS\LJ\4345FW.RFU”
The following series of messages appears in the command window:
200 PORT command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Ready
226 Processing Job
226 Transfer complete
Then, a message that contains the transfer-speed information appears.
10.
The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the MFP. This takes approximately 5 minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the MFP or computer.
NOTE
The MFP automatically turns off and then on again after processing the upgrade.
11.
At the command prompt, type: bye
to exit the ftp command.
12.
At the command prompt, type: exit
to return to the Windows interface.
Upgrading the firmware 103
Using HP Web Jetadmin to upgrade the firmware
This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin Version 7.0 or later on the computer.
Complete the following steps to update a single device through HP Web Jetadmin after downloading the .RFU file from the HP Web site.
1.
Start HP Web Jetadmin.
2.
Open the
Device Management
folder in the drop-down list in the
Navigation
panel. Navigate to the
Device Lists
folder.
3.
Expand the
Device Lists
folder and select
All Devices
. Locate the MFP in the list of devices, and then click to select it.
If you need to upgrade the firmware for multiple HP LaserJet M4345 MFPs, select all of them by pressing the Ctrl key as you click the name of each MFP.
4.
Locate the drop-down box for
Device Tools
in the upper-right corner of the window. Select
Update Printer Firmware
from the action list.
5.
If the name of the .RFU file is not listed in the
All Available Images
box, click
Browse
in the
Upload New Firmware Image
dialog box and navigate to the location of the .RFU file that you downloaded from the Web at the start of this procedure. If the filename is listed, select it.
6.
Click
Upload
to move the .RFU file from the hard drive to the HP Web Jetadmin server. After the upload is complete, the browser window refreshes.
7.
Select the .RFU file from the
Printer Firmware Update
drop-down menu.
8.
Click
Update Firmware
. HP Web Jetadmin sends the selected .RFU file to the MFP. The control panel shows messages that indicate the progress of the upgrade. At the end of the upgrade process, the control panel shows the
Ready
message.
Using MS-DOS commands to upgrade the firmware
1.
From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following: copy /B
<FILENAME> \\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>
, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the MFP is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the MFP share name. For example:
C:
\>copy /b C:\9200fW.RFU \\YOUR_SERVER\YOUR_COMPUTER
.
NOTE
If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type:
C:\>copy /b "C:\MY DOCUMENTS
\3500FW.RFU" \\YOUR_SERVER\YOUR_COMPUTER
.
2.
Press Enter on the keyboard. The control panel shows a message that indicates the progress of the firmware upgrade. At the end of the upgrade process, the control panel shows the
Ready
message . The message
1 file(s) copied
appears on the computer screen.
104 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
Upgrading the HP Jetdirect firmware
The HP Jetdirect network interface in the MFP has firmware that can be upgraded separately from the MFP firmware. This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin Version 7.0 or later on the computer. Complete the following steps to update the HP Jetdirect firmware by using HP Web
Jetadmin.
1.
Open the HP Web Jetadmin program.
2.
Open the
Device Management
folder in the drop-down list in the
Navigation
panel. Navigate to the
Device Lists
folder.
3.
Select the device that you want to update.
4.
In the
Device Tools
drop-down list, select
Jetdirect Firmware Update
.
5.
Under
Jetdirect firmware version
the HP Jetdirect model number and current firmware version are listed. Make a note of these.
6.
Go to http://www.hp.com/go/wja_firmware .
7.
Scroll down to the list of HP Jetdirect model numbers and find the correct model number.
8.
Look at the current firmware version for the model, and see if it is later than the version you wrote down. If it is, right-click the firmware link, and follow the instructions on the Web page to download the new firmware file. The file must be saved into the <drive>:\PROGRAM FILES\HP
WEB JETADMIN\DOC\PLUGINS\HPWJA\FIRMWARE\JETDIRECT folder on the computer that is running the HP Web Jetadmin software.
9.
In HP Web Jetadmin, return to the main device list and select the digital sender again.
10.
In the
Device Tools
drop-down list, select
Jetdirect Firmware Update
again.
11.
On the HP Jetdirect firmware page, the new firmware version is listed under
Jetdirect
Firmware Available on HP Web Jetadmin
. Click the
Update Firmware Now
button to update the Jetdirect firmware.
ENWW Upgrading the firmware 105
Calibrate the scanner
Calibrate the scanner to compensate for offsets in the scanner imaging system (carriage head) for
ADF and flatbed scans. Because of mechanical tolerances, the scanner's carriage head might not read the position of the image accurately. During the calibration procedure, scanner offset values are calculated and stored. The offset values are then used when producing scans so that the correct portion of the document is captured.
Scanner calibration should be carried out only if you notice offset problems with the scanned images.
The scanner is calibrated before it leaves the factory. It needs to be calibrated again only rarely.
1.
From the Home screen, touch Administration .
2.
Touch Troubleshooting .
3.
Touch Calibrate Scanner and then follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog box.
The device starts the calibration process, and
Calibrating
appears on the touchscreen status line until the process is complete.
106 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
Calibrate the control panel
Use the following procedure to calibrate the control panel:
1.
Turn the device off.
2.
Press and hold the # key and the C key.
3.
Turn the device on.
4.
When a small white square appears in the upper-left corner of the control-panel display, touch the square with a stylus.
5.
When a small white square appears in the lower-left corner of the control-panel display, touch the square with a stylus.
6.
Allow the device to finish the boot process.
ENWW Calibrate the control panel 107
Disable Embedded Jetdirect I/O
Use the following procedure to disable the Embedded Jetdirect functionality:
1.
Turn the device off.
2.
Turn the device on.
3.
After the first LED illuminates (and before the memory count displays), press and hold the 6 key.
4.
When all three LEDs illuminate, release the 6 key.
5.
Press the 3 key.
6.
When
Embedded LAN Disable
displays, press the 6 key.
7.
Allow the device to finish the boot process.
108 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
Select the MFP language
Use the following procedure to change the MFP display language:
1.
Turn the device off.
2.
Press and hold the 6 key.
3.
Turn the device on.
4.
When the three status LEDs illuminate, release the 6 key.
5.
After the MFP finishes the boot process, it prompts you to choose a language.
ENWW Select the MFP language 109
110 Chapter 3 Manage and maintain the device ENWW
4 Theory of operation
This chapter presents an overview of the relationships between major components in the MFP, and includes information about the following topics:
●
●
●
●
●
●
Pickup, feed, and delivery system
●
●
●
●
ENWW 111
Basic operation
All high-level MFP processes are routed through the formatter, which stores font information, processes the print image, and communicates with the host computer.
The basic MFP operation can be divided into five systems:
●
The engine control system, which includes the power supply and DC controller PCA
●
The laser/scanner system, which forms the latent image on a photosensitive drum
●
The image formation system, which transfers a toner image onto the print media
●
The pickup and feed system, which consists of various rollers and transports the media through the MFP
●
The scanner system, which scans data and sends it to the formatter for copying or for sending to e-mail
Sequence of operation (printer)
A microprocessor on the DC controller PCA controls the operating sequence. The tables in this section describe the basic operating sequence, from when the MFP power is turned on until the final printed page is delivered to an output bin. For information about the timing of the basic operating sequence, see [Cross Reference TBD].
Period (sequence)
Waiting
Standby
Initial rotation
Last rotation
Description
The period of time from when the MFP power is turned on until the main motor or drum motor begins to rotate. During this time the transfer roller is cleaned and the microprocessor on the DC controller PCA checks to determine if a print cartridge is installed in the MFP.
The period of time from the end of the waiting sequence or from the end of the last rotation until a print command is received from the host computer or until the MFP power is turned off. The message
Ready
appears on the control-panel display.
The period of time when the photosensitive drum is stabilized to prepare for printing.
The period of time from the initial rotation until the positive bias on the transfer-charging roller is turned off.
The period of time from the completion of the print job until the main motor or drum motor stops. The final page of the job is delivered to an output bin and the transfer roller is cleaned. If another print job is immediately detected (sent by the host computer), then the
MFP returns to the initial rotation period. If no print jobs are waiting, then the MFP returns to the standby period.
112 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Sequence of operation (scanner)
Period (sequence)
Power on
Initialization
Standby
Scan
Description
During this time, the scanner motors rotate, the MFP checks the status of all the sensors, the scanner lamp is illuminated, the optical scan head moves from its home position, the scanner calibrates, and then the optical scan head returns to its home position.
The period of time after the initial power-on sequence and before the MFP is ready to scan or copy. During this time, the scanner and ADF initialization is completed, scanner calibration is performed, and the ADF checks for media in the input tray.
The period of time from the end of the initialization sequence until a request for a scan.
During this time, the MFP might go into Sleep mode and the scan carriage rests in its home position.
The period of time immediately following a request for a scan. The scanner fan turns on, the scan start position is adjusted, the MFP performs the scan, and data is sent to the formatter.
ENWW Basic operation 113
Formatter system
The formatter is responsible for the following procedures:
●
Controlling Sleep mode
●
Receiving and processing print data from the various MFP interfaces
●
Monitoring control-panel functions and relaying MFP-status information (through the control panel and the network or the bidirectional interface)
●
Developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the DC controller PCA
●
Storing font information
●
Communicating with the host computer through the network or the bidirectional interface
The formatter receives a print job from the network or the bidirectional interface and separates it into image information and instructions that control the printing process. The DC controller PCA synchronizes the image-formation system with the paper-input and -output systems, and then signals the formatter to send the print-image data.
The formatter also provides the electrical interface and mounting locations for one EIO card, one memory DIMM, two USB host ports, the hard-disk accessory, and the optional analog fax accessory.
Sleep mode
This feature conserves power after the MFP has been idle for an adjustable period of time. When the
MFP is in Sleep mode, the control-panel backlight is turned off, but the MFP retains all settings, downloaded fonts, and macros. The default setting is for Sleep mode to be enabled, and the MFP enters the Sleep mode after a 30-minute idle time. Sleep mode can also be turned off from the
RESET
menu on the control panel.
The MFP exits Sleep mode and enters the warm-up cycle when any of the following events occurs:
●
A print job, valid data, or a PML or PJL command is received
●
A control-panel button is pressed or you touch the touchscreen
●
The top cover is opened
●
A paper tray is opened
●
The engine-test switch is pressed
NOTE
MFP error messages override the Sleep message. The MFP enters Sleep mode at the appropriate time, but the error message continues to appear.
Resolution Enhancement technology (REt)
The formatter contains circuitry for Resolution Enhancement technology (REt), which modifies the standard video dot data on its way to the DC controller PCA to produce “smoothed” line edges. The
REt can be turned on or off from the control panel or from some software programs. The default setting is medium.
NOTE
The REt settings that are sent from software programs or printer drivers override the control-panel settings.
114 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
EconoMode
The EconoMode setting uses up to 50% less toner than standard mode printing by reducing the dot density. However, using EconoMode does not extend the life of print-cartridge components.
Select EconoMode, which can be thought of as draft mode, from the control panel (
PRINT QUALITY
menu) and through some software programs and printer drivers. The default setting is OFF.
CAUTION
HP does not recommend full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used fulltime, it is possible that the toner supply will outlast the mechanical parts in the print cartridge.
NOTE
EconoMode does not affect print speed or memory usage, or extend the life of the print cartridge.
Input/output
The MFP receives print data primarily from the embedded HP Jetdirect print server. The MFP also has a USB device port for connecting directly to a computer, and two USB host ports for connecting third-party devices.
CPU
The formatter incorporates a 480 MHz RISC processor.
Memory
The formatter has 256 MB of on-board RAM.
NOTE
If the MFP encounters a problem when managing available memory, a clearable warning message appears on the control panel.
Hard disk
The MFP comes standard with a hard disk that has a capacity of greater than 40 GB. The hard disk can permanently store fonts and forms, make multiple original prints, and accommodate job-storage features.
Random-access memory
The random-access memory (RAM) contains the page, I/O buffers, and the font storage area. It stores printing and font information received from the host system, and can also serve to temporarily store a full page of print-image data before the data is sent to the print engine.
DIMM slot
Memory capacity can be increased by adding a memory DIMM to the formatter. Adding a memory
DIMM might also increase the print speed for complex graphics.
Firmware
The firmware is contained on NAND flash on the formatter. A remote firmware upgrade process is available, which overwrites the firmware on the NAND flash.
ENWW Formatter system 115
Nonvolatile memory
The MFP uses nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) to store I/O and print-environment-configuration information. The contents of NVRAM are retained when the MFP is turned off or disconnected.
HP Memory Enhancement technology
The HP Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) effectively doubles the standard memory through a variety of font- and data-compression methods.
NOTE
The MEt is available only in PCL mode; it is not functional when printing in PS mode.
PJL overview
The printer job language (PJL) is an integral part of configuration, in addition to the standard printer command language (PCL). With standard cabling, the MFP can use PJL to perform a variety of functions, such as these:
●
Two-way communication with the host computer through a network connection or a USB device port. The MFP can inform the host about the control-panel settings, and the control-panel settings can be changed from the host.
●
Dynamic I/O switching. The MFP uses this switching to be configured with a host on each I/O.
The MFP can receive data from more than one I/O simultaneously, until the I/O buffer is full.
This can occur even when the MFP is offline.
●
Context-sensitive switching. The MFP can automatically recognize the personality (PS or PCL) of each job and configure itself to serve that personality.
●
Isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the next. For example, if a print job is sent to the MFP in landscape mode, the subsequent print jobs print in landscape only if they are formatted for landscape printing.
PML
The printer management language (PML) allows remote configuration and status readback through the I/O ports.
Control panel
The formatter sends and receives MFP status and command data to and from a control-panel PCA.
Scanner interface
The formatter receives data from the scanner to produce copies and to send scanned data in e-mail format.
116 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Engine-control system
The control system consists of three PCAs: the power supply PCA, the power-factor correction PCA, and the DC controller PCA. This system controls the laser/scanner, image-formation, and pickup-andfeed systems. The microprocessor on the DC controller PCA controls the operating sequence of the printer.
DC controller PCA
The DC controller PCA controls the operation of the MFP and its components. The DC controller
PCA starts the MFP operation when the MFP power is turned on and the power supply sends DC voltage to the DC controller PCA. After the MFP enters the standby sequence, the DC controller PCA sends out various signals to operate motors, solenoids, and other printer components based on the print command and image data that the host computer sends.
Figure 4-1 DC controller PCA block diagram on page 118 illustrates the DC controller function.
ENWW Engine-control system 117
Figure 4-1
DC controller PCA block diagram
118 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Motors and fans
The MFP print engine has 10 motors: two brushless DC motors, one DC motor that has brushes, four
fan motors, and three stepping motors. The MFP print engine also has four cooling fans. Table 4-1
Motor and fan functions
Table 4-1
Print-engine motors
Name Purpose Type
Main motor (M101) Drives the following rollers: tray 2 pickup, feed, separation, tray 1 pickup, pretransfer, pressure, and delivery
Drum motor
(M102)
Drives the transfer-charging roller, photosensitive drum, and developing cylinder
Lifter motor (M103) Moves the lifting plate
Crossing motor
(M104)
Drives the crossing roller
DC motor
(brushless)
DC motor
(brushless)
DC motor (with brushes)
Stepping motor
Rotation
Clockwise
Clockwise
Clockwise
Speed
2-speed
2-speed
1-speed
Failure detection
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Reversing motor
(M105)
Delivery motor
(M106)
Drives the reversing roller
Stepping motor
Drives the intermediate delivery roller and the delivery roller
Stepping motor
Clockwise
Counterclockwise
Clockwise
Counterclockwise
Clockwise
3-speed
2-speed
3-speed
2-speed
4-speed
No
No
Table 4-2
Print-engine fans
Name
Cooling fan 1
(FN101)
Cooling fan 2
(FN102)
Cooling fan 3
(FN103)
Cooling fan 4
(FN104)
Purpose Motor type
Cools the interior of the print engine
DC motor
Cools the printcartridge area
DC motor
Cools the reversing-unit area
DC motor
Cools the DC controller
DC motor
Motor rotation Motor speed
2-speed
1-speed
1-speed
1-speed
Failure detection
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
ENWW Engine-control system 119
Ambient-temperature detection
The MFP contains a sensor that measures the air temperature of the surrounding environment. The
MFP automatically adjusts the temperature settings in the fuser to adjust for changes in the ambient temperature.
Engine power supply circuit
The engine power supply consists of the fuser-control circuit, the high-voltage circuit, and the lowvoltage circuit. The fuser-control and high-voltage circuits control the temperature of the fuser and generate high-voltage according to signals from the DC controller PCA. The low-voltage circuit generates the DC voltages that other MFP components use (for example the DC controller PCA, the motors, and fans).
Figure 4-2
Power supply circuit block diagram
120 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Fuser control
The fuser-control circuit controls the fuser components. The two fuser heaters provide the high temperatures that permanently bond the toner to the media. The fuser thermistor monitors the fuser temperatures. The thermal switch detects abnormally high fuser temperatures and interrupts the supply of voltage to the fuser if the temperature is determined to be too high.
ENWW
Figure 4-3
Fuser components
The fusing-heater safety circuit is located on the power supply and constantly monitors the fusing temperature. The fusing heater adjusts the temperature of the fuser as required by the stage in the printing process.
●
Start-up temperature control
: The thermistor on the fuser heater has two different modes depending on the temperature of the fuser when a print job is sent. If the fuser temperature is below 85ºC (185ºF), the fuser continues to heat until it reaches a temperature of 100ºC (212ºF), and then the main motor actuates. If the fuser temperature is 85ºC (185ºF) or higher at the beginning of a print job, the main motor is actuated immediately.
●
Print temperature control
: The fuser temperature is maintained at a target temperature throughout a print job. This target temperature varies depending on the type of media and the number of pages in the print job.
●
Between-pages temperature control
: When printing on smaller-sized media, the fuser temperature is decreased between the pages to prevent an abrupt rise in temperature because of the larger gap between pages.
●
Print-speed adjustment to control temperature
: For certain types of media and when printing several pages continuously, the interval between pages is increased to allow the fuser to maintain the temperature that is required for good fusing. If the fuser cools too much, the toner is not correctly fused to the media.
Engine-control system 121
Fuser over-temperature protection
To protect the fuser from excessive temperatures, the MFP has the following three protective functions:
●
The CPU monitors the voltage of the thermistor. If the fuser temperature reaches 240º C (464º
F) or higher, the CPU turns off the relay (RL101) to interrupt the power to the fusing heater.
●
If the temperature of the fusing heater continues to rise abnormally and the temperature of the thermistor (TH1) exceeds about 250ºC (482ºF), the relay 1 (RL101) opens up to cut off the power supply to the fusing heater.
●
When the temperature of the heater exceeds about 250ºC (482ºF), the thermal switch (TP1) is turned off to cut off the power supply to the fusing heater. In the rare instance that this happens, the fuser must be replaced.
Figure 4-4 Fuser circuit on page 123
illustrates the fuser circuit.
122 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
Figure 4-4
Fuser circuit
Engine-control system 123
High-voltage power supply
The high-voltage circuit produces the voltage biases that are applied to the primary charging roller, the developing cylinder, the transfer charging roller, the fuser sleeve, and the pressure roller.
Figure 4-5
High-voltage power supply circuit
The primary charging voltage (bias) applies a uniform negative charge to the photosensitive drum in the print cartridge. Two types of primary charging bias are used: the primary charging DC negative voltage and the primary charging AC bias. The high-voltage circuit on the power supply generates both biases. These biases are superimposed on one another and then applied to the primary charging roller, which transfers the biases to the drum. The laser/scanner assembly generates the
124 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
electrostatic image on the primary charged photosensitive drum. The electrostatic image cannot be seen until toner is deposited on the drum.
The developing voltage (bias) causes the toner to adhere to the electrostatic image that the laser/ scanner assembly created on the photosensitive drum. Two types of developing biases are used: the developing DC negative bias and the developing AC bias. The high-voltage circuit on the power supply generates both biases. These biases are superimposed on one another and then applied to the primary charging roller, which transfers the biases to the drum. The biased developing cylinder picks up toner particles and deposits them onto the electrostatic image on the photosensitive drum.
The image is now visible on the drum.
The transfer voltage (bias) transfers the toner image on the photosensitive drum to the media. Two types of developing biases are used: the transfer DC positive bias and the DC negative bias. The high-voltage circuit on the power supply generates both biases. Transfer DC positive bias is applied to the transfer roller during the toner-transfer process. Transfer DC positive bias is applied to the transfer roller during the transfer-roller cleaning process. The DC positive bias attracts the toner to the media (this transfers the toner image on the photosensitive drum to the media). This bias is weakened between pages to prevent residual toner that is on the photosensitive drum from adhering to the transfer-charging roller when media is not present. The DC-negative bias is used to clean residual toner off of the transfer roller.
The fuser pressure-roller voltage (bias) prevents toner on the media from sticking to the fuser’s pressure roller. The pressure-roller bias is DC-positive.
The fuser-sleeve voltage (bias) prevents toner on the media from sticking to the fuser sleeve. The fuser-sleeve bias is DC-negative.
Low-voltage power supply
The low-voltage circuit converts the AC power from the power source into the direct current voltage
(Vdc) that the MFP components use. The low-voltage power supply circuit has three components:
●
The
power-factor controller power supply
converts the AC voltage to DC voltage.
●
The
engine power supply
generates the +24 Vdc that the high-voltage power supply requires.
●
The
DC controller
generates the +5 Vdc that the laser/scanner and formatter require, and the
+3.3 Vdc that the sensors and control-panel require.
ENWW Engine-control system 125
Figure 4-6
Low-voltage power supply circuit
126 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Figure 4-7
Hard-disk power connector
Overcurrent/overvoltage protection
If a short-circuit or other problem on the load side causes an excessive current flow or generates abnormal voltage, the overcurrent/overvoltage protection systems automatically cut off the output voltage to protect the power supply circuit.
If the overcurrent or overvoltage protection system is activated and the power supply circuit does not generate DC voltage, turn the power off, correct the problem, and then turn the MFP on again.
The circuit has two fuses (FU1, FU2) that break and cut off the output voltage if overcurrent flows through the AC line.
Toner detection
To monitor the toner level, the MFP uses two plate antennas and a toner-level circuit in the highvoltage power supply circuit. The DC controller PCA detects the toner level and monitors the output signal of the toner-level circuit. The signal is fed back to the DC controller PCA from the antennas during the wait and standby operating periods. The DC controller PCA detects toner level from 1% to
100%. If the DC controller PCA detects a low toner level, a message appears on the control-panel display.
Cartridge detection
The DC controller PCA detects the presence of the cartridge by using information stored in plate antenna 2 and the print-cartridge memory tag. The DC controller PCA detects the presence or absence of the print cartridge during the wait period.
ENWW Engine-control system 127
Laser/scanner system
The laser/scanner produces the latent electrostatic image on the photosensitive drum in the print cartridge. The main components of the laser/scanner assembly are the laser driver PCA, the scanner motor, various mirrors, and the focusing lenses.
Figure 4-8
Laser/scanner assembly
The laser scanner uses two laser diodes to scan two lines simultaneously, producing high-speed laser scanning. After receiving the print command from the host computer, the DC controller PCA activates the scanner motor, which rotates the six-sided scanner mirror. The laser driver PCA emits light from the two laser diodes according to signals from the DC controller PCA. The two laser beams strike the six-sided scanning mirror and are directed through the focusing lenses and onto the
128 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
photosensitive drum. The modulated laser beams generate the latent electrostatic image on the photosensitive drum according to the image data signals that are received from the DC controller
PCA.
Laser/scanner control
The laser/scanner-control circuit on the laser driver PCA turns the laser diodes on and off according to image-data signals that the DC controller PCA sends. The DC controller PCA sends image-data signals VD01/VD01, VD02, and /VD02 and the laser-control signals CNT0, CNT1, and CNT2 to the logic circuit on the laser driver PCA. The laser-control signals control laser emission, automatic
ENWW Laser/scanner system 129
Figure 4-9
Laser-control-circuit block diagram
Laser-emission control simply turns the laser diodes on and off. Automatic power control limits the amount of light that the laser diodes emit. Horizontal-synchronization control determines the starting position for the horizontal direction of the image. Image-mask control prevents laser beams from striking the non-imaging areas of the drum, which is approximately 5 mm (0.2 inch) along the vertical edges and 8 mm (0.3 inch) at the top and bottom.
130 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Image-formation system
The image-formation system consists of the print cartridge, transfer-charging roller, and fuser.
When the formatter sends a print command, the engine controller drives the main motor to rotate the photosensitive drum, primary-charging roller, developing cylinder, transfer-charging roller, and pressure roller.
The primary charging roller applies a uniform negative charge to the photosensitive drum surface.
Laser beams, modulated by the signals from the formatter, focus on the photosensitive drum surface to form a latent image on the photosensitive drum.
The developing cylinder develops the latent image into a visible, toner-based image. The transfercharging roller then transfers the toner onto media. Heat and pressure in the fuser bonds the toner to the print media in order to form a permanent image. The cleaning blade scrapes residual toner from the photosensitive drum, and the primary-charging roller applies a uniform negative charge to the photosensitive drum surface in preparation for the next latent image.
ENWW
Figure 4-10
Image-formation system
Image-formation system 131
Print cartridge
The print cartridge contains the primary-charging roller, photosensitive drum, and developing cylinder. The print cartridge has built-in memory that records the number of rotations and the toner level. This information is passed to the DC controller, which sends an alert when the remaining printcartridge life reaches a low threshold.
Cartridge memory
The cartridge memory is EEPROM built into the cartridge, so that the MFP can detect the cartridge conditions.
The cartridge memory read/write is performed by the memory controller board through the antenna unit. The DC controller PCA reads the cartridge information and writes that information to the memory. The memory read/write process is implemented when the memory controller board receives a command from the DC controller PCA at the following timing.
Figure 4-11
Cartridge memory
Reading timing
●
When the power is turned on
●
When the door is closed
●
When the DC controller PCA receives a command from the formatter
Writing timing
●
When printing is completed
●
When the DC controller PCA receives a command from the formatter
132 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
The memory data that the memory controller sends also contains the status of any error that has occurred during the read/write operation. When the error status is sent, the DC controller PCA makes up to four attempts to read the operation. If the error is not cleared after the operation, the DC controller PCA determines one of the following error conditions: sub-CPU failure, memory-data abnormality, or memory-access abnormality.
CAUTION
Removing the print cartridge when the top cover interlock is overridden disables the cartridge memory.
Image-formation process
The image-formation process is divided into stages.
ENWW
Figure 4-12
Stages of image-formation
1.
Primary charge
(conditioning)—The primary-charging roller in the print cartridge applies a uniform negative charge to the surface of the drum. The primary-charging roller is made of conductive rubber. An AC bias is applied to the roller to erase any residual charges from any previous image. A negative DC bias is applied by the charging roller to create a uniform negative potential on the drum surface.
2.
Laser-beam exposure
(writing)—Two laser diodes project laser beams onto a rotating scanning mirror. As the mirror rotates, the beams reflect off of the mirror, first through a set of focusing lenses, then off a mirror, and finally through a slot in the top of the toner cartridge, and onto the photosensitive drum. The twin beams sweep the drum from left to right, discharging the negative potential wherever the beams strike the surface. This creates a latent electrostatic image, which later is developed into a visible image.
3.
Developing
—At this stage of the process, the latent electrostatic image is present on the drum.
The toner particles obtain a negative surface charge by rubbing against the developing cylinder, which is connected to a negative DC supply. The negatively charged toner is attracted to the discharged (exposed, grounded) areas of the drum, and is repelled from the negatively charged
(unexposed) areas.
4.
Transfer
—During the transfer process, the toner image on the drum surface is transferred to the paper. The transfer charging roller applies a positive charge to the back of the paper and causes the negatively charged toner on the drum surface to be attracted to the paper. After separation, the drum is cleaned and conditioned for the next image.
Image-formation system 133
5.
Separation
—During the separating process, the paper separates from the drum. To stabilize the feed system and to prevent dropouts on the printed image at low temperature and humidity, the static-charge eliminator reduces the charge on the back of the paper.
6.
Fusing
—During the fusing process, heat and pressure fuse the toner to the paper in order to produce a permanent image. The paper passes between a heated fuser element and a soft pressure roller. This melts the toner and presses it into the paper.
7.
Drum cleaning
—The cleaning blade is in contact with the surface of the drum at all times. As the drum rotates during printing, excess toner is scraped off and stored in the waste-toner receptacle.
134 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Pickup, feed, and delivery system
The pickup-and-feed system consists of various rollers that the printer motors drive. The MFP uses tray 1 (the manual feeding tray) and a cassette in tray 2 as media sources. The printed media is delivered to the output device that is installed. The output device can be the standard output bin, the
3-bin mailbox, or the stapler/stacker. Only one output device can be installed. Three additional 500sheet feeders can be added to the MFP. These input and output accessories are discussed later in this chapter.
The MFP has a built-in reversing unit that can deliver the pages either face-up or face-down. Facedown output, which is the default, is the fastest method, and pages are stacked in the correct order.
Face-up output uses the straightest paper path, but pages are stacked in the reverse order.
The tray 1 paper sensor (on the tray 1 pickup assembly; PS105) detects media in tray 1. The tray 2 paper sensor (PS101) detects media in tray 2. The paper-stack-surface sensor (PS107) and the paper-size-detection switch (SW102) detect the media that is loaded in the tray 2 cassette.
The pickup operation uses three motors (M101, M102, and M103), a clutch (CL101), and two solenoids (SL101 and SL102). The delivery operation uses five motors (M101, M102, M104, M105, and M106) and two solenoids (SL105 and SL106) for the delivery sequence. For the locations of
these components, see Figure 4-13 Motor, clutch, and solenoid locations on page 136
.
Six photosensors (PS102, PS103, PS108, PS109, PS110, and PS111) detect media arriving and passing along the paper path. For the locations of these sensors, see
time, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCA halts the MFP functions and a jam error message appears on the control-panel display.
ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 135
Figure 4-13
Motor, clutch, and solenoid locations
136 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
Figure 4-14
Sensor and switch locations
The pickup, feed, and delivery system is divided into two parts:
●
The
pickup and feed block
contains the paper path from each tray and stops at the fuser entrance.
●
The
fusing/reversing/delivery block
contains the paper path from the fuser entrance to the output device.
Pickup, feed, and delivery system 137
Figure 4-15
Pickup, feed, and delivery system
Pickup-and-feed block
The following functions occur in the pickup-and-feed block:
●
Detecting media presence
●
Detecting media size
●
Detecting when media enters the paper path from the trays
●
Lifting the tray 2 paper plate
●
Preventing multifeeds
●
Adjusting the distance between pages
●
Correcting page skew
138 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Printing from tray 1
The tray 1 paper sensor (PS105) detects the presence of media in tray 1.
When the DC controller PCA receives the print command, the printer starts the initial rotation phase, which consists of the main motor warm-up, scanner motor warm-up, high-voltage control sequence, and fuser warm-up. When the initial rotation phase ends, the tray 1 pickup solenoid (SL102) is activated.
The cam rotates, the paper-tray lifter rises, and the media comes in contact with the tray 1 pickup roller. At the same time, the tray 1 pickup roller rotates twice and picks up a sheet of media from tray
1. The separation pad prevents additional sheets from feeding with the first sheet.
When the sheet reaches the registration assembly, its skew is corrected. The sheet then passes through the transfer, separation, and fusing stages, and through the delivery unit, and is then delivered to the output bin.
NOTE
If media is removed from tray 1 after the initial rotation phase but before the pickup roller pulls the media from the tray, the tray 1 pickup roller might continue to rotate up to six times, after which a jam is detected.
Figure 4-16
Tray 1 timing
ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 139
Printing from tray 2
When the DC controller PCA receives print command, the main motor (M101) and scanner motor start their rotation. When the main motor reaches its prescribed speed, the feed-roller clutch (CL101) and tray 2 pickup solenoid (SL101) are activated. (The main motor rotation drives the tray 2 pickup roller, tray 2 feed roller, tray 2 separation roller, and paper-feed rollers.)
The pickup solenoid activates the tray 2 pickup roller, which rotates once and picks up the media in the tray. The separation roller prevents additional sheets from feeding with the first sheet, and the media is fed to the pre-feed sensor (PS102).
When the sheet reaches the registration assembly, its skew is corrected. The sheet then passes through the transfer, separation, and fusing stages, and through the delivery unit, and then is delivered to the output bin.
Figure 4-17
Tray 2 timing
140 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Media-size detection
The MFP has three media-size detection systems:
●
Cassette (trays 2, 3, 4, and 5) media-size detection
●
Media-length detection
●
Media-width detection
Cassette media-size detection
The media-size detection switch (SW102) has two functions: it detects the presence of the cassette, and it detects the size of the media that is loaded in the cassette. This switch has upper, middle, and lower components that act together to detect the cassette presence and the media size.
Table 4-3
Cassette media-size detection switch components
Cassette presence or media size
No cassette
A4
LTR
B5
A5
EXE
LGL
UNV
Upper switch
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Middle switch
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
Lower switch
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Media-length detection
The top-of-page sensor (PS103) determines the length of the media by measuring the time between detecting the leading and trailing edges. If this size does not match the size that SW102 detects or the size that the formatter specifies, the DC controller sends a signal to the formatter. If the media size that PS103 measures is shorter than the media size that the user selected, the formatter masks part of the image to prevent extra toner from transferring from the photosensitive drum to the transfercharging roller.
Media-width detection
Two media-width sensors (PS106 and PS112) act together to determine if the media is narrower than expected or is skewed. If either of these conditions is detected, the DC controller adjusts the fuser temperature to prevent overheating. PS106 detects media that is narrower than 122 mm
(4.8 inches). PS112 detects media that is narrower than 188 mm (7.4 inches).
Cassette pickup operation
The DC controller turns on the cassette pickup solenoid (SL101) and the main motor (M101) drives the cassette pickup roller and the cassette pickup cam. The cam causes the arm that is attached to the pickup roller to swing down, and the pickup roller contacts the surface of the paper stack. One sheet of media is fed into the MFP.
ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 141
Figure 4-18
Cassette pickup operation
142 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Lifter-driver operation
The lifter driver keeps the media stack surface at a specific level in order to have a stabilized pickup operation regardless of the size of the media in the tray 2 cassette. The DC controller PCA operates the lifter-driver motor (M103) for 30 milliseconds. The motor stops when the paper-stack-position sensor (PS107) detects the media. If the paper-stack-position sensor does not detect any media within 8 seconds after the lifting operation has begun, the DC controller PCA determines that a lifterdriver motor failure has occurred, and a message appears on the control-panel display. The DC controller PCA stops the lifting operation if the paper-stack-position sensor detects the absence of the tray 2 cassette.
Multifeed prevention
The MFP uses the separation roller in tray 2 to prevent multiple-feeding. The separation roller rotates in the same direction as the feed roller. The separation roller is equipped with a torque limiter, but because the force of the feed roller exceeds that of the torque limiter, the separation roller is actually driven by the feed roller.
If multiple sheets of media are picked up, however, the low friction force between the sheets weakens the rotational force from the feed roller to the separation roller. Consequently, the torque limiter takes control of the separation roller and rotates it in the reverse direction, which removes the extra sheets.
ENWW
Figure 4-19
Multifeed prevention
Pickup, feed, and delivery system 143
Distance-between-pages adjustment
When a multiple-page print job is sent, the DC controller uses the pre-feed sensor (PS102) to maintain a uniform distance between the pages. If the distance between pages is too small or if the pages overlap, the DC controller turns off the feed clutch (CL101) and stops the next sheet of paper.
After a specified time, the DC controller turns the clutch on to allow the paper-feed process to continue.
Figure 4-20
Distance-between-pages adjustment
144 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Media-skew prevention
The MFP uses a registration shutter on the registration assembly to prevent skewed media from entering the MFP. When the leading edge of the skewed media contacts the registration shutter, the shutter does not open. The feed roller continues to rotate and the media begins to sag. When the entire leading edge comes in full contact with the shutter, the media skew is corrected and the registration shutter opens. When the shutter opens, the media can continue into the printer paper path. The overall print speed is not affected. The following three figures illustrate this process.
ENWW
Figure 4-21
Corner of the media contacts the shutter
Pickup, feed, and delivery system 145
Figure 4-22
Media sags until the entire leading edge contacts the shutter
Figure 4-23
Skew is corrected, and the shutter opens
146 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Feed-speed control
To ensure that the toner fuses sufficiently, the DC controller adjusts the speed at which media is fed according to the media type that the formatter specifies.
ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 147
Fusing and reversing/delivery block
After the toner is fused to the media, the media enters the reversing/delivery unit. The MFP can deliver the media to the output bin either face-up or face-down, depending on instructions from the formatter. To stack pages of a multiple-page print job in the correct order, the pages must be flipped over in the reversing unit before they are delivered to the output bin. This is the default setting. If faceup delivery is requested, the face-up solenoid (SL105) activates the face-up deflector to prevent the media from entering the reversing unit.
Figure 4-24
Fusing and reversing/delivery block
Fusing
The fuser applies heat and pressure to the media to permanently bond the toner image to the media.
Face-down delivery
When the fuser-delivery sensor (PS108) detects media, the crossing motor (M104) begins rotating.
When the reversing-paper sensor (PS110) detects media, the reversing motor (M105) begins rotating clockwise.
148 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Figure 4-25
Face-down delivery: media enters the reversing unit
After a specified length of time, both motors stop, and the reversing motor begins rotating counterclockwise. Then, M106 drives the intermediate rollers and the delivery rollers, which guide the media into the output bin. When M106 begins rotating, the reversing-separation solenoid releases the reversing rollers, and the media begins traveling in the opposite direction. When the paper-delivery sensor (PS109) detects the trailing edge of the media, M106 stops rotating.
Figure 4-26
Face-down delivery: media reverses direction
Face-up delivery
As media passes through the fuser-delivery sensor (PS108), the face-up solenoid (SL105) activates the face-up deflector to prevent media from entering the reversing unit. M106 rotates clockwise and drives the delivery rollers, which carry the media into the output bin. When PS108 detects the trailing edge of the media, SL105 turns off and the face-up deflector returns to its home position. When the paper-delivery sensor (PS109) detects the trailing edge of the media, M106 stops rotating.
ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 149
Figure 4-27
Face-up delivery
150 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Jam detection
The MFP uses the following sensors to detect the presence of media and to check whether media is being fed correctly or has jammed:
●
Pre-feed sensor (PS102)
●
Top-of-page sensor (PS103)
●
Fuser-delivery sensor (PS108)
●
Paper-delivery sensor (PS109)
●
Reversing paper-sensor (PS110)
●
Reversing-unit paper-jam sensor (PS111)
The microprocessor on the DC controller checks for jams by timing the media as it moves past these sensors. If the media does not pass the sensor in a specific period of time, the transport process is stopped (the motors are turned off and the rollers no longer rotate) and a jam message appears on the control-panel display.
Pickup delay jam from tray 1
If the top-of-page sensor (PS103) does not detect the leading edge of the media within a specific period of time after the media is picked up, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCA determines that a pickup jam has occurred.
NOTE
The MFP attempts to pick up the media several times before determining that a pickup jam exists. The number of pickup attempts depends on the source (for example, four attempts occur if tray 1 is the source).
The transport process stops and a
13.XX.YY JAM
message appears on the control-panel display.
Pickup delay jam from tray 2
If the pre-feed sensor (PS102) does not detect the leading edge of the media within a specific period of time after the media is picked up, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCA determines that a pickup delay jam has occurred.
NOTE
The MFP attempts to pick up the media several times before determining that a pickup jam exists. The number of pickup attempts depends on the source (for example, four attempts occur if tray 1 is the source).
The transport process stops and a
13.XX.YY JAM
message appears on the control-panel display.
Pickup stationary jam
If the top-of-page sensor (PS103) does not detect the trailing edge of the media within a specific period of time after the media is picked up, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCA determines that a pickup stationary jam has occurred.
The transport process stops and a
13.XX.YY JAM
message appears on the control-panel display.
ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 151
Fuser-delivery delay jam
If the fuser-delivery sensor (PS108) does not detect the leading edge of the media within a specific period of time after the top-of-page sensor (PS103) detects the leading edge, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCA determines that a fuser-delivery delay jam has occurred. The time varies according to the length of the media.
The transport process stops and a
13.XX.YY JAM
message appears on the control-panel display.
Fuser wrapping jam
If the fuser-delivery sensor (PS108) does not detect the trailing edge of the media within a specific period of time after it detects the leading edge, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCA detects that a fuser wrapping jam has occurred.
The transport process stops and a
13.XX.YY JAM
message appears on the control-panel display.
Fuser-delivery stationary jam when feeding regular-size media
NOTE
Regular-size media is defined as A4, letter, legal, B5, executive or A5.
If the fuser-delivery sensor (PS108) does not detect the trailing edge of the media within a specific time period after it detects a fuser wrapping jam, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCA detects that a fuser-delivery stationary jam has occurred.
The transport process stops and a
13.XX.YY JAM
message appears on the control-panel display.
Fuser-delivery stationary jam when feeding custom-size media
If the fuser-delivery sensor (PS108) does not detect the trailing edge of the media within a specific time period after it detects a fuser wrapping jam, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCA detects that a fuser-delivery stationary jam has occurred.
NOTE
The time period varies according to the length of the media. The interval is longer for media that is 200 mm (7.9 inches) or longer.
The transport process stops and a
13.XX.YY JAM
message appears on the control-panel display.
Reversing delay jam (face-down delivery only)
If the reversing-paper sensor (PS110) does not detect the leading edge of the media within a specific time period after the fuser-delivery sensor (PS108) detects the leading edge, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCA detects that a reversing delay jam has occurred.
The transport process stops and a
13.XX.YY JAM
message appears on the control-panel display.
Reversing stationary jam (face-down delivery only)
If the reversing-paper sensor (PS110) does not detect the trailing edge of the media within a specific time period after the fuser-delivery sensor (PS108) detects the trailing edge, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCA detects that a reversing delay jam has occurred.
The transport process stops and a
13.XX.YY JAM
message appears on the control-panel display.
152 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Delivery delay jam during face-down delivery
If the paper-delivery sensor (PS109) does not detect the leading edge of the media within a specific time period after the paper-reversing operation starts, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCA detects that a delivery delay jam has occurred.
The transport process stops and a
13.XX.YY JAM
message appears on the control-panel display.
Delivery delay jam during face-up delivery
If the paper-delivery sensor (PS109) does not detect the leading edge of the media within a specific time period after the fuser-delivery sensor (PS108) detects the leading edge, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCA detects that a delivery delay jam has occurred.
The transport process stops and a
13.XX.YY JAM
message appears on the control-panel display.
Delivery stationary jam during face-down delivery
If the paper-delivery sensor (PS109) does not detect the leading edge of the media within a specific time period after the reversing-separation solenoid (SL106) is turned off, the microprocessor on the
DC controller PCA detects that a delivery delay jam has occurred.
The transport process stops and a
13.XX.YY JAM
message appears on the control-panel display.
Delivery stationary jam during face-up delivery
If the paper-delivery sensor (PS109) does not detect the trailing edge of the media within a specific time period after the fuser-delivery sensor (PS108) detects the trailing edge, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCA detects that a delivery delay jam has occurred.
The transport process stops and a
13.XX.YY JAM
message appears on the control-panel display.
Door-open jam
If the top door is opened during printing, the top-cover switch (SW101) is activated and the microprocessor on the DC controller PCA determines that a door-open jam has occurred.
The transport process stops and a
13.XX.YY JAM
message appears on the control-panel display.
Residual-media jam
If the top-of-page sensor (PS103), the fuser-delivery sensor (PS108), or the reversing-unit jam sensor (PS111) detects the leading edge of the media at the start of initial rotation, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCA identifies a residual-media jam.
In addition, if the fuser-delivery sensor (PS108) does not detect the leading edge of the media, within
2.1 seconds after the top-of-page sensor (PS103) detects the leading edge, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCA identifies a residual-media jam.
Whenever the MFP is turned on or a print sequence begins, if the pre-feed sensor (PS102) detects the presence of media, an automatic-delivery request is sent to the formatter. The DC controller PCA drives each motor, and the residual media is delivered to the output bin. Normal printing can continue.
ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 153
Printing from the 500-sheet feeder
The MFP supports up to three additional 500-sheet feeders (trays 3, 4, and 5).
Figure 4-28
Paper path with 500-sheet feeders installed
The paper-feeder driver controls the 500-sheet feeder operation sequences. An 8-bit microprocessor in the paper-feeder driver controls the 500-sheet feeder sequences and the communication with the
DC controller PCA.
The paper-feeder driver drives the solenoid in response to the pickup command. The paper-feeder driver also reports the paper-feeder status to the DC controller PCA.
The printer delivers a charge of +24 Vdc to the paper feeder, which then generates +3.3 V for the integrated circuits.
154 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Figure 4-29
500-sheet feeder I/O block diagram
500-sheet feeder pickup and feeding
The pickup and feeding processes for the 500-sheet feeder are identical to the processes for tray 2 in the print engine. See
Figure 4-30 500-sheet feeder pickup and feed diagram on page 156 to identify
the individual switches and sensors for the 500-sheet feeder.
ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 155
Figure 4-30
500-sheet feeder pickup and feed diagram
156 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Duplex-printing unit
The optional duplex-printing unit (duplexer) adds another reversing sequence to print on both sides of a page.
NOTE
The MFP cannot print on both sides of paper that is 180 mm (7.1 inches) or shorter.
Figure 4-31
Duplex printing paper path
Reversing/duplexing pickup
Whenever the duplex-printing unit is installed and the print job specifies duplex printing, the MFP feeds the paper into the duplex-printing unit after the reversing operation rather than feeding it into the output delivery path. The duplex-printing unit feeds the paper into the print engine a second time so that the second side can be printed. After the paper has entered the reversing unit a second time, the MFP delivers the paper to the output bin.
NOTE
If the top-of-page sensor (PS108) determines that the paper is 180 mm (7.1 inches) or shorter, the MFP does not feed the paper into the duplex-printing unit after the reversing operation. The paper is delivered to the output bin instead.
The DC controller PCA controls all of the components in the duplex-printing unit.
ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 157
Figure 4-32
Duplex-printing control
Duplex-printing jam detection
The duplex-printing unit uses the duplex-unit-pickup sensor (PS122) to detect jams. The microprocessor on the DC controller PCA determines a jam situation if the sensor indicates that paper is present at an unexpected time or that paper is not present at the expected time. The microprocessor on the DC controller PCA notifies the formatter that a jam has occurred.
When a jam is detected, the transport process stops and a
13.XX.YY JAM
message appears on the control-panel display.
Duplex-unit-pickup delay jam
If the duplex-unit-pickup sensor (PS122) does not detect the leading edge of the paper within a specific time period after the duplex feed motor (M107) starts driving, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCA determines that a duplex-unit-pickup delay jam has occurred.
158 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Duplex-unit stationary jam
If the duplex-unit-pickup sensor (PS122) does not detect the trailing edge of the paper within a specific time period after the duplex-unit pickup operation starts, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCA determines that a duplex-unit stationary jam has occurred.
Also, if the microprocessor on the DC controller PCA cannot communicate with the formatter while paper is in the duplexing unit, it determines that a duplex-unit stationary jam has occurred.
Duplex-unit delay jam
If the duplex-unit-pickup sensor (PS122) does not detect the trailing edge of the paper within a specific time period after the fuser-delivery sensor (PS108) detects the trailing edge, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCA determines that a duplex-unit delay jam has occurred.
ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 159
3-bin mailbox system
When the 3-bin mailbox (MBM) is installed, it receives print media from the print engine and delivers it to one of its three bins. The 3-bin mailbox has the following components:
●
One feed motor that drives the rollers
●
Two solenoids that operate the inlet deflector and the bin deflector
●
Six sensors that detect the presence of print media and the stack height in the output bins
●
One switch that determines whether the 3-bin mailbox is attached to the MFP correctly
●
One fan that cools components inside the 3-bin mailbox
The 3-bin mailbox has three operating modes: stacker mode, mailbox mode, and function-separator mode.
The MBM-driver PCA controls all functions in the 3-bin mailbox. To deliver media to the different bins, the inlet deflector and the bin deflector change position as required.
160 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
Figure 4-33
3-bin mailbox operation
3-bin mailbox system 161
Stacker mode
When configured for stacker mode, the 3-bin mailbox fills the bottom output bin (bin 3) first and then fills the next highest bin.
<Stacker Mode>
Figure 4-34
Media flow when using the stacker mode
Mailbox mode
When configured for mailbox mode, the 3-bin mailbox stacks print media in each bin as determined by the print job specifications. For example, one user might have all jobs delivered to the bottom bin, and another user might have all jobs delivered to the top bin.
<Mailbox Mode>
<Original Job Selection Mode>
Bin#1
Bin#2
Bin#3
Figure 4-35
Media flow when using the mailbox mode
Function-separator mode
When configured for function-separator mode, the 3-bin mailbox delivers print media to each bin as specified by the job type. For example, all copy jobs might be delivered to the top bin, and all faxes might be delivered to the middle bin.
Jam detection
The 3-bin mailbox uses the inlet sensor (PS1501) to detect jams. The microprocessor on the MBMdriver PCA determines a jam situation if the sensor indicates that media is present at an unexpected
162 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
time or that media is not present at the expected time. The microprocessor on the MBM-driver PCA notifies the formatter that a jam has occurred.
When a jam is detected, the transport process stops and a
13.XX.YY JAM
message appears on the control-panel display.
Feed-delay jam
If the inlet sensor (PS1501) does not detect the leading edge of the media within a specific time period after receiving a delivery-notice command, the microprocessor on the MBM-driver PCA determines that a feed-delay jam has occurred. The time interval is longer for face-up delivery than for face-down delivery.
Feed-stationary jam
If the inlet sensor (PS1501) does not detect the trailing edge of the media within a specific time period after it detects the leading edge, the microprocessor on the MBM-driver PCA determines that a feed-stationary jam has occurred.
Residual-media jam
If the inlet sensor (PS1501) detects the presence of media during the initial WAIT period, the microprocessor on the MBM-driver PCA determines that a residual-media jam has occurred.
Power-on sequence
The following figure illustrates the operational sequence of the MBM from power-on to standby.
ENWW 3-bin mailbox system 163
Power ON
CPU initialization
MBM ID check
Optional interface communication preparation
Optional interface communication start
Feed motor initial drive
Failure check
Residual paper check
Door open check
S t a n d b y
Figure 4-36
Power-on sequence
MBM driver
The MBM driver controls the operational sequence of the MBM. When the MFP is turned on and DC power is supplied to the MBM driver, the MBM driver communicates with the formatter to start an operational control. Then the MBM enters standby mode and the MBM driver outputs the signals to drive motors and solenoids in response to the command input from the MFP.
164 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
Inlet sensor
PS1501
SNS PCB
Bin#1 paper sensor
PS1504
Bin#2 paper sensor
PS1506
PS1503
Bin#1 full sensor
Bin#2 full sensor
PS1505
Bin#3 full sensor
PS1507
CPU
IC1501
MBM driver
Motor driver
IC1504
LED driver
Q1507
Q1508
Solenoid driver
Q1504
Solenoid driver
Q1503
M1501
Feed motor
Printer recognition switch
SW1501
Printer
Formatter
DC controller PCB
+24VA
+24VA
CAN driver
IC1505
+5V
Regulator
IC1502
Reset IC
IC1503
Figure 4-37
MBM driver
Table 4-4
MBM driver components
Part
Motor
Solenoids
Feed motor (M1501)
Inlet-deflector solenoid (SL1502)
Bin-deflector solenoid (SL1501)
Option
Purpose
Drives the inlet roller and delivery roller
Shifts the inlet deflector
Shifts the bin deflector
LED
User LED
SL1502
Inlet deflector solenoid
SL1501
Bin deflector solemoid
FM1501
Cooling Fan
3-bin mailbox system 165
Table 4-4
MBM driver components (continued)
Part
Sensors
Switch
Inlet sensor (PS1501)
Bin 1 paper sensor (PS1504)
Bin 2 paper sensor (PS1506)
Bin-1-full sensor (PS1503)
Bin-2-full sensor (PS1505)
Bin-3-full sensor (PS1507)
Printer-recognition switch (SW1501)
Fan Cooling fan (FM1501)
Purpose
Detects paper jams
Detects whether bin 1 contains paper
Detects whether bin 2 contains paper
Detects whether bin 1 is full
Detects whether bin 2 is full
Detects whether bin 3 is full
Detects whether the MBM and the engine are properly connected (interruption of +5V)
Cools the electrical parts under the paper delivery
166 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
MBM switches and sensors
PS1503
PS1505
PS1504
PS1506
PS1507
PS1501
SW1501
PS1501
PS1503
PS1504
PS1505
PS1506
PS1507
SW1501
Inlet sensor
Bin 1 paper-full sensor
Bin 1 paper sensor
Bin 2 paper-full sensor
Bin 2 paper sensor
Bin 3 paper-full sensor
Engine connection switch
ENWW 3-bin mailbox system 167
MBM PCBs
1
2
3
1 2
LED PCB
Sensor PCB
MBM driver PCB
3
168 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
MBM list of signals
Table 4-5
List of signals for the MBM driver PCB
Connector
J1501
J1502
PIN
1
2
3
4
8
9
10
11
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
Abbreviation
+24VA
+24VA
PWRON
GND
GND
CAN-L
CAN-H
SPD-UP
+24VA
GND
GND
+5V
BIN1–FULL
BIN1-PAP
BIN2-FULL
BIN2-PAP
GND
ULED-O
ULED-G
GND
JOINT-SW
I/O
I
I
I
I
I/O
I/O
I
I
O
O
I
J1503
J1504
3
1
1
2
2
3
+5V
GND
IN-SUS
+5V
GND
BIN3–FULL
4 +24V
BINFL-SL
I
I
O
Logic
H
H
H
L
L
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Signal name
POWER-ON DETECTION signal
CAN-RECEIVE signal
CAN-RECEIVE signal
SPEED-UP DETECTION signal
BIN1 PAPER-FULL signal
BIN1 PAPER DETECTION signal
BIN2 PAPER-FULL signal
BIN2 PAPER DETECTION signal
USER LED DRIVE signal (Orange)
USER LED DRIVE signal (Green)
PRINTER-RECOGNITION SWITCH signal
INLET-DETECTION signal
BIN3 TRAY PAPER-FULL signal
DRIVE signal
ENWW 3-bin mailbox system 169
Table 4-5
List of signals for the MBM driver PCB (continued)
Connector PIN Abbreviation I/O
J1505
J1506
J1507
J1508
J1509
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
2
1
2
3
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
FD-AD
FD-AND
FD-BD
FD-BND
GND
PWRON-OUT
CAN-L-OUT
CAN-H-OUT
GND
FLASH-OUT
FLASH-MD0
FLASH-CLK-SW4
FLASH-MD2
FLASH-SW3
FLASH-ACT0–SW1 I
+5V
I
RCT-CTRL
GND
I
FLASH-ACT1–SW2 I
+24V
FD-SL O
FAN-DRV
FAN-LCK
GND
Logic
H
L
H
Pulse
Pulse
Pulse
Pulse
O
I/O
I/O
O
I
I
I
O
O
O
O
L
H
I/O L
I L
Signal name
FEED-MOTOR DRIVE signal
FEED-MOTOR DRIVE signal
FEED-MOTOR DRIVE signal
FEED-MOTOR DRIVE signal
POWER-ON OUTPUT signal
CAN-SEND signal
CAN-SEND signal
FLASH ROM RECORD signal
OPERATION ROM RECORD signal
FLASH ROM RECORD signal
OPERATION-MODE SPECIFYING signal
FLASH ROM RECORD signal
FLASH ROM RECORD signal
RESET signal
FLASH ROM RECORD signal
INLET-DEFLECTOR SOLENOID
DRIVE signal
FAN-DRIVE SIGNAL
FAN-LOCK signal
170 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Stapler/stacker system
The stapler/stacker is a paper-handling accessory that can function in the following modes:
●
Stacker mode. Printed paper is directed to the delivery tray. The stacker holds up to 500 sheets of paper (75 g/m
2
or 20 lb Bond).
●
Stapler/stacker mode. Printed paper is stapled and then directed to the delivery tray. Up to 30 sheets of paper can be stapled, and up to 15 sets of stapled sheets can be stacked.
The following diagram shows the paper flow.
Figure 4-38
Stapler/stacker paper flow
Power-on sequence
The following diagram shows the operational sequence of the stapler/stacker from power-on to standby mode.
ENWW Stapler/stacker system 171
Figure 4-39
Stapler/stacker power-on sequence
Staple mode
In this mode, up to 30 sheets are stapled in one set and are then stacked in the delivery tray.
172 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
The feed operation of this mode is described in the following procedure.
1.
The printer engine sends a paper-delivery signal to the formatter when the leading edge of the print paper reaches the fixing-delivery sensor.
2.
When the formatter receives the signal, it sends a delivery-notice command to the stapler/ stacker driver.
3.
The stapler/stacker driver causes the paddle motor (M1301) to rotate counter-clockwise and allows the upper and the lower delivery rollers to be disengaged by the paper-delivery roller engaging operation.
Upper delivery roller
Upper delivery guide
Paddle
Inlet roller
Delivery roller
Lower delivery roller
PS1301
Delivery tray
Figure 4-40
Staple-mode feed operation
4.
After a prescribed period of time, the stapler/stacker driver causes the feed motor (M1303) to drive at the same feed speed as the printer engine. This allows the inlet roller, the upper delivery roller, and the lower delivery roller to rotate, which feeds the paper to the stapler/stacker.
Stapler/stacker system 173
5.
After the disengaging operation of the feed rollers is normal, the stapler/stacker driver drives the jogger motor (M1302) and shifts the jogger guide from the turn-out position to the waiting position.
Jogger guide
Belt
Waiting position
Turn-out position
(Top view)
Figure 4-41
Jogger guide
6.
When the jogger guide is shifted to the waiting position, the stapler/stacker driver rotates M1301 counter-clockwise again to engage the upper and the lower delivery rollers.
Jogger guide
Upper delivery roller
Upper delivery guide
Paddle
Inlet roller
Delivery roller
Lower delivery roller
PS1301
Delivery tray
Figure 4-42
Staple-mode feed operation
7.
After the leading edge of the paper reaches the paper inlet sensor (PS1301), the stapler/stacker driver changes the feed speed of the M1303 to synchronize it with that of the stapler/stacker.
174 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
8.
After the feed speed of the stapler/stacker is changed, the stapler/stacker driver rotates M1301 counter-clockwise again to disengage the upper and the lower disengagement rollers.
Jogger guide
Upper delivery roller
Upper delivery guide
Paddle
Inlet roller
Delivery roller
Lower delivery roller
PS1301
Delivery tray
Figure 4-43
Staple-mode feed operation
9.
After the trailing edge of the paper passes the inlet sensor (PS1301), the stapler/stacker driver activates the clamp solenoid (SL1301). During the clamp-disengagement operation, the stamp is disengaged from the paper so the paper becomes unattached.
ENWW
Jogger guide
Upper delivery roller
Paddle
Inlet roller
Delivery roller
Lower delivery roller
Clamp
PS1301
Delivery tray
Figure 4-44
Staple-mode feed operation
10.
The stapler/stacker driver changes its control depending on whether the paper that was fed is the last sheet of the job or not.
●
If it is not the last sheet of paper, go to steps 11 and 12, and then go back to step 7.
●
If it is the last paper, go to step 11.
Stapler/stacker system 175
11.
The stapler/stacker driver changes the speed of the feed motor (M1303).
●
If it is not the last sheet of paper, the driver drives the feed motor at the printer speed.
●
If it is the last sheet of paper, the driver stops the feed motor.
12.
The stapler/stacker driver drives the motors to perform the alignment operation.
●
Horizontal alignment: Drives M1302 and performs the jogger operation.
●
Vertical alignment: Drives M1301 and performs the paddle operation.
Through these alignments, the paper is correctly positioned on the jogger tray.
Jogger guide
Upper delivery roller
Paddle
Inlet roller
Delivery roller
Lower delivery roller
PS1301
Delivery tray
Figure 4-45
Staple-mode feed operation
176 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Jogger guide Jogger guide
Paper
Paper
Clamp
Paddle
Staple
Waiting position Alignment position
(Top view)
Figure 4-46
Staple-mode feed operation
13.
The stapler/stacker driver performs the staple operation.
14.
After the completion of the staple operation, the stapler/stacker driver rotates the paddle motor
(M1303) counter-clockwise to engage the upper and the lower delivery rollers.
15.
The stapler/stacker driver drives the feed motor (M1303) and feeds the stapled piles of paper.
ENWW Stapler/stacker system 177
16.
The stapler/stacker driver shifts the jogger guide to the turn-out position. This allows the paper pile on the jogger guide to fall onto the delivery tray.
Jogger guide
Upper delivery roller
Lower delivery roller
PS1301
Delivery tray
Figure 4-47
Staple-mode feed operation
Jogger guide Jogger guide
Paper
Alignment position
Home position
(Top view)
Figure 4-48
Staple-mode feed operation
When the delivery tray is full of paper, this status is detected by the delivery paper-full sensor
(PS1306). When this sensor continuously detects paper presence over a prescribed time interval, the stapler/stacker driver notifies the formatter of this condition.
Jogger operation
The jogger aligns the edge of the paper in the horizontal direction.
178 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
The stapler/stacker driver controls the jogger motor (M1302), which allows the jogger guide to move so it can align the edge of the paper.
Staple stacker driver PCB
M1302
Belt
Jogger gear
Jogger guide
Figure 4-49
Jogger operation
The jogger operation is explained in the following procedure.
1.
Before the start of the operation, the jogger guide is stationed at the home position (turn-out position).
Home position
Jogger guide
ENWW
Figure 4-50
Jogger operation
(Top view)
Stapler/stacker system 179
2.
At the start of the feeding process in staple mode, the stapler/stacker driver rotates M1302 counter-clockwise after it detects that the upper deliver roller is disengaged. It then moves the jogger guide to the waiting position.
Waiting potion
Print paper
(Top view)
Figure 4-51
Jogger operation
3.
Within a prescribed period of time after the trailing edge of the paper passes the paper-inlet sensor (PS1301) (when the paper covers the entire jogger guide), the stapler/stacker driver rotates M1302 counter-clockwise to move the jogger guide to the aligned position (adjusted to the width of the paper). The edge of the paper is aligned in the horizontal direction.
Alignment position
Print paper
(Top view)
Figure 4-52
Jogger operation
180 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
4.
The stapler/stacker driver rotates M1302 clockwise and moves the jogger guide 3 mm out from the aligned position (loosen alignment).
The stapler/stacker driver performs the paddle operation during the loosen alignment.
Loose alignment position
Alignment position
3mm
Print paper
(Top view)
Figure 4-53
Paddle operation
5.
After the completion of the paddle operation, the stapler/stacker driver changes its controls depending on whether the fed paper is the last paper of the job or not.
●
If it is not the last sheet of paper, go to step 2.
●
If it is the last sheet of paper, go to step 6.
ENWW Stapler/stacker system 181
6.
After the completion of the staple operation, the stapler/stacker driver rotates M1302 clockwise and moves the jogger guide to its home position. This allows the paper pile on the jogger guide to fall into the delivery tray.
Home position
Print paper
(Top view)
Figure 4-54
Jogger operation
The home position of the jogger guide is monitored by the stapler/stacker driver and the jogger home-position sensor.
NOTE
Whether the fed paper is the last sheet of the job or not is determined by the page information sent from the formatter. If it is the last sheet, the EOJ (End Of Job) is recorded in its page information.
Jogger home-position detection
The stapler/stacker detects the home position of the jogger guide by monitoring the jogger homeposition signal (JOG-HP) sent from the jogger home-position sensor (PS1304).
A rib-shaped jogger home-position flag is attached to the jogger guide. The flag has a notch, and the position of the jogger guide is detected by PS1304 passing the notch.
During the jogger-guide operation, PS1304 is interrupted by the jogger home-position flag and the
JOG-HP indicates “H”. However, PS1304 is not interrupted by the jogger home-position flag during the jogger home-position detection. The JOG-HP becomes “L” and the stapler/stacker driver determines that jogger guide is at its home position.
During the jogger home-position detection, the stapler/stacker driver rotates the jogger motor
(M1302) clockwise for a specified period of time. If JOG-HP does not change from “L” to “H”, the driver detects a jogger-motor failure and stops the loads. Then it notifies the formatter of the failure.
182 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Stapler/Stacker driver PCB
PS1304
Jogger home position detection flag
ENWW
< Jogger home position >
PS1304
< During jogger operation >
PS1304
Jogger home position detection flag
Figure 4-55
Jogger home position
Jogger home position detection flag
NOTE
At the start of the detection, the stapler/stacker driver rotates the jogger motor
(M1302) clockwise to detect its home position. It does this even when the jogger guide is already set at the home position.
NOTE
In addition to the notch that detects the home position, the jogger home-position flag also has a notch to correct the alignment position. During the alignment operation, alignment failure might be detected if the jogger motor loses synchronization during rotation. Therefore, a notch for correcting the alignment position is made near the paper-alignment position. When the alignment operation is performed, the alignment operation is corrected after checking the alignment position so that synchronization loss is avoided.
< Jogger home position > < Alignment position >
Notch for aligment correct
PS1304 PS1304
Figure 4-56
Jogger home position
Stapler/stacker system 183
Stacker mode
In stacker mode, the paper is stacked in the paper delivery tray without being stapled. The feed operation in the stacker mode is explained in the following procedure.
1.
The printer engine sends a paper-delivery signal to the formatter after the leading edge of the paper reaches the fixing-delivery sensor.
2.
The formatter sends a paper-delivery notifying command to the stapler/stacker driver.
3.
The stapler/stacker driver causes the feed motor (M1303) to drive at the same feed speed as the printer engine on order to feed the paper to the stapler/stacker.
4.
After a prescribed period of time upon receiving the signal, the stacker driver drives the feed motor (M1303) at the same feed speed as the printer engine to rotate the inlet roller, the upper delivery roller, and the lower delivery roller. Through this process, the paper is fed into the stapler/stacker.
5.
After the leading edge of the paper passes the inlet sensor (PS1301) (when the leading edge passes the upper and the lower disengagement rollers), the stapler/stacker driver rotates
M1303 at the feed speed of the stapler/stacker.
6.
The stapler/stacker driver changes the feed-motor drive depending on whether the paper that was fed is the last sheet of the job or not.
●
If it is not the last sheet of paper, the driver changes the feed-motor speed to the printer speed and returns to step 2.
●
If it is the last sheet of paper, the driver does not change the feed-motor speed.
When the delivery tray is full of paper for a specified period of time, the delivery paper-full sensor
(PS1306) detects this status and notifies the formatter.
Jam detection
The stapler/stacker has sensors that detect whether the print paper is fed correctly.
●
Paper-inlet sensor (PS1301)
●
Paper-delivery sensor (PS1302)
A jam is detected when paper is present at the sensor unit during check timings conducted by the
CPU.
If the CPU determines that a jam has occurred, it stops the print operation and notifies the formatter.
●
Feed-delay jam
If the paper-inlet sensor (PS1301) does not detect the leading edge of the paper within a prescribed period of time after it has received a paper-delivery notification command, the CPU detects a feed-delay jam.
●
Feed stationary jam
If PS1301 does not detect the trailing edge of the paper within a prescribed period of time after the paper inlet sensor (PS1301) detects the leading edge of the paper, the CPU detects a feed stationary jam.
184 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
●
Delivery stationary jam
If the paper-delivery sensor (PS1302) does not detect the trailing edge of the paper within a prescribed period of time after the feed motor has started its drive after the staple operation, the
CPU detects a delivery stationary jam.
●
Residual-paper jam
If the paper inlet sensor (PS1301) detects paper during the initial drive period, the CPU detects a residual-paper jam.
Stapler unit
The stapler motor (M1304) is installed in the stapler unit. The staple operation is performed by the stapler/stacker driver controlling M1304. In addition, the stapler unit has three sensors to detect the condition of the stapler unit.
NOTE
The staple cartridge holds a maximum of 5,000 staples.
Stapler/Stacker driver PCB
Staple cartridge
ENWW
Staple
Stapler unit
Figure 4-57
Stapler unit
PHOI1 PHOI2 PHOI3
M1304
PHOI1: Staple home position sensor
PHOI2: Staple ready sensor
PHOI3: Staple presence sensor
M1304: Stapler motor
Stapler/stacker system 185
Staple home position detection
The staple home position is detected by the stapler/stacker driver as it monitors the staple homeposition signal (/HP) from the staple home-position sensor (PHO11).
During the detection, the stapler/stacker driver rotates the staple motor (M1304) clockwise for a prescribed period of time. If the /HP signal does not change from "H" to "L" to "H", the driver detects a stapler failure, stops the loads, and notifies formatter.
NOTE
If the /HP signal does not indicate "H" after it changes from "H" to "L", the stapler/ stacker driver rotates M1304 counter-clockwise once. If the /HP signal changes from "L" to "H" during the counter-clockwise rotation, the stapler/stacker driver detects a staple jam and notifies the formatter.
Self-priming detection
The stapler/stacker self-primes when a new staple cartridge is inserted.
The stapler/stacker driver monitors the staple-ready signal (/READY) from the staple-ready sensor
(PHOI2). Self-priming is initiated when the stapler/stacker driver detects a Staple Presence signal
(LS) of "H" (meaning the staple cartridge has been replaced) after the driver has detected a LS signal of "L".
When the stapler/stacker driver detects the /READY signal "H", it performs the staple operation until the /READY signal becomes "L". However, if the /READY signal still indicates "H" after 11 repetitive staple operations, the stapler/stacker driver detects a self-priming failure, stops the loads, and notifies the formatter.
Staple level detection
The staple level is detected by the stapler/stacker driver as it monitors the Staple Presence signal
(LS) from the staple-presence sensor (PHOI3).
When the stapler/stacker driver detects an LS signal of "L", it determines that 20 staples remain and sends a warning to the formatter. If the stapler staples 20 more times using the same stapler cartridge, the stapler/stacker driver notifies the formatter that the stapler cartridge is empty.
186 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Stapler/stacker switches and sensors
PS1304
PS1306
PS1305
PS1303
PS1301
PS1302
SW1301
Figure 4-58
Switches and sensors
Table 4-6
Switches and sensors (part 1)
SW1301
PS1301
PS1302
PS1303
PS1304
PS1305
PS1306
Door-open switch
Paper-inlet sensor
Paper-delivery sensor
Delivery-roller disengaging sensor
Jogger home-position sensor
Paddle home-position sensor
Paper-delivery-full sensor
ENWW Stapler/stacker system 187
Table 4-7
Switches and sensors (part 2)
Name
Motors
Solenoids
Sensors
Switch
Purpose
Paddle motor (M1301)
Jogger motor (M1302)
Feed motor (M1303)
Stapler motor (M1304)
Clamp solenoid (SL1301)
Rotates the paddle (clockwise); disengages the delivery rollers
(counter-clockwise)
Shifts the jogger guide (clockwise: open; counterclockwise: close)
Rotates the inlet roller / delivery roller
Staple operation (rotation of staple cam)
Drives the clamp
Paper-inlet sensor (PS1301)
Paper-delivery sensor (PS1302)
Detects jams
Detects jams
Delivery-roller disengaging sensor
(PS1303)
Detects the disengagement of the delivery roller
Jogger home-position sensor (PS1304) Detects the home position of the jogger guide
Paddle home-position sensor (PS1305) Detects the paddle home position
Delivery paper-full sensor (PS1306) Detects when the delivery tray is full
Staple home-position detection sensor
(PHOI1)
Detects the home position of the staple cam
Staple-ready detection sensor (PHOI2) Detects self-priming
Staple detection sensor (PHOI3)
Door-open detection switch (SW1301)
Detects the presence of the staples
Detects if the door is open
188 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Stapler/stacker motors, solenoid, and fan
SL1301
M1302
M1303
M1301
FM1301
Figure 4-59
Motors, solenoid, fan
Table 4-8
Motors, solenoid, fan
M1301
M1302
M1303
SL1301
FM1301
Paddle motor
Jogger motor
Feed motor
Clamp solenoid
Cooling fan
ENWW Stapler/stacker system 189
Stapler/stacker PCBs
1 2
Figure 4-60
PCBs
Table 4-9
PCBs
1
2
LED PCB
Staple stacker driver PCB
190 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
1 2 3
ENWW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8 7
Figure 4-61
Cross-sectional view (part 1)
6
Table 4-10
Cross-sectional view (part 1)
Jogger guide
Paddle
Inlet roller
Cooling fan
Upper delivery roller
Lower delivery roller
Delivery tray paper-full sensor
Paper delivery tray
5 4
Stapler/stacker system 191
Stapler/Stacker driver PCB
M1302
PS1304
M1303
Jogger guide
PS1303
M1301
PS1305
Upper delivery roller
Lower delivery roller
PS1306
PS1302
Stamp
Stapler unit
Delivery tray
SL1301
Paddle
Upper delivery guide
Inlet roller
PS1301
Figure 4-62
Cross-sectional view (part 2)
Table 4-11
Cross-sectional view (part 2)
M1301
M1302
M1303
SL1301
PS1301
PS1302
PS1303
PS1304
Paddle motor
Jogger motor
Feed motor
Clamp solenoid
Paper inlet sensor
Delivery sensor
Delivery-roller disengaging sensor
Jogger home-position sensor
192 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Table 4-11
Cross-sectional view (part 2) (continued)
PS1305 Paddle home-position sensor
PS1306 Delivery-full sensor
Stapler/stacker driver PCB
The stapler/stacker driver controls the operational sequence of the stapler/stacker.
When the MFP is turned on and DC power is supplied to the stapler/stacker driver from the printer, the stapler/stacker driver communicates with the formatter to start operational control. Then the stapler/stacker enters stand-by mode and the stapler/stacker driver sends signals to drive loads, such as motors and solenoids, in response to the command submitted from the printer.
The block diagram of the circuit is shown in the following figure.
ENWW Stapler/stacker system 193
Paper delivery sensor
PS1302
PS1301
Paper inlet sensor
Delivery roller disengaging sensor
Jogger home position sensor
Paddle home position sensor
PS1303
PS1304
PS1305
PS1306
Delivery paper full sensor
Door switch
SW1301
User LED LED
Stapler/Stacker driver PCB
CPU
IC1304
Motor driver
IC1302
Motor driver
IC1303
Motor driver
IC1309
Reset IC
IC1305
Printer
DC controller
Formatter
+24VA
CAN driver
IC1308
Regulator
IC1310
+24VA
+5V
Figure 4-63
Stapler/stacker driver PCB
M1301
Paddle motor
M1302
Jogger motor
M1303
Feed motor
Cooling fan
FM1301
SL1301
Clamp solenoid
Staple unit
M1304
Stapler motor
PHOI1
Stapler homeposition detection sensor
PHOI2
Staple ready detection sensor
PHOI3
Staple detection sensor
External device
194 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Stapler/stacker driver list of signals
Table 4-12
Stapler/stacker driver list of signals
Connector
J1301
J1302
PIN
1
2
3
4
8
9
10
11
5
6
7
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
Abbreviation
/SP-UP
+24V
GND
GND
ULED-G
ULED-O
GND
NC
+24V
+24V
POWERON
GND
GND
CAN-L
CAN-H
+5V
GND
JOG-HP
I/O
O
O
I
I
I
O
I
I
I
I
I
J1303
J1304
J1305
J1306 1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
3
1
2
1
2
+5V
GND
IN-SNS
+24V
+24U
FD-AD
FD-AND
FD-BD
FD-BND
GND
PWRON-OUT
CAN-L-OUT
CAN-H-OUT
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
I
O
O
Logic
H
H
H
A
H
L
A
A
H
H
L
H
P
P
P
P
L
A
A
A
Signal name
+24V supply
+24V supply
POWER ON signal
CAN RECEIVE signal
CAN RECEIVE signal
SPEED UP signal
+24V supply
USER LED DRIVE signal (Green)
USER LED DRIVE signal (Orange)
+5V supply
JOGGER HOME POSITION DETECTION signal
+5V supply
INLET PAPER DETECTION signal
+24V supply
+24V supply
FEED MOTOR DRIVE signal
FEED MOTOR DRIVE signal
FEED MOTOR DRIVE signal
FEED MOTOR DRIVE signal
POWER ON OUTPUT signal
CAN SEND signal
CAN SEND signal
ENWW Stapler/stacker system 195
J1310
J1311
J1312
4
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
2
2
1
6
7
8
9
3
4
5
Table 4-12
Stapler/stacker driver list of signals (continued)
Connector PIN Abbreviation I/O Logic
J1307
J1308
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
2
3
11
1
GND
FLASH-OUT
FLASH-MD0
FLASH-CLK
FLASH-MD2
FLASH-IN
FLASH-ACT0
+5V
RCT
GND
FLASH-ACT1
+5V
GND
SWNG-HP
I
I
O
I
O
O
I
O
I
I
O
A
H
H
L
H
L
L
H
L
A
J1309
/READY
LS
GND
MTR-
MTR-
MTR+
MTR+
FAMDRV
/FANLOCk
GND
+24U
STMP-SL
JOG-BND
JOG-BD
JOG-AND
JOG-BD
+5V
/HP
O
I
O
O
O
O
I
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
I
P
A
L
P
P
A
A
L
H
P
H
H
H
H
L
H
Signal name
FLASH ROM RECORD signal
OPERATION MODE SPECIFYING signal
FLASH ROM RECORD signal
OPERATION MODE SPECIFYING signal
FLASH ROM RECORD signal
FLASH ROM RECORD signal
+5V supply
RESET signal
FLASH ROM RECORD signal
+5V supply
DELIVERY ROLLER DISENGAGING
DETECTION signal
FAN MOTOR DRIVE signal
FAN LOCK DETECTION signal
+24V supply
CLAMP DRIVE signal
JOGGER MOTOR DRIVE signal
JOGGER MOTOR DRIVE signal
JOGGER MOTOR DRIVE signal
JOGGER MOTOR DRIVE signal
+5V supply
STAPLE HOME POSITION DETECTION signal
STAPLER READY signal
STAPLE DECELERATION signal
STAPLER MOTOR DRIVE signal
STAPLER MOTOR DRIVE signal
STAPLER MOTOR DRIVE signal
STAPLER MOTOR DRIVE signal
196 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Table 4-12
Stapler/stacker driver list of signals (continued)
Connector PIN Abbreviation I/O Logic
J1313 1
2
3
+5V
GND
PDL-HP I
O A
H
J1314
6
1
2
4
5
3
4
5
+5V
GND
FULL
NC
PDL-BND
PDL-BD
PDL-AND
PDL-AD
I
O
O
O
O
O
H
P
A
P
P
P
Signal name
+5V supply
PADDLE HOME POSITION DETECTION signal
+5V supply
DELIVERY TRAY PAPER FULL signal
PADDLE MOTOR DRIVE signal
PADDLE MOTOR DRIVE signal
PADDLE MOTOR DRIVE signal
PADDLE MOTOR DRIVE signal
ENWW Stapler/stacker system 197
Scanner system
The scanner system adds copying and sending functions to the standard MFP printing function. The scanner assembly consists of an automatic document feeder (ADF) and a flatbed scanner glass surface.
Original documents that are fed through the ADF are delivered to the ADF output bin, which is underneath the ADF input tray. Printed copies are delivered to the output device that is attached to the print engine.
The scanner unit has built-in duplexing capability for scanning two-sided documents.
NOTE
The MFP delivers two-sided printed copies of original documents only when a duplex printing unit is installed in the print engine. If a duplex printing unit is
not
installed, the copies are printed on one side of the page. If a duplex printing unit is installed, the printed copies can be either one-sided or two-sided, depending on the instructions from the user.
Figure 4-64 ADF mechanical structure on page 198
shows a cross-section of the ADF.
Figure 4-64
ADF mechanical structure
Electrical system
The scanner assembly electrical system consists of the following components:
●
The charged-coupled device (CCD) PCA
●
The inverter PCA
●
The scanner PCA
●
The ADF PCA
●
The ADF LED PCA
The scanner assembly is connected to the print-engine formatter through a flat, flexible cable.
Figure 4-65 Scanner assembly electrical structure on page 199
shows the scanner assembly electrical structure.
198 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
Figure 4-65
Scanner assembly electrical structure
Scanner system 199
Motors and fans
The scanner assembly has five motors and two fans. Three of the motors are stepping motors, which drive the components inside the scanner assembly. The remaining two motors are DC motors, which drive the two fans.
Name
Carriage motor
Feed motor
Read motor
Flatbed fan
ADF fan
Purpose Type
Drives the carriage unit Stepping motor
Drives the pickup, separation, and registration rollers
Stepping motor
Stepping motor Drives the feed and delivery rollers
Cools the scanner lamp and the CCD
Cools the motors
DC motor
DC motor
Rotation
Varies
Varies
Counterclockwise
Clockwise
Clockwise
Failure detection
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Optical assembly
The optical assembly contains the scan carriage and the scanner glass. The scan carriage contains the lamp, five mirrors, a lens, and the CCD.
Figure 4-66
Scan carriage components
The scanner lamp illuminates a small strip of the document (called the raster line). The mirrors direct the light through the lens to the CCD. The CCD senses and records the light, creating an analog representation of the raster line. If the ADF is being used, the document then advances in the ADF to the next raster line. If the flatbed is being used, the carriage advances to the next raster line. This advancing and collection process continues to the end of the sheet.
The image data is collected on the scanner controller PCA, where it is processed and sent to the formatter.
200 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
Figure 4-67
Scan carriage movement
Scanner system 201
ADF feed system
Pages from the original document enter the ADF from the ADF input tray. A separation roller and separation pad work together to separate the top sheet from the stack. The page passes through a set of registration rollers and two sets of feed rollers that advance the page. A set of delivery rollers delivers the page to the ADF output bin. A bin-full sensor detects when the ADF output bin is full, and stops the feed mechanism until the bin is emptied.
Figure 4-68
ADF paper path and sensors
Jam detection
When the sensors inside the ADF detect a jam, the feed and read motors immediately stop and send a signal to the scanner controller PCA, which notifies the formatter. An
ADF Paper Jam
message appears on the control-panel display.
To clear a jam, open the jam-access cover and remove the media. When no sensors detect media after entering the jam state, the jam message is cleared from the control-panel display.
Residual-media jam
During the initialization sequence or after the ADF jam cover has been opened and closed, if the registration sensor, read sensor, or exit sensor detects the presence of media, the scanner controller
PCA determines that a residual-media jam has occurred.
202 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
ADF pickup jam
If the leading edge of the media did not reach the registration sensor within a specific period of time, the scanner controller PCA determines that an ADF pickup jam has occurred.
ADF jam
Jams can occur in three places inside the ADF: at the registration senor, read sensor, and exit sensor.
Registration sensor jam
If the registration sensor does not detect the trailing edge of the media after the leading edge reaches the scan-ready position, the scanner-controller PCA determines that an ADF paper jam has occurred.
Also, when the scanner duplexer is being used, if the registration sensor does not detect the leading edge of the media after a specific period of time after media enters the duplexer, the scannercontroller PCA determines that a jam has occurred.
Read sensor jam
If the read sensor does not detect the leading edge of the media within a specific period of time, or if the read sensor does not detect the trailing edge of the media within a specific period of time after it detects the leading edge, the scanner-controller PCA determines that a jam has occurred.
Exit sensor jam
If the exit sensor does not detect the leading edge of the media within a specific period of time after the leading edge reaches the read sensor, or if the exit sensor does not detect the trailing edge of the media within a specific period of time after the read sensor detects the trailing edge, the scannercontroller PCA determines that a jam has occurred.
ADF cover open jam
If the ADF jam-access cover is opened while media is feeding through the ADF, a jam occurs.
ADF open jam
If the ADF is opened while media is feeding through the ADF, a jam occurs.
ENWW Scanner system 203
Locations of major components
The photos in this section identify the locations of many major components in the MFP.
Sensors and switches
Cassette sensors
Figure 4-69
Cassette sensors
1
2
3
SW102, paper-size switches
PS101, tray 2 paper-present sensor
PS107, tray 2 paper-stack-surface sensor
204 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Sensors in the print-cartridge area
Figure 4-70
Sensors in the print-cartridge area
1
2
PS103, top-of-page sensor
PS106 and PS112, paper-width sensors
Sensors on the reversing unit (top side)
ENWW
Figure 4-71
Sensors on the reversing unit (top side)
1 PS111, reversing-unit-jam sensor
Locations of major components 205
2
3
4
Connectors J140 and J1402
PS110, reversing paper sensor
PS109, paper-delivery sensor
Sensors in the interior of the MFP
Figure 4-72
Sensors in the interior of the MFP
1
2 connector leading to SW103, output-bin detection switch
PS104, output-bin-full sensor
206 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Output-bin detection switch, SW103
Figure 4-73
Output-bin detection switch, SW103
Tray 1 paper-present sensor, PS105
ENWW
Figure 4-74
Tray 1 paper-present sensor, PS105
Locations of major components 207
Top-cover switch, SW101
Figure 4-75
Top-cover switch, SW101
Tray 2 jam-access-cover switch, SW105
Figure 4-76
Tray 2 jam-access-cover switch, SW105
Motors, fans, solenoids, and clutch
The photos in this section show the locations of the motors, fans, solenoids, and clutches that are in the MFP print engine.
208 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Front-side fans
Figure 4-77
Front-side fans
1
2
3
FN103, reversing-unit fan
TH3, ambient-air-detection thermistor (on the rear of this metal bracket)
FN101, main fan
ENWW Locations of major components 209
Rear-side fans
Figure 4-78
Rear-side fans
1
2
FN102, print-cartridge fan
FN104, DC controller fan
Rear-side motors (1 of 2)
Figure 4-79
Rear-side motors (1 of 2)
1 FN102, print-cartridge fan
210 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
2
3
4
M102, drum motor
M101, main motor
DC controller PCA
Rear-side motors (2 of 2)
Figure 4-80
Rear-side motors (2 of 2)
1 M103, lifter motor
ENWW Locations of major components 211
Rear-side solenoid
Figure 4-81
Rear-side solenoid
1 SL101, tray 2 pickup solenoid
212 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Reversing-unit motors and solenoids
ENWW
Figure 4-82
Reversing-unit motors and solenoids
4
5
6
1
2
3
M104, crossing motor
M105, reversing roller
Reversing-intermediate PCA
SL106, reversing-roller alienation solenoid (under the shield)
SL105, face-up solenoid
M106, delivery motor
Locations of major components 213
Right, rear corner components (1 of 2)
Figure 4-83
Right, rear corner components (1 of 2)
1
2
3
SW101, top-cover switch
Envelope-feeder connector
SL102, tray 1 pickup solenoid (behind the cover)
214 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
Right, rear corner components (2 of 2)
Figure 4-84
Right, rear corner components (2 of 2)
1 CL101, feed-roller clutch
Scanner and ADF components
The photos in this section show the locations of the scanner and ADF components.
ADF output-bin-full sensor
ENWW
Figure 4-85
ADF output-bin-full sensor
Locations of major components 215
ADF pickup assembly sensors
Figure 4-86
ADF pickup assembly sensors
1
2
ADF paper-present sensor
ADF top-of-page sensor
ADF motors, solenoid, and sensors
Figure 4-87
ADF motors, solenoid, and sensors
1 ADF fan
216 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
4
5
6
2
3
Scanner-controller PCA
ADF LED PCA
ADF solenoid
ADF feed motor
ADF read motor
ENWW Locations of major components 217
218 Chapter 4 Theory of operation ENWW
5 Removal and replacement
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
●
●
Removal and replacement strategy
●
●
Covers, doors, and external panels
●
●
●
●
●
●
ENWW 219
Service approach
MFP repair normally begins by using the MFP internal diagnostics and the following three-step process.
1.
Isolate the problem to the major system (for example, the host computer, the network or server, or the MFP system).
2.
Determine if the problem is located in the accessories, the scanner assembly, or the MFP engine.
3.
Troubleshoot the problem by using the procedures in chapter 7.
After a faulty part is located, the MFP can usually be repaired at the assembly level by replacing field replaceable units (FRUs). Some mechanical assemblies might need to be repaired at the subassembly level. Hewlett-Packard does not support replacement of components on the printed circuit assembles.
220 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Removal and replacement strategy
This chapter describes how to remove, replace, and reassemble the major assemblies of the MFP.
Replacement is generally the reverse of removal. Notes are provided to assist with any difficult replacement procedures.
To identify the left side and right side of the MFP, face the control panel.
WARNING!
Unplug the power cord from the power outlet at the wall receptacle before attempting to service the MFP. If you do not follow this warning, severe injury can result.
Certain functional checks during troubleshooting might require power to the MFP. However, all power should be turned off and the MFP should be unplugged when you remove any MFP assemblies or components.
Never operate or service the MFP when the protective cover is removed from the laser/ scanner assembly. The reflected beams, although invisible, can damage your eyes.
CAUTION
The MFP contains components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation. If an ESD-protected workstation is not available, discharge body static by grasping the MFP chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive component. Ground the MFP chassis before servicing the MFP.
Required tools
●
#2 Phillips screwdriver
●
Short #2 Phillips screwdriver (shaft length of 76 mm [3 inches])
●
Right-angle #2 Phillips screwdriver
●
Small flat-blade screwdriver
●
Needle-nose pliers
●
ESD mat (if available; see the preceding ESD caution)
●
Penlight (optional)
●
Tape (optional)
CAUTION
A pozidriv screwdriver can damage screw heads on the MFP. Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver.
Before performing service
●
If possible, print a menu map and Configuration page.
●
Remove all of the accessories and print media, the print cartridge, and tray 2 from the MFP.
●
Unplug the power cord from the power outlet at the wall receptacle.
●
Place the MFP on an ESD mat, if one is available. If an ESD-protected workstation is not available, discharge body static by grasping the MFP chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive component. Ground the MFP chassis before servicing the MFP.
ENWW Removal and replacement strategy 221
After completing service
●
Reinstall the print cartridge.
CAUTION
Do not transport the MFP while the print cartridge is installed.
●
Reconnect all cables to the MFP.
●
Replace all of the accessories and load the media.
●
Print a Configuration page and verify that the latest firmware is installed on the MFP.
Screws that are used in the MFP
The following table describes the screws that are used in the MFP and provides guidelines to help determine where each type of screw is used. The screws can vary in length depending on the thickness of the material that is being fastened. Always note where each type of screw is located and replace each one in its original location.
NOTE
When you are disassembling the MFP, place the screws into the chassis holes from which they were removed. This prevents their loss and ensures that the correct type and length of screw for each location is used when the MFP is reassembled.
222 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Table 5-1
Common fasteners used in this MFP
Drawing and description Purpose
This screw is used to fasten metal to metal when good electrical contact is needed. This screw also provides high resistance to loosening.
Phillips-head machine screw with captive star washer
Phillips-head screw with self-tapping threads
This screw is used to fasten sheet metal or plastic to plastic frames. The deep, coarsely spaced threads provide an increased holding capability while decreasing the possibility of stripping the target hole.
NOTE
To install a self-tapping screw, first turn it counterclockwise to align it with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn it clockwise to tighten it. You will feel resistance and hear the screw click when it engages the existing threads in the hole. Do not overtighten the screw. If a self-tapping screw-hole becomes stripped, repair the screwhole or replace the affected assembly.
This screw is used to fasten sheet metal parts to the sheet metal chassis. It spans large clearance holes and distributes the load by increasing the bearing surface.
Phillips washer-head machine screw with a broad, flat washer attached to the screw head
Screw measurement guide
ENWW Removal and replacement strategy 223
User-replaceable parts
The procedures in this section describe the removal and replacement of the following userreplaceable parts:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
ADF delivery guide (clear mylar sheet)
●
●
●
●
●
Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 pickup and feed rollers
●
●
Scanner filter cover and scanner filter
●
●
●
●
●
Print cartridge
1.
Open the top cover.
2.
Grasp the print cartridge, and remove it from the MFP.
Control-panel overlays
Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the two control-panel overlays (callout 1).
224 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 5-1
Remove the control-panel overlays
Control panel
1.
Pull the top of the control panel away from the MFP to release the upper locking tabs.
ENWW
Figure 5-2
Remove the control panel (1 of 2)
2.
Rotate the top of the control panel away from the MFP.
User-replaceable parts 225
3.
Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and remove the control panel.
Figure 5-3
Remove the control panel (2 of 2)
Transfer roller
1.
Remove the print cartridge.
CAUTION
Do not touch the black rubber on the transfer roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause print-quality problems. Use disposable gloves when you remove the transfer roller.
226 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
2.
Use a flat-blade screwdriver to lift the left end of the metal shaft out of place (near the blue gear). Slide the transfer roller to the left to remove it.
NOTE
When you install the transfer roller, make sure that the black collar on the left side is oriented correctly, with the open end face-down (the solid end is face-up).
Figure 5-4
Remove the transfer roller
ADF input tray
1.
Open the ADF top cover.
ENWW
Figure 5-5
Remove the ADF input tray (1 of 3)
User-replaceable parts 227
2.
Flex the pivot pin (near the control panel) away from the mounting hole in the ADF chassis.
Figure 5-6
Remove the ADF input tray (2 of 3)
3.
Remove the ADF input tray.
Figure 5-7
Remove the ADF input tray (3 of 3)
ADF pickup and feed rollers
1.
Open the ADF top cover.
228 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
2.
Push down on the locking tab (callout 1), and rotate the top of the assembly away from the ADF.
Figure 5-8
Remove the ADF pickup and feed rollers (1 of 2)
3.
Release the front (gear end) of the roller-assembly drive-shaft, and slide the assembly toward the front of the MFP to remove it.
Figure 5-9
Remove the ADF pickup and feed rollers (2 of 2)
ADF separation pad
1.
Open the ADF top cover
ENWW User-replaceable parts 229
2.
Raise the separation-pad-frame assembly, and push the bottom edge of the separation pad away from the frame.
Figure 5-10
Remove the ADF separation pad (1 of 2)
3.
Remove the ADF separation-pad assembly.
Figure 5-11
Remove the ADF separation pad (2 of 2)
230 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
ADF delivery guide (clear mylar sheet)
1.
Open the ADF/scanner assembly and release the two tabs at the top and bottom of the ADF delivery-guide cover.
Figure 5-12
Remove the ADF delivery guide (1 of 3)
2.
Carefully unhook the clear mylar sheet from the four tabs on the ADF delivery-guide cover
(callout 2), and then remove the mylar sheet.
1
ENWW
Figure 5-13
Remove the ADF delivery guide (2 of 3)
User-replaceable parts 231
3.
If necessary, pull the ADF delivery-guide-cover hinges off the hinge pins (callout 2) to remove the cover.
Figure 5-14
Remove the ADF delivery guide (3 of 3)
4.
Reinstallation tip:
The clear mylar sheet is keyed with a small notch at the top. Be sure to align the notch with the round pin that is on the holder.
Figure 5-15
Reinstall the clear mylar sheet
232 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Output-bin assembly
1.
Slide the output-bin assembly away from the MFP.
Figure 5-16
Remove the output-bin assembly (1 of 2)
2.
Lift up slightly on the output-bin assembly to disengage the slide rails, and then remove the assembly.
ENWW
Figure 5-17
Remove the output-bin assembly (2 of 2)
User-replaceable parts 233
Duplex-printing unit
1.
Slide the duplex-printing unit away from the MFP.
Figure 5-18
Remove the duplex-printing unit (1 of 2)
2.
Slightly lift up on the duplex-printing unit to disengage the slide rails, and then remove it.
Figure 5-19
Remove the duplex-printing unit (2 of 2)
234 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Fuser-entrance guide
1.
Remove the following assemblies.
●
Output bin.
●
Duplexer.
2.
Flex the rear hinge-pin of the fuser-entrance guide until it clears the mounting hole in the MFP chassis.
3.
Rotate the rear of the guide away of the MFP and slide the guide to the left to release the front hinge-pin. Remove the fuser-entrance guide.
Figure 5-20
Remove the fuser-entrance guide
Fuser
CAUTION
The fuser is very hot. After turning the MFP power off, allow the fuser to cool for at least 30 minutes before removing it.
1.
Remove the following assemblies.
●
Output bin.
●
Duplex-printing unit.
●
Fuser-entrance guide.
ENWW User-replaceable parts 235
2.
Squeeze the two blue tabs on the fuser to release it, and then slide it out of the MFP.
Figure 5-21
Remove the fuser
Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 pickup and feed rollers
1.
Remove the cassette from the tray.
2.
Pinch the roller latch (callout 1) to release the roller, and then slide the roller off of the shaft.
Figure 5-22
Remove the tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 pickup and feed rollers (1 of 2)
236 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Open the jam-access door. Pinch the roller latch to release the roller, and then slide the roller off of the shaft.
Figure 5-23
Remove the tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 pickup and feed rollers (2 of 2)
Tray 1 pickup roller
1.
Open tray 1.
NOTE
If the optional envelope-feeder accessory is installed, remove it.
2.
Release the two locking tabs on the pickup-roller frame and remove the tray 1 pickup roller.
ENWW
Figure 5-24
Remove the tray 1 pickup roller
User-replaceable parts 237
Scanner filter cover and scanner filter
1.
Remove the scanner-filter cover.
Figure 5-25
Remove the scanner filter (1 of 2)
2.
Remove the filter.
Figure 5-26
Remove the scanner filter (2 of 2)
238 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
ADF-hinge flap
1.
Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the locking tabs on one side of the ADF-hinge flap.
Figure 5-27
Remove the ADF-hinge flap (1 of 3)
2.
Repeat step one for the other side of the ADF-hinge flap.
ENWW
Figure 5-28
Remove the ADF-hinge flap (2 of 3)
User-replaceable parts 239
3.
Pull the ADF-hinge flap away from the MFP to remove it.
Figure 5-29
Remove the ADF-hinge flap (3 of 3)
NOTE
To position the ADF-hinge flap correctly when reinstalling it, insert the locator pins that are in the middle of the plastic mounting-bracket into the first row of slots above the ADF hinge.
Formatter cover and formatter
1.
Slide the formatter cover toward the left side of the MFP and remove it.
Figure 5-30
Remove the formatter cover and formatter (1 of 3)
240 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
2.
Remove two thumb screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-31
Remove the formatter cover and formatter (2 of 3)
3.
Slide the formatter toward the left side of the MFP, and then remove it.
ENWW
Figure 5-32
Remove the formatter cover and formatter (3 of 3)
NOTE
Dislodging the formatter might require considerable force.
User-replaceable parts 241
Hard drive
WARNING!
The MFP contains components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation. If an ESD-protected workstation is not available, discharge body static by grasping the MFP chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive component. Ground the MFP chassis before servicing the MFP.
1.
Remove the formatter cover, and open the formatter-cage door.
2.
Disconnect the power cable (5–wire, callout 1) from the hard drive.
3.
Disconnect the data cable (2–wire, callout 2) from the hard drive.
Figure 5-33
Remove the hard drive (1 of 2)
242 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
4.
Squeeze the locking tab that is in the center of the left side of the hard drive. Push up on the hard drive to remove it.
Figure 5-34
Remove the hard drive (2 of 2)
DIMM
WARNING!
The MFP contains components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation. If an ESD-protected workstation is not available, discharge body static by grasping the MFP chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive component. Ground the MFP chassis before servicing the MFP.
NOTE
If possible, print a menu map and a Configuration page. Use the information on the these pages to restore any user-set MFP configuration options after you install the replacement DIMM.
1.
Remove the formatter cover, and open the formatter cage door.
ENWW User-replaceable parts 243
2.
Push the DIMM locking arms away from the DIMM to release it. Remove the DIMM
Figure 5-35
Remove the DIMM
Fax accessory
WARNING!
The MFP contains components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation. If an ESD-protected workstation is not available, discharge body static by grasping the MFP chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive component. Ground the MFP chassis before servicing the MFP.
1.
Remove the formatter cover, and open the formatter-cage door.
244 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
2.
Grasp the fax-accessory card, and then pull it out of the formatter cage.
Figure 5-36
Remove the fax accessory
ENWW User-replaceable parts 245
Covers, doors, and external panels
The procedures in this section describe the removal and replacement of the following components:
●
●
●
Top-cover flatbed flange
1.
Grasp one end of the flange and push up on it to release the flange locking pins.
Figure 5-37
Remove the top-cover flatbed flange (1 of 2)
246 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
2.
Repeat step 1 for the other end of the flange, and then remove the flange.
Figure 5-38
Remove the top-cover flatbed flange (2 of 2)
Front cover
1.
Remove the following assemblies.
●
Control panel.
●
Top-cover flatbed flange.
ENWW Covers, doors, and external panels 247
2.
Remove two screws (callout 1).
NOTE
Both screws are behind the control-panel frame.
Figure 5-39
Remove the front cover (1 of 7)
3.
Open the top cover, and remove one screw (callout 2).
Figure 5-40
Remove the front cover (2 of 7)
CAUTION
Do not remove the screw near the feed assembly.
248 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
4.
Remove the tray 2 cassette, and then remove two screws (callout 3).
Figure 5-41
Remove the front cover (3 of 7)
5.
Slide the output bin away from the MFP, and release the front-cover retaining tab on the left side.
ENWW
Figure 5-42
Remove the front cover (4 of 7)
Covers, doors, and external panels 249
6.
Release the two locking tabs on the right side.
Figure 5-43
Remove the front cover (5 of 7)
7.
Flex the bottom of the cover away from the MFP to release the locking tab at the mid-bottom, and then push up on the cover to raise it slightly.
Figure 5-44
Remove the front cover (6 of 7)
250 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
8.
Pull the front cover away from the MFP and then up to remove it.
Figure 5-45
Remove the front cover (7 of 7)
Back cover
1.
Remove the formatter.
2.
Remove one screw (callout 1)
ENWW
Figure 5-46
Remove the back cover (1 of 3)
Covers, doors, and external panels 251
3.
Release three locking tabs along the top of the back cover.
Figure 5-47
Remove the back cover (2 of 3)
4.
Release three locking tabs along the side of the back cover. (The bottom tab is behind the hinge for the tray 2 jam-access cover.) Rotate the top of the back cover away from the MFP, and then lift it up and off of the MFP.
Figure 5-48
Remove the back cover (3 of 3)
252 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Internal assemblies
The procedures in this section describe the removal and replacement of the following components:
●
Reversing-separation-guide assembly
●
●
Main fan (FN101) and reversing-unit fan (FN103)
●
●
Tray 2 jam-access-cover switch (SW105)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Power-factor-correction (PFC) power supply
●
●
●
●
Paper-size-detection switch (SW102)
●
Tray 2 paper-present sensor (PS101)
●
●
Reversing-separation-guide assembly
1.
Open the top cover.
ENWW Internal assemblies 253
2.
Flex the front tab to release one side of the reversing-separation-guide assembly.
Figure 5-49
Remove the reversing-separation-guide assembly (1 of 2)
3.
Lower the released side, and then pull the rear pivot-pin out of the metal bracket.
Figure 5-50
Remove the reversing-separation-guide assembly (2 of 2)
NOTE
When it is installed, the reversing-separation-guide assembly normally fits loosely.
Reversing assembly
1.
Remove the reversing-separation-guide assembly.
254 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
2.
Remove three screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-51
Remove the reversing assembly (1 of 8)
3.
Unlock the tab on the right-reverse-assembly-drive cover, and remove the cover.
ENWW
Figure 5-52
Remove the reversing assembly (2 of 8)
CAUTION
The spring that is under the right-reversing-assembly lever is not captive. Do not lose the spring that is under the lever when you remove the cover. Make sure you seat the spring correctly on the chassis pedestal when you reinstall the cover.
Internal assemblies 255
4.
Unlock the two tabs (callout 2) on the left-reverse-assembly-drive cover, and remove the cover.
Figure 5-53
Remove the reversing assembly (3 of 8)
NOTE
When reinstalling the cover, make sure that the metal tab on the sheet-metal chassis (near the rear door-piston) is in the slot in the cover (callout 3).
Figure 5-54
Remove the reversing assembly (4 of 8)
256 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
5.
Push up on the swing-arm-locking tab, and release the bottom of the swing arm. Repeat for the remaining swing arm (near the front of the MFP).
Figure 5-55
Remove the reversing assembly (5 of 8)
6.
Rotate the swing arm up to release the swing-arm pivot. Repeat for the remaining swing arm
(near the front of the MFP).
ENWW
Figure 5-56
Remove the reversing assembly (6 of 8)
Internal assemblies 257
7.
Disconnect two connectors (callout 4).
Figure 5-57
Remove the reversing assembly (7 of 8)
8.
Lift out the reversing assembly.
Figure 5-58
Remove the reversing assembly (8 of 8)
NOTE
When you reinstall the reversing assembly, make sure that the swing-arm locking tabs are fully seated into the sheet-metal mounting slots.
Main fan (FN101) and reversing-unit fan (FN103)
1.
Remove the front cover.
258 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
2.
Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the fan duct.
Figure 5-59
Remove the main fan and reversing-unit fan (1 of 9)
3.
Main fan
: Remove one screw (callout 2), unhook the thermistor, and then move the thermistor to the side.
ENWW
Figure 5-60
Remove the main fan and reversing-unit fan (2 of 9)
Internal assemblies 259
4.
Remove two screws (callout 3), and remove the power-supply shield.
3
Figure 5-61
Remove the main and reversing-unit fans (3 of 9)
5.
Unclip the two main-fan locking tabs (callout 4), and then remove the main fan.
Figure 5-62
Remove the main and reversing-unit fans (4 of 9)
260 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
6.
Disconnect one connector (callout 5), and then remove the main fan.
Figure 5-63
Remove the main and reversing-unit fans (5 of 9)
7.
Reversing-unit fan
: Disconnect one connector (callout 6).
ENWW
Figure 5-64
Remove the main and reversing-unit fans (6 of 9)
Internal assemblies 261
8.
Remove three screws (callout 7), unplug the control-panel connector (callout 8), and then remove the control-panel-cable guide.
8
7
Figure 5-65
Remove the main and reversing-unit fans (7 of 9)
9.
Release the locking tab, slide the fan assembly to the right, and then remove the bracket that holds the reversing-unit fan.
Figure 5-66
Remove the main and reversing-unit fans (8 of 9)
262 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
10.
Release the three locking tabs on the fan bracket, and then remove the fan from the bracket.
Figure 5-67
Remove the main and reversing-unit fans (9 of 9)
Thermistor (TH3)
1.
Remove the front cover.
2.
Remove one screw (callout 1), unhook the thermistor, and then move the thermistor to the side.
ENWW
Figure 5-68
Remove the thermistor (1 of 4)
Internal assemblies 263
3.
Remove two screws (callout 2), and remove the power-supply shield. Disconnect the thermistor from the power supply, and remove it.
3
Figure 5-69
Remove the thermistor (2 of 4)
4.
Disconnect two locking tabs (one at each end of the thermistor assembly), and remove the plastic thermistor-bracket from the sheet-metal holder. Thread the thermistor wire-harness out of the plastic bracket.
Figure 5-70
Remove the thermistor (3 of 4)
264 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
5.
When installing the replacement thermistor, make sure that the thermistor body is fully inserted into the plastic bracket.
Figure 5-71
Remove the thermistor (4 of 4)
Tray 2 jam-access-cover switch (SW105)
1.
Remove the front cover.
2.
Open the jam-access door, and then remove two screws (callout 1) and the jam-access-doorswitch cover.
ENWW
Figure 5-72
Remove the jam-access-cover switch (1 of 3)
Internal assemblies 265
3.
Remove one screw (callout 2), and then remove the switch frame (callout 3).
Figure 5-73
Remove the jam-access-cover switch (2 of 3)
4.
Disconnect the jam-access-cover-switch connector (callout 4) and remove the switch.
Figure 5-74
Remove the jam-access-cover switch (3 of 3)
266 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Tray 1 assembly
1.
Open tray 1, and then flex the two door-pin guides to release the two door pins. Separate the tray 1 door from the paper-guide assembly.
Figure 5-75
Remove the tray 1 assembly (1 of 5)
2.
Slide the door toward the rear of the MFP to remove it.
ENWW
Figure 5-76
Remove the tray 1 assembly (2 of 5)
Internal assemblies 267
3.
Unclip the sensor-flag holder from the pickup-roller shaft.
Figure 5-77
Remove the tray 1 assembly (3 of 5)
4.
Rotate the paper guide down, and disengage the front hinge from the pin that is on the feed assembly.
Figure 5-78
Remove the tray 1 assembly (4 of 5)
268 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
5.
The spring on the rear hinge is not captive and can easily be lost. Take note of how this spring is installed before removing the tray assembly.
Figure 5-79
Correct tray 1 rear-hinge-spring placement
6.
Move the paper-guide slightly toward the front of the MFP to disengage the paper-guide rearhinge. Remove the paper guide.
Figure 5-80
Remove the tray 1 assembly (5 of 5)
Front-cover support
1.
Remove the tray 1 assembly.
2.
Open the jam-access door.
ENWW Internal assemblies 269
3.
Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the front cover support locking tab.
Figure 5-81
Remove the front-cover support (1 of 2)
4.
Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the rear cover-support locking tab. Remove the front-cover support.
Figure 5-82
Remove the front-cover support (2 of 2)
270 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Tray 1 feed-assembly
1.
Remove the following assemblies:
●
Formatter.
●
Front cover.
●
Back cover.
●
Tray 1 assembly.
2.
Release the retainer from shaft on the jam-access-door hinge.
Figure 5-83
Remove the tray 1 feed-assembly (1 of 13)
ENWW Internal assemblies 271
3.
Remove the shaft from the jam-access-door hinge.
Figure 5-84
Remove the tray 1 feed-assembly (2 of 13)
4.
Slide the door and retainer arm toward the front of the MFP until the arm clears the slot in the chassis.
Figure 5-85
Remove the tray 1 feed-assembly (3 of 13)
272 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
5.
Remove six screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-86
Remove the tray 1 feed-assembly (4 of 13)
NOTE
When you reinstall the feed-assembly cover, place the three long screws into the lower holes that are along the left side of the cover.
6.
Release the locking tab, and then remove the feed-assembly cover from the MFP.
ENWW
Figure 5-87
Remove the tray 1 feed-assembly (5 of 13)
Internal assemblies 273
7.
Remove six screws (callout 2) from the front of the tray 1 feed-assembly.
Figure 5-88
Remove the tray 1 feed-assembly (6 of 13)
8.
Remove one grounding screw (callout 3) from the front of the MFP.
Figure 5-89
Remove the tray 1 feed-assembly (7 of 13)
274 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
9.
Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release one locking tab. Grasp the middle of the rear-top cover, and slide it toward the tray 1 feed-assembly to remove it.
Figure 5-90
Remove the tray 1 feed-assembly (8 of 13)
10.
Remove two screws (callout 4), and remove the fan shroud.
ENWW
Figure 5-91
Remove the tray 1 feed-assembly (9 of 13)
Internal assemblies 275
11.
Remove eight screws (callout 5), and then rotate the rear sheet-metal shield away from the MFP.
Figure 5-92
Remove the tray 1 feed-assembly (10 of 13)
12.
Disconnect one connector (callout 6; J66) from the DC controller, and remove the sheet-metal shield.
Figure 5-93
Remove the tray 1 feed-assembly (11 of 13)
276 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
13.
Disconnect one connector (callout 7; J79) from the DC controller, and unwind the wire harness from the MFP.
Figure 5-94
Remove the tray 1 feed-assembly (12 of 13)
14.
Disconnect one connector (callout 8) from the tray 1 feed-assembly. Remove the tray 1 feedassembly.
8
ENWW
Figure 5-95
Remove the tray 1 feed-assembly (13 of 13)
NOTE
The grounding spring that is on the DC-controller side of the feed assembly is not captive and can be easily lost. When you reinstall the feed assembly, make sure that the grounding spring is correctly seated against the sheet-metal chassis.
Internal assemblies 277
Feed-roller assembly
1.
Remove the tray 1 feed-assembly.
2.
Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the inner front cover.
Figure 5-96
Remove the feed-roller assembly (1 of 4)
3.
Remove one grounding screw (callout 2) on the front of the MFP.
Figure 5-97
Remove the feed-roller assembly (2 of 4)
278 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
4.
Remove two screws (callout 3).
Figure 5-98
Remove the feed-roller assembly (3 of 4)
5.
Disconnect one connector (callout 4; J89) and unwind the wire harness from the MFP. Remove the feed-roller assembly.
ENWW
Figure 5-99
Remove the feed-roller assembly (4 of 4)
Internal assemblies 279
6.
Reinstallation tip:
When the feed-roller assembly is installed, the sensor-flag spring must be correctly positioned in order for the flag to operate. If a paper-jam error message
13.20.00 JAM
appears on the control-panel display after you replace the feed-roller assembly, verify that this sensor-flag spring is installed correctly.
Hook the spring over the flag tab (see callout 1 in
Figure 5-100 Sensor-flag spring placement on page 280
). Fasten the feed-roller assembly to the chassis and insert the flag into the hole in the plastic frame. Release the spring from the tab on the flag. Verify that the flag is held in the upright position, can move freely, and always returns to the upright position.
If the flag does not move freely, or does not return to the upright position, an error message
13.20.00 JAM
appears on the control-panel display when the MFP power is turned on.
Figure 5-100
Sensor-flag spring placement
DC controller
1.
Remove the back cover.
280 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
2.
Remove two screws (callout 1), and remove the fan shroud.
Figure 5-101
Remove the DC controller (1 of 6)
3.
Remove eight screws (callout 2), and then rotate the rear sheet-metal shield away from the MFP.
ENWW
Figure 5-102
Remove the DC controller (2 of 6)
Internal assemblies 281
4.
Disconnect one connector (callout 3; J66) from the DC controller and remove the sheet-metal shield.
Figure 5-103
Remove the DC controller (3 of 6)
5.
Remove two screws (callout 4), and then remove the formatter connector (callout 5).
Figure 5-104
Remove the DC controller (4 of 6)
282 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
6.
Disconnect all of the connectors on the DC controller, and then remove three screws (callout 5).
Figure 5-105
Remove the DC controller (5 of 6)
7.
Rotate the formatter side of the DC controller away form the MFP. Pull the DC controller out of the two locking tabs (callout 6) on the fan duct to remove it.
Figure 5-106
Remove the DC controller (6 of 6)
Main motor (M101)
1.
Remove the DC controller.
ENWW Internal assemblies 283
2.
Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the main motor.
Figure 5-107
Remove the main motor
DC controller fan (FN104)
1.
Remove the back cover.
2.
Remove the grounding wire that is in front of the DC controller fan.
Figure 5-108
Remove the DC controller fan (1 of 3)
284 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Pull away the tab that is to the right of the DC controller fan, and slide out the connector that is behind the tab. Disconnect the fan connector.
Figure 5-109
Remove the DC controller fan (2 of 3)
4.
Unwind the connector wire from the frame (callout 1). Release the two tabs (callout 2), and remove the fan.
Figure 5-110
Remove the DC controller fan (3 of 3)
Print-cartridge fan (FN102)
1.
Remove the back cover.
ENWW Internal assemblies 285
2.
Remove two screws (callout 1), and remove the fan shroud.
Figure 5-111
Remove the print-cartridge fan (1 of 4)
3.
Remove eight screws (callout 2), and then rotate the rear sheet-metal shield away from the MFP.
Figure 5-112
Remove the print-cartridge fan (2 of 4)
286 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
4.
Disconnect the fan connector (J78, callout 3) from the DC controller.
Figure 5-113
Remove the print-cartridge fan (3 of 4)
5.
Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the locking tabs that are on each side of the fan
(callout 4). Insert a second flat-blade screwdriver behind the fan, and push the fan out.
Figure 5-114
Remove the print-cartridge fan (4 of 4)
Print-cartridge motor (M102)
1.
Remove the back cover.
2.
Remove the print-cartridge fan.
ENWW Internal assemblies 287
3.
Remove two screws (callout 1), and remove the fan shroud.
Figure 5-115
Remove the print-cartridge motor (1 of 4)
4.
Remove eight screws (callout 2), and then rotate the rear sheet-metal shield away from the MFP.
Figure 5-116
Remove the print-cartridge motor (2 of 4)
288 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
5.
Disconnect one connector (callout 3; J66) from the DC controller and remove the sheet-metal shield.
Figure 5-117
Remove the print-cartridge motor (3 of 4)
6.
Remove three screws (callout 4), disconnect one connector (callout 5; J86), and then remove the print-cartridge motor.
ENWW
Figure 5-118
Remove the print-cartridge motor (4 of 4)
Internal assemblies 289
Top-cover switch (SW101)
1.
Remove the following assemblies:
●
Back cover.
●
Print-cartridge fan.
2.
Remove one screw (callout 1)
Figure 5-119
Remove the top-cover switch (1 of 3)
NOTE
Loosening the two screws (callout 2) that are below the one that you are removing makes it easier to dislodge the sensor bracket.
290 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release one sensor-bracket locking tab, and then pull the sensor bracket out of the chassis.
Figure 5-120
Remove the top-cover switch (2 of 3)
4.
Remove the sensor wire-harness and the sensor from the bracket.
ENWW
Figure 5-121
Remove the top-cover switch (3 of 3)
Internal assemblies 291
Registration assembly
1.
Remove the following assemblies:
●
Back cover
●
Main motor
●
Print-cartridge motor
2.
Disconnect the print-cartridge arm.
Figure 5-122
Remove the registration assembly (1 of 6)
292 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Unhook the lifter-drive-assembly tension-spring from the tab on the chassis. Remove one screw
(callout 1), and then remove the sheet metal bracket.
CAUTION
The lifter-drive-assembly tension-spring is not captive. Do not lose the spring when you remove the assembly.
Figure 5-123
Remove the registration assembly (2 of 6)
4.
Remove the wire harnesses from the wire guides, remove six screws (callout 2), and then remove the drive-gear assembly.
ENWW
Figure 5-124
Remove the registration assembly (3 of 6)
Internal assemblies 293
5.
Remove one e-ring (callout 3), and remove the registration-drive gear.
Figure 5-125
Remove the registration assembly (4 of 6)
6.
Remove one grounding screw (callout 4).
Figure 5-126
Remove the registration assembly (5 of 6)
294 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
7.
Remove four screws (callout 5), and then remove the registration assembly. (Two screws are in the upper, left callout.)
Figure 5-127
Remove the registration assembly (6 of 6)
Paper-pickup-drive assembly
1.
Remove the back cover.
2.
Remove two screws (callout 1), and remove the fan shroud.
ENWW
Figure 5-128
Remove the paper-pickup-drive assembly (1 of 6)
Internal assemblies 295
3.
Remove eight screws (callout 2), and then rotate the rear sheet-metal shield away from the MFP.
Figure 5-129
Remove the paper-pickup-drive assembly (2 of 6)
4.
Disconnect one connector (callout 3; J66) from the DC controller, and remove the sheet-metal shield.
Figure 5-130
Remove the paper-pickup-drive assembly (3 of 6)
296 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
5.
Disconnect one connector (callout 4; J92) from the DC controller.
Figure 5-131
Remove the paper-pickup-drive assembly (4 of 6)
NOTE
The tray 2 pickup-solenoid (SL101) is part of the paper-pickup-drive assembly.
6.
Remove four screws (callout 5), and then remove the paper-pickup-drive assembly.
5
ENWW
Figure 5-132
Remove the paper-pickup-drive assembly (5 of 6)
Internal assemblies 297
7.
You
must
replace the 18-tooth gear on this assembly, even if it is not worn, when you replace the paper-pickup-drive assembly. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to unlatch the retaining hook on the gear, and then remove the gear.
Figure 5-133
Remove the paper pickup drive assembly (6 of 6)
8.
CAUTION
: Do not let the pickup roller shaft slide into the MFP when you install the gear. The groove on the shaft that the gear clips into can get stuck on the MFP chassis. Put pressure on the cassette feed-roller shaft to keep the shaft from slipping into MFP. See the following figure.
Figure 5-134
Cassette feed-roller shaft (push here while replacing the gear)
Lifter-drive assembly
1.
Remove the back cover.
298 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
2.
Remove two screws (callout 1), and remove the fan shroud.
Figure 5-135
Remove the lifter-drive assembly (1 of 5)
3.
Remove eight screws (callout 2), and then rotate the rear sheet-metal shield away from the MFP.
ENWW
Figure 5-136
Remove the lifter-drive assembly (2 of 5)
Internal assemblies 299
4.
Disconnect one connector (callout 3; J66) from the DC controller and remove the sheet-metal shield.
Figure 5-137
Remove the lifter-drive assembly (3 of 5)
5.
Unhook the lifter-drive-assembly tension-spring from the tab on the chassis.
CAUTION
The lifter-drive-assembly tension-spring is not captive. Do not lose the spring when you remove the assembly. Remove one screw (callout 4), and remove the retaining bracket (callout 3).
Figure 5-138
Remove the lifter-drive assembly (4 of 5)
300 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
6.
Disconnect one connector (callout 5; J93) on the DC controller. Slide the lifter-drive assembly toward you, and then remove it.
Figure 5-139
Remove the lifter-drive assembly (5 of 5)
Power-factor-correction (PFC) power supply
1.
Remove the following assemblies:
●
Formatter.
●
Back cover.
●
Output-bin assembly.
ENWW Internal assemblies 301
2.
Remove two screws (callout 1), and remove the fan shroud.
Figure 5-140
Remove the PFC power supply (1 of 8)
3.
Remove eight screws (callout 2), and then rotate the rear sheet-metal shield away from the MFP.
Figure 5-141
Remove the PFC power supply (2 of 8)
302 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
4.
Disconnect one connector (callout 3; J66) from the DC controller, and remove the sheet-metal shield.
Figure 5-142
Remove the PFC power supply (3 of 8)
5.
Remove one screw (callout 4), push in on the retaining tab at the top of the rear-side cover, and then slide the cover up to remove it.
ENWW
Figure 5-143
Remove the PFC power supply (4 of 8)
Internal assemblies 303
6.
Remove four screws (callout 5), and then remove the two formatter FCC connectors (callout 6).
Figure 5-144
Remove the PFC power supply (5 of 8)
7.
Remove ten screws (callout 7).
Figure 5-145
Remove the PFC power supply (6 of 8)
Reinstallation tip:
Be sure to place the black screws in the holes as shown here. These screws go through printed-circuit assemblies (PCAs). Other screws could cut new threads in the PCAs.
304 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
8.
Tilt the top of the PFC power-supply shield away from the MFP, and lift it up to remove it
Figure 5-146
Remove the PFC power supply (7 of 8)
9.
Disconnect three connectors (callout 8), remove four screws (callout 9), and then remove the
PFC power supply.
ENWW
Figure 5-147
Remove the PFC power supply (8 of 8)
Internal assemblies 305
Engine power supply
1.
Remove the following assemblies:
●
Fuser.
●
Output-bin assembly.
●
Duplex-printing unit (or the cover if no duplex-printing unit is installed).
●
Front cover.
●
Back cover.
●
PFC power supply.
2.
Remove two screws (callout 1), and remove the fan shroud.
Figure 5-148
Remove the engine power supply (1 of 10)
306 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Remove eight screws (callout 2), and then rotate the rear sheet-metal shield away from the MFP.
Figure 5-149
Remove the engine power supply (2 of 10)
4.
Disconnect one connector (callout 3; J66) from the DC controller, and remove the sheet-metal shield.
ENWW
Figure 5-150
Remove the engine power supply (3 of 10)
Internal assemblies 307
5.
On the DC controller, disconnect two FFCs (callout 4; J80, J81), the 24-volt connector (callout 5;
J99) the duplexer connector (callout 6; J44), and the fuser connector (callout 7; J71).
Figure 5-151
Remove the engine power supply (4 of 10)
6.
Remove the cassette from tray 2. Remove two screws (callout 8), release the retaining tab
(callout 9), and slide the rear duplexer-guide toward you and remove it.
Figure 5-152
Remove the engine power supply (5 of 10)
308 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
7.
Remove two screws (callout 10), remove the power supply shield, and then disconnect the thermistor and fan connectors.
Figure 5-153
Remove the engine power supply (6 of 10)
8.
Remove three screws (callout 11) on front of the MFP).
ENWW
Figure 5-154
Remove the engine power supply (7 of 10)
Internal assemblies 309
9.
Remove three screws (callout 12) on rear of the MFP.
Figure 5-155
Remove the engine power supply (8 of 10)
10.
Route the PFC power supply wire-harnesses out through the hole in the chassis.
Figure 5-156
Remove the engine power supply (9 of 10)
310 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
11.
Reach inside the MFP, lift up on the power supply, and slide it out of the MFP (make sure that you feed the DC-controller cables through the hole in the chassis as you remove the engine power supply).
Figure 5-157
Remove the engine power supply (10 of 10)
Paper-feed assembly
1.
Remove the engine power supply.
2.
Remove three screws (callout 1).
ENWW
Figure 5-158
Remove the paper-feed assembly (1 of 2)
Internal assemblies 311
3.
Release the paper-feed-assembly alignment pins. Rotate the assembly toward the back of the power supply, and remove it.
Figure 5-159
Remove the paper-feed assembly (2 of 2)
CAUTION
Verify that the four rubber belts and plastic rollers remain in place. These belts and rollers can easily come off and be lost. When you install the paper-feed assembly, verify that the center foot (on the power-supply side) is correctly hooked under the support leg that is on the engine power supply.
Tray 2 detection switch
1.
Remove the PFC power supply.
2.
Remove the cassette from tray 2.
312 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Remove three screws (callout 1), release the two locking tabs on the tray detection switch
(callout 2), and then remove the tray 2 detection switch.
1
2
Figure 5-160
Remove the tray 2 detection switch
CAUTION
The tray 2 detection-switch spring is not captive. Do not lose this spring when you remove the switch.
Paper-size-detection switch (SW102)
1.
Remove the tray 2 detection switch.
ENWW Internal assemblies 313
2.
Disconnect the paper-size-detection-switch connector (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2).
Push in on the paper-size-detection switch, and then slide the switch toward the right side of the
MFP and remove it.
Figure 5-161
Remove the paper-size-detection switch (1 of 2)
Tray 2 paper-present sensor (PS101)
1.
Use a short #2 Phillips screwdriver to remove the screw.
Figure 5-162
Remove the tray 2 paper-present sensor
2.
Remove the tray 2 paper-present sensor.
314 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Laser/scanner
1.
Remove the following assemblies:
●
Reversing-separation-guide assembly.
●
Reversing assembly.
NOTE
This procedure requires that you use a short #2 Phillips screwdriver.
2.
Remove four screws.
NOTE
Take note of the orientation of the laser/scanner grounding clips.
Figure 5-163
Remove the laser/scanner (1 of 2)
ENWW Internal assemblies 315
3.
Disconnect two connectors, and then lift the laser/scanner out of the MFP.
Figure 5-164
Remove the laser/scanner (1 of 2)
Output-bin-full sensor
1.
Remove the following assemblies:
●
Reversing-separation-guide assembly.
●
Reversing assembly.
●
Output bin.
316 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
ENWW
2.
Unsnap the output-bin-full sensor from the retaining clips. Unsnap the clips at the rear of the
MFP first, and work toward the front.
Figure 5-165
Remove the output-bin-full sensor
NOTE
When installing the sensor, make sure that the flag (front end) is in front of the output-bin-detection lever. If the flag is not in front of the lever, this sensor will not function correctly.
3.
Carefully remove the spring from the from the formatter-end of the output-bin-full sensor.
CAUTION
This spring can easily become dislodged from the chassis. Do not lose this spring when you remove this assembly.
Internal assemblies 317
4.
Reinstallation tip:
After installing the replacement output-bin-full sensor, verify that it is in the upright position. This ensures that the sensor is correctly installed and will be correctly positioned when the output bin is installed. The lever on the control-panel end of the sensor must be installed between the plastic MFP cover and the output-bin-detection lever.
Figure 5-166 Incorrect
installation of the output-bin-full sensor
Figure 5-167 Correct
installation of the output-bin-full sensor
318 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
ADF and scanner components
The procedures in this section describe the removal and replacement of the following components:
●
●
●
ADF assembly
CAUTION
When you remove the ADF assembly, do not use the ADF cable to lift or move the ADF assembly.
1.
Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the scanner-controller cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-168
Remove the ADF assembly (1 of 3)
ENWW ADF and scanner components 319
2.
Remove one grounding screw (callout 3), and disconnect two cables (callout 4).
Figure 5-169
Remove the ADF assembly (2 of 3)
NOTE
When you reinstall the ADF, make sure that the ADF cable is correctly routed through the cable holder into the scanner bed.
3.
Open the ADF assembly, and lift it up and off of the scanner.
Figure 5-170
Remove the ADF assembly (3 of 3)
CAUTION
The ADF assembly is calibrated to work with the scanner on which it is installed. If the ADF is installed on another scanner, that scanner needs to be calibrated to work correctly with the ADF.
320 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Scanner assembly
CAUTION
Do not remove the scanner glass. Any repairs to scanner parts under the scanner glass require a complete scanner-assembly replacement. There are no individual service parts under the scanner glass.
1.
Remove the ADF assembly.
2.
Raise the scanner, and remove the front-edge flange.
Figure 5-171
Remove the scanner assembly (1 of 8)
3.
Remove two screws (callout 1), and remove the scanner-carriage-lock cover (callout 2).
ENWW
Figure 5-172
Remove the scanner assembly (2 of 8)
ADF and scanner components 321
4.
Remove the screw (callout 3), and remove the right scanner cover.
Figure 5-173
Remove the scanner assembly (3 of 8)
322 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
5.
Close the top cover. Remove two screws (callout 4), and remove the left scanner-cover.
Figure 5-174
Remove the scanner assembly (4 of 8)
NOTE
The spring that is near the rear of the MFP (callout 5) is not captive. Do not lose the spring when you remove the cover.
ENWW
Figure 5-175
Remove the scanner assembly (5 of 8)
ADF and scanner components 323
6.
Remove three screws (callout 6).
Figure 5-176
Remove the scanner assembly (6 of 8)
7.
Disconnect one FFC (callout 7) and one connector (callout 8).
Figure 5-177
Remove the scanner assembly (7 of 8)
324 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
8.
Slide the scanner slightly to the right, and then lift it up and off of the MFP.
Figure 5-178
Remove the scanner assembly (8 of 8)
CAUTION
Make sure that you do not release the scanner latch while the scanner assembly is removed. The gas shocks that support the scanner assembly can damage the sheet-metal scanner-assembly platform if the platform is raised when the scanner assembly is not installed.
9.
Reinstallation tip:
When you reinstall the scanner assembly, align the mark on the scanner assembly with the mark on the control panel to correctly position the scanner assembly. With the scanner assembly correctly positioned on the sheet metal platform, slide the assembly toward the left side of the MFP until it locks into place.
ENWW
Figure 5-179
Correctly positioning the scanner assembly
ADF and scanner components 325
Scanner-controller PCA
1.
Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the scanner-controller PCA cover.
Figure 5-180
Remove the scanner-controller PCA (1 of 2)
2.
Disconnect all of the scanner-controller PCA connectors, and then remove five screws
(callout 2). Remove the scanner-controller PCA.
Figure 5-181
Remove the scanner-controller PCA (2 of 2)
326 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
ADF components
The procedures in this section describe the removal and replacement of the following components:
●
●
●
●
●
●
ADF jam-access cover and latch
●
ADF leading-edge and paper-present sensors
●
ADF output-bin extension
1.
Open the ADF, and remove two screws (callout 1).
ENWW
Figure 5-182
Remove the ADF output-bin extension (1 of 2)
NOTE
Make sure that you store the envelope that contains the clear mylar sheets under the ADF white, vinyl scan-background after your install the replacement ADF output-bin extension.
ADF components 327
2.
Peel back the ADF white, vinyl scan-background, and then remove the ADF output-bin extension.
Figure 5-183
Remove the ADF output-bin extension (2 of 2)
NOTE
When the two screws are removed, the ADF output-bin extension is not captive.
Make sure that you support the ADF output-bin extension before you peel back the ADF white, vinyl scan-background.
ADF white mylar-backing
1.
Open the ADF, release two locking tabs (callout 1) and then open the mylar-holder assembly.
Figure 5-184
Remove the ADF white mylar-backing (1 of 3)
328 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
2.
Unsnap the mylar-holder-assembly hinges from the hinge pins.
Figure 5-185
Remove the ADF white mylar-backing (2 of 3)
3.
Release the ADF white mylar-backing locking tab, and lift the assembly up and out of the ADF.
ENWW
Figure 5-186
Remove the ADF white mylar-backing (3 of 3)
NOTE
The springs behind the ADF white mylar-backing assembly are not captive. Do not lose the springs when you remove the ADF white mylar-backing assembly.
ADF components 329
4.
Reinstallation tip:
When you reinstall the ADF white mylar-backing assembly, compress and twist the springs to make sure that they grip the pedestals on the back of the assembly.
Figure 5-187
Reinstall the ADF white mylar-backing springs
ADF front cover
1.
Remove the ADF input tray.
2.
Open the ADF door, and then loosen one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-188
Remove the ADF front cover (1 of 2)
330 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Release the two ADF front-cover locking buttons, and then remove the ADF front cover.
Figure 5-189
Remove the ADF front cover (2 of 2)
ADF rear cover
1.
Remove one screw (callout 1).
ENWW
Figure 5-190
Remove the ADF rear cover (1 of 2)
ADF components 331
2.
Release the three locking tabs, and then remove the ADF rear cover.
Figure 5-191
Remove the ADF rear cover (2 of 2)
ADF left-side cover
1.
Remove the following assemblies:
●
ADF front cover.
●
ADF rear cover.
332 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
2.
Release two springs.
Figure 5-192
Remove the ADF left cover (1 of 2)
NOTE
The left-cover tension-springs are not captive. Do not lose the springs when you remove the ADF left cover.
3.
Flex the locking tab on the hinge at the control-panel end of the cover to release the hinge.
Remove the ADF left cover.
ENWW
Figure 5-193
Remove the ADF left cover (2 of 2)
ADF components 333
ADF jam-access cover and latch
1.
Remove the following assemblies:
●
ADF front cover.
●
ADF rear cover.
●
ADF left side cover.
2.
Pull up on the left side of the cover to release it, and then remove the ADF jam-access cover.
Figure 5-194
Remove the ADF jam-access cover and latch (1 of 3)
334 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
To remove the latch, spread the two clips, and slide the latch-rod toward the rear of the ADF and remove it.
Figure 5-195
Remove the ADF jam-access cover and latch (2 of 3)
4.
Reinstallation tip:
Make sure that you wind the spring around the latch rod and hold it in place until the rod snaps into place.
ADF leading-edge and paper-present sensors
1.
Remove the ADF jam-access cover.
ENWW ADF components 335
2.
Locate the ADF leading-edge sensor (callout 1) and the ADF paper-present sensor (callout 2).
Figure 5-196
Remove the ADF leading-edge and paper-present sensors (1 of 2)
3.
Squeeze the retainer tabs, and push the sensor out of the mounting frame. Disconnect the connector, and then remove the sensors
Figure 5-197
Remove the ADF leading-edge and paper-present sensors (2 of 2)
336 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
ADF hinges
1.
Remove the following assemblies:
●
ADF front cover.
●
ADF rear cover.
●
ADF left-side cover.
●
ADF jam-access cover.
●
ADF assembly.
2.
Remove four screws (callout 1) from the right-side hinge, and then remove the right-side hinge.
Figure 5-198
Remove the ADF hinges (1 of 2)
ENWW ADF components 337
3.
Remove two screws (callout 2) from the left-side hinge, and then remove the left-side hinge.
Figure 5-199
Remove the ADF hinges (2 of 2)
338 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
500-sheet feeder components
500-sheet-feeder pickup and feed rollers
The procedure for removing the 500-sheet feeder rollers is the same as the procedure for removing the rollers that are in tray 2.
ENWW 500-sheet feeder components 339
Stapler/stacker components
CAUTION
Disconnect the MFP power cord from the electrical outlet before disassembling and reassembling the stapler/stacker. After the device is plugged back in for testing purposes, do not touch the low-voltage power supply unit because this can cause electrical shock.
Delivery tray
Lift the delivery tray (callout 1) upward (callout 2), then pull it outward (callout 3) and remove.
2
3
1
Figure 5-200
Remove the delivery tray
Front cover
1.
Remove the delivery tray.
2.
Carefully pry off the front cover using a flat-blade screwdriver. Insert the screwdriver blade and slightly lift the cover at the five points (callout 1) shown in the following figure.
1
1
Figure 5-201
Claw locations on front cover
Rear cover
1.
Remove the delivery tray.
340 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
2.
Carefully pry off the rear cover using a flat-blade screwdriver. Insert the screwdriver blade and slightly lift the cover at the five points (callout 1) shown in the following figure.
1
1
Figure 5-202
Claw locations on rear cover
Left cover
1.
Remove the delivery tray.
2.
Remove the front cover.
3.
Remove the rear cover.
4.
Unhook two claws (callout 1) and remove the left cover (callout 2).
2
1
Figure 5-203
Remove the left cover
Top cover
1.
Remove the delivery tray.
2.
Remove the front cover.
3.
Remove the rear cover.
ENWW Stapler/stacker components 341
4.
Remove one screw (callout 1).
1
Figure 5-204
Remove the top cover (1 of 2)
5.
Unhook the two claws (callout 1) and remove the top cover (callout 2).
1
2
1
Figure 5-205
Remove the top cover (2 of 2)
Bottom cover
1.
Remove the delivery tray.
2.
Remove five screws (callout 1) and then the bottom-cover unit (callout 2).
1
2
Figure 5-206
Remove the bottom cover
342 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
Stapler unit
1.
Remove the delivery tray.
2.
Remove the front cover.
3.
Disconnect the two electrical connectors (callout 1) on the front of the stapler unit.
1
Figure 5-207
Remove the stapler unit (1 of 3)
4.
Remove two securing screws (callout 1).
1
Figure 5-208
Remove the stapler unit (2 of 3)
ENWW Stapler/stacker components 343
5.
Remove two screws (1) that attach the stapler unit.
1
Figure 5-209
Remove the stapler unit (3 of 3)
Jogger unit
1.
Remove the front cover.
2.
Remove the rear cover.
3.
Remove the top cover.
4.
Remove the bottom cover.
5.
Remove the small plastic cover attached to the right side of the interface cable plate. Use your thumb to pop the tabs out, then slide the cover off.
Figure 5-210
Remove the jogger unit (1 of 7)
344 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
ENWW
6.
Remove three screws from the interface-cable plate, and then unhinge the plate and unthread the wires from the wire guide.
Figure 5-211
Remove the jogger unit (2 of 7)
Figure 5-212
Remove the jogger unit (3 of 7)
Stapler/stacker components 345
7.
Disconnect connector J1311 on the stapler/stacker control board and remove this wiring from the cable guide leading to the jogger assembly.
Figure 5-213
Remove the jogger unit (4 of 7)
8.
Disconnect the wires from the jogger home-position sensor PS1304 (1), the LED PCB (2), and sensor PS1306 (3), and then remove these wires from the cable guide.
2
1
3
Figure 5-214
Remove the jogger unit (5 of 7)
346 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
9.
Remove four screws.
Figure 5-215
Remove the jogger unit (6 of 7)
10.
Remove the jogger assembly carefully from under the link arm (1), under the cable guide (2), and around sensor PS1306 (3).
3
2
ENWW
1
Figure 5-216
Remove the jogger unit (7 of 7)
NOTE
When installing the new jogger-unit assembly, be sure to align the ridges on the sides of the PS1306 cable with the grooves on the inside of the PS1306 connector.
Stapler/stacker components 347
Figure 5-217
Re-connecting PS1306
Stapler/stacker driver PCB
1.
Remove the front cover.
2.
Remove the rear cover.
3.
Remove the left cover.
4.
Remove the bottom cover.
348 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
ENWW
5.
On the stapler/stacker PCB (callout 1), disconnect all the connectors (callout 2) and remove two screws (callout 3).
2
2
2
1
3
Figure 5-218
Remove the stapler/stacker driver PCB
CAUTION
The stapler/stacker PCB is easily damaged by electrostatic discharge. Before handling the stapler/stacker PCB, always wear an ESD grounding device or discharge yourself by touching the metal frame of the MFP.
Stapler/stacker components 349
3-bin mailbox components
CAUTION
Disconnect the MFP power cord from the electrical outlet before disassembling and reassembling the 3-bin mailbox. After the device is plugged back in for testing purposes, do not touch the low-voltage power supply unit because this can cause electrical shock.
Rear cover
Insert a flat-blade screwdriver head and slightly lift the cover at the five points (callout 1) shown in the following figure. Then remove the rear cover (callout 2).
1
2
Figure 5-219
Claw locations on rear cover
Front cover
Insert a flat-blade screwdriver head and slightly lift the cover at the five points (callout 1) shown in the following figure. Then remove the front cover (callout 2).
2
1
Figure 5-220
Claw locations on front cover
Delivery tray
Lift the delivery tray (callout 1) and remove it.
350 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
1
Left cover
1.
Remove the rear cover.
2.
Unhook two claws (callout 1). Pull the left cover (callout 2) in the direction indicated by the arrow.
2
1
Figure 5-221
Remove the left cover
Upper cover
1.
Remove the rear cover.
2.
Remove the front cover.
3.
Remove the delivery tray.
ENWW 3-bin mailbox components 351
4.
Unhook two claws (callout 1).
1
Figure 5-222
Remove the upper cover (1 of 2)
5.
Remove four bosses (callout 1) and then the upper cover (callout 2).
1
2
Figure 5-223
Remove the upper cover (1 of 2)
Right-door unit
1.
Remove the rear cover.
2.
Remove the front cover.
3.
Remove the delivery tray.
352 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
4.
Displace the boss (callout 1) to the right and remove it from the MBM.
1
Figure 5-224
Remove the right-door unit (1 of 4)
5.
Open the right-door unit. The following figure shows that the boss (callout 2) of the right-door unit (callout 1) is removed from the MBM
2 1
Figure 5-225
Remove the right-door unit (2 of 4)
6.
Displace the right-door unit (callout 1) to the left and remove the boss (callout 2) from the MBM.
ENWW
1
2
Figure 5-226
Remove the right-door unit (3 of 4)
3-bin mailbox components 353
7.
Remove the spring (callout 1) from the link shaft (callout 2), and then remove the right-door unit
(callout 3).
3
1
2
Figure 5-227
Remove the right-door unit (4 of 4)
Bottom cover
1.
Remove the left cover.
2.
Remove two screws (callout 1).
1
Figure 5-228
Remove the bottom cover (1 of 2)
354 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
3.
Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the bottom cover (callout 2).
2
1
Figure 5-229
Remove the bottom cover (2 of 2)
MBM driver PCB
1.
Remove the rear cover.
2.
Remove the front cover.
3.
Remove the delivery tray.
4.
Remove the left cover.
5.
Remove the bottom cover.
6.
Disconnect the eight connectors (callout 1) and remove two screws (callout 2). Then remove the
MBM driver PCB.
1
2
Figure 5-230
Remove the MBM driver PCB
CAUTION
The MBM driver PCB is easily damaged by electrostatic discharge. Before handling the MBM driver PCB, always wear an ESD grounding device or discharge yourself by touching the metal frame of the MFP.
ENWW 3-bin mailbox components 355
356 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement ENWW
6 Problem solving
ENWW
This chapter provides information about the following topics.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Solve network printing problems
●
●
●
●
Solve network connectivity problems
●
Solve stapler/stacker problems
●
●
●
●
Individual component diagnostics
●
357
●
Troubleshooting the embedded HP Jetdirect print server
●
●
●
Solve common Macintosh problems
●
●
358 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Problem-solving checklist
If you are experiencing problems, use the following checklist to identify the cause of the problem:
●
Is the device connected to power?
●
Is the device on?
●
Is the device in the
Ready
state?
●
Are all necessary cables connected?
●
Do any messages appear on the control panel?
●
Are genuine HP supplies installed?
●
Was a recently replaced print cartridge installed correctly, and was the pull tab and/or attached tape on the cartridge removed?
For additional information about installation and setup, see the getting started guide.
If you cannot find solutions to problems in this guide, go to http://www.hp.com/support/ljm4345mfp .
Factors that affect performance
Several factors affect the time it takes to print a job:
●
The use of special paper (such as transparencies, heavy paper, and custom-size paper)
●
Device processing and download time
●
The complexity and size of graphics
●
The speed of the computer you are using
●
The USB connection
●
The I/O configuration
●
The amount of memory installed
●
The network operating system and configuration (if applicable)
●
Device personality (PCL or PS)
NOTE
Although additional memory can resolve memory problems, improve how the device handles complex graphics, and improve download times, it will not increase maximum printing speed (ppm).
ENWW Problem-solving checklist 359
Problem-solving flowchart
Symptom
The control-panel display is blank, no lights are lit, and the device makes no sounds from the motors.
The control panel indicates an error.
Paper-feed problems
Check
Is the power on?
Do error messages appear on the control-panel display?
Are the main features, such as
Copy and E-mail , inactive on the touchscreen?
Do jams occur frequently?
Do original documents feed correctly through the ADF?
Possible causes Possible solutions
The power switch might be off.
The power cord might be unplugged.
1.
Make sure the device is plugged in and the power switch is on.
2.
Test the power outlet by plugging the device into an outlet that is known to work.
The power outlet might not be working correctly.
The internal power supply might have failed.
Several conditions can cause an error message to appear.
The scanner shipping lock might be in the locked position.
3.
If the problem persists, go to http://www.hp.com/ support .
1.
Follow the instructions on the control panel to resolve the problem.
2.
If the problem persists, go to http://www.hp.com/ support .
Make sure the scanner shipping lock is unlocked. The scanner lock is on the left side of the device, underneath the scanner.
The media does not meet specifications.
Paper remains in the device after clearing a previous jam.
1.
Make sure the media meets specifications for the device.
Some of the shipping tape, cardboard, or shipping locks are still in the device.
The maintenance kit items might be ready for replacement.
2.
Open all doors and trays and check for jammed media.
3.
Make sure the print cartridge is installed correctly.
4.
Install the device maintenance kit.
The original document might be printed on media that is too light or too heavy for the ADF.
5.
If the problem persists, go to http://www.hp.com/ support .
1.
If the original document is printed on very heavy or light media, copy by using the flatbed glass.
The ADF rollers and separation pad might be dirty.
The ADF maintenance kit parts might need to be replaced.
2.
3.
Clean the ADF rollers and separation pad.
Install the ADF maintenance kit.
4.
If the problem persists, go to http://www.hp.com/ support .
360 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Symptom
Copy problems
Print-quality problems
General printing problems
Check
Are copies blank?
Possible causes
The originals might have been loaded upside-down.
Possible solutions
1.
In the ADF, load original documents face-up.
Can you print documents from a computer?
The computer cable might be defective.
The printer driver might need to be reinstalled.
2.
On the scanner glass, load original documents facedown.
3.
If the problem persists, go to http://www.hp.com/ support .
Are copies of poor quality from the ADF and the scanner glass?
Are copies of poor quality only from the ADF?
Are copies of poor quality only from the scanner glass?
The copy settings need to be adjusted for the original document.
Adjust copy settings as needed.
If the problem persists, go to http://www.hp.com/support .
Clean or replace the mylar strip.
The ADF mylar strip might be dirty.
If the problem persists, go to http://www.hp.com/support .
The scanner glass might be dirty Clean the glass.
Is the overall print quality poor?
Is the printing too light?
Do lines, streaks, or dots appear on the pages?
The media does not meet specifications.
The print cartridge might be empty or damaged.
If the problem persists, go to http://www.hp.com/support .
1.
Make sure the media meets specifications for the device.
2.
Replace the print cartridge.
The maintenance kit items might be ready for replacement.
3.
Install the device maintenance kit.
4.
If the problem persists, go to http://www.hp.com/ support .
1.
Try printing a
Configuration page at the control panel. Touch
Network Address and then touch Print.
If the page prints, the problem is with the cable or the driver.
2.
Reconnect the cables.
3.
Reinstall the printer driver.
The printer driver is on the
CD that came with the device.
4.
If the problem persists, go to http://www.hp.com/ support .
ENWW Problem-solving flowchart 361
Symptom
Stapling problems
E-mail problems
Check
Are you having problems printing from specific software programs?
Are jobs stapled?
Possible causes
Can you print over the network?
The network might not be configured correctly.
The problem might be with the software program.
The staple cassette might be jammed.
The staple cassette might need to be replaced.
The SMTP gateway might need to be reconfigured.
Possible solutions
1.
Try connecting the computer directly to the device. If you can print, the problem is with the network configuration.
2.
If the problem persists, go to http://www.hp.com/ support .
1.
Try printing from a different software program.
If you can print, the problem is with the original software program.
2.
See the documentation for the software program.
1.
Remove the staple cassette and check if it is jammed or empty.
2.
If the problem persists, go to http://www.hp.com/ support .
Adjust e-mail settings as needed.
Are you able to send e-mail attachments?
Does an “E-mail gateway not responding” message appear on the control panel?
Are you able to change the
“From” e-mail address?
Are you able to change the file type or the color setting for email attachments?
Do you receive a “job failed” email message when you try to send an e-mail attachment?
The device might be configured so that the “From” e-mail address cannot be changed.
The device might require you to sign in before you can change the “From” e-mail address.
Change the settings at the control panel or by using the embedded Web server.
Use the embedded Web server to change these settings.
The e-mail address to which you are sending the document might be incorrect.
The file size might be larger than the maximum allowable size for the SMTP gateway.
1.
At the control panel, touch
E-mail , and then touch
More Options .
2.
Settings can also be changed through the embedded Web server.
1.
Send a test e-mail from your computer.
2.
Use the embedded Web server to change the maximum allowable size for e-mail attachments.
362 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Symptom
Fax problems
Check
Is the Fax feature on the control panel inactive?
Is the Fax feature on the control panel completely missing?
Is the faxes?
faxes?
Fax feature configured correctly but you cannot send correctly but you cannot receive
Possible causes
You need to provide required settings before using the Fax feature.
The fax accessory might be installed incorrectly.
Possible solutions
1.
At the control panel, touch
Administration , touch Initial
Setup , and touch Fax
Setup .
2.
Configure the settings for
Location , Date/Time , and
Fax Header.
1.
Make sure the fax accessory is installed correctly and that none of the pins are bent.
You must use the phone cord that came with the device.
The phone cord might not be connected securely or the telephone line might not be working.
2.
Print a Configuration page and check the modem status. It should indicate
“Operational/Enabled”. If the modem status is anything else, the problem is with the fax accessory.
1.
Always use the phone cord that came with the device.
2.
Test the telephone line by connecting a telephone to it and making a call.
You might have connected the device to a digital phone line instead of an analog phone line.
The fax accessory requires an analog phone line.
3.
Make sure you are connecting the device to an analog phone line.
protection device might be interfering with incoming faxes.
1.
Do not use line splitters or surge-protection devices.
An answering machine or voicemail system might be intercepting the incoming fax transmission.
2.
Disconnect the answering machine or voice-mail system.
3.
Set the number of rings-toanswer for the fax accessory to a lower number.
4.
Make sure the device is connected to an a dedicated analog phone line. Do not use a roll-over line.
ENWW Problem-solving flowchart 363
Power-on checks
The basic MFP functions should start up as soon as the MFP is plugged into an electrical outlet and the power switch is pushed to the
on
position. If the MFP does not start, use the information in this section to isolate and solve the problem.
Power-on troubleshooting overview
Turn on the MFP power. If the control-panel display remains blank, random patterns appear, or asterisks remain on the display, perform power-on checks to locate the cause of the problem.
During normal operation, the main cooling fan begins to spin briefly after the MFP power is turned on. Place your hand over the holes in the rear cover, above the formatter. If the fan is operating, you will feel a slight vibration and feel air passing into the MFP. You can also lean close to the MFP and hear the fan operating. When this fan is operational, the DC side of the power supply is functioning correctly.
After the fan is operating, the main motor turns on (unless the top cover is open, a jam condition is sensed, or the paper-path sensors are damaged). You should be able to visually and audibly determine if the main motor is turned on.
If the fan and main motor are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting step is to isolate print engine, formatter, and control-panel problems. Perform an engine test. If the formatter is damaged, it might interfere with the engine test. If the engine test page does not print, try removing the formatter and then performing the engine test again. If the engine test is then successful, the problem is almost certainly with the formatter, the control panel, or the cable that connects them.
If the control panel is blank when you turn on the MFP, check the following items.
1.
Make sure that the MFP is plugged into an active electrical outlet that delivers the correct voltage.
2.
Make sure that the power switch is in the
on
position.
3.
Make sure that the fan runs briefly, which indicates that the power supply is operational.
4.
Make sure that the control-panel display wire-harness is connected.
5.
Make sure that the formatter is seated and operating correctly.
6.
Rotate the contrast dial on the control panel to make sure it is not all the way up or all the way down.
7.
Remove any HP Jetdirect or other EIO cards, and then try to turn the MFP on again.
NOTE
If the control-panel display is blank, but the main cooling fan runs briefly after the
MFP power is turned on, try printing an engine-test page to determine whether the problem is with the control-panel display, formatter, or other MFP components.
If the main cooling fan is not operating, check the following items.
1.
Check the fuse on the power-factor correction (PFC) power supply (location FU1; near the power switch) to make sure that it is not open.
2.
If necessary, replace the PFC power supply PCA.
364 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
3.
If necessary, replace the DC controller.
4.
If necessary, replace the engine power supply.
NOTE
It is important to have the control panel functional as soon as possible in the troubleshooting process so that the control-panel display can be used to help locate MFP errors.
ENWW Power-on checks 365
Formatter lights
Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the MFP is functioning correctly.
1
2
3
HP Jetdirect Inside LEDs
Heartbeat LED
Fax LED
HP Jetdirect Inside LEDs
The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs, one for each possible link speed. When an
LED is lit, the print server is functioning correctly. A link failure is indicated when both LEDs are off.
For link failures, check all of the network cable connections. In addition, you can try to manually configure the link settings on the embedded print server by using the MFP control panel menus.
1.
Scroll to and touch Administration .
2.
Touch Initial Setup .
3.
Touch Networking and I/O .
4.
Touch Embedded Jetdirect or EIO <X> Jetdirect .
5.
Touch Link Speed .
6.
Select the appropriate link speed.
7.
Touch Save .
Heartbeat LED
The heartbeat LED indicates that the formatter is functioning correctly. While the MFP is initializing after you turn it on, the LED blinks rapidly and then turns off. When the MFP has finished the initialization sequence, the heartbeat LED pulses on and off.
366 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
If the heartbeat LED is off, the formatter might have a problem. Replace the formatter.
Fax LED
The LED on the HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300 indicates that it is functioning correctly. If the
LED is off, see the
HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide
for information about solving the problem.
ENWW Formatter lights 367
Diagrams for troubleshooting
Use the diagrams in this section to identify MFP components.
DC controller connections
Each of the connections on the DC controller PCA is indicated in the following figure.
7
8
9
Figure 6-1
DC controller component connections
Item
3
4
1
2
5
6
Component
Tray 1 pickup solenoid, SL101
Feed-roller clutch, CL101
Memory tag
Laser/scanner
Image scanner (+24 volts)
Reversing-unit fan, FN103
Delivery-door switch, SW103
Reversing-unit motors: M104, M105, M106
Output-bin full sensor, PS104
DC controller fan, FN104
368 Chapter 6 Problem solving
J50
J85
J66
Connector
J79
J89
J97
J84
J70
J65
ENWW
ENWW
Item
10
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
15
16
17
11
12
13
14
30
Component
Reversing-unit sensors and solenoids: PS109, PS110, PS111,
SL105, SL106
Engine power supply PCA
Top-cover switch, SW101
Engine power supply PCA
Tray 2 paper size and paper-stack surface sensors and switches:
PS101, PS107, SW102
PFC power supply PCA
Laser/scanner
Formatter
Control panel
Optional output devices
Tray 2 pickup solenoid, SL101
Lifter motor, M103
Main motor, M101
+24 volt
Duplex printing accessory
Drum motor, M102
Fuser
Envelope feeder
Print-cartridge fan, FN102
Paper-path sensors and switches: PS106, PS112, PS103, PS102,
PS105, SW105
Not used
Connector
J43
J71
J88
J78
J87
J98
J99
J44
J86
J77
J96
J92
J93
J60
J83
J82
J80
J95
J81
J90
Diagrams for troubleshooting 369
Scanner-controller PCA connections
Figure 6-2
Scanner-controller PCA component connections
Item
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
9
10
Component
Not used
Optical-head assembly
Power supply
Cover-closed switch and home-position sensor
Scanner fan
Inverter PCA
Flatbed motor
To ADF intermediate PCA
To ADF feed and read motors
Formatter PCA
370 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
General timing chart
ENWW
Figure 6-3
General timing chart (1 of 2)
Diagrams for troubleshooting 371
Figure 6-4
General timing chart (2 of 2)
372 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
General circuit diagrams
ENWW
Figure 6-5
General circuit diagram (1 of 2)
Diagrams for troubleshooting 373
Figure 6-6
General circuit diagram (2 of 2)
374 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
ENWW
Figure 6-7
Circuit diagram for the 500-sheet feeder
Diagrams for troubleshooting 375
Figure 6-8
Circuit diagram for the scanner
376 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
ENWW
5
4
7
6
3
2
1
9
8
11
10
15
14
13
12
1
2
3
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
1
1
2
3
4
3
2
1
NC
IN-SNS
GND
+5V
+5V
GND
PDL-HP
+5V
GND
FULL
4
5
6
1
2
3
3
2
5
4
1
PDL-AD
PDL-AND
PDL-BD
PDL-BND
NC
+5V
GND
SWNG-HP
1
2
3
2
1
4
3
JOG-AD
JOG-AND
JOG-BD
JOG-BND
+5V
/HP
/READY
LS
GND
MTR-
MTR-
MTR+
MTR+
1
2
3
4
7
8
5
6
9
4
3
2
1
FD-BND
FD-BD
FD-AND
FD-AD
3
2
1
11
10
9
6
5
8
7
4
3
2
1
GND
GND
+24V
/SP-UP
CAN-H
CAN-L
GND
GND
POWERON
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24U
ULED-G
ULED-O
GND
NC
+5V
GND
JOG-HP
5
6
7
3
4
1
2
3
2
1
5
4
7
6
11
10
9
8
FLASH-ACT1_TESTSW2
GND
RCT
+5V
FLASH-ACT0_TESTSW1
FLASH-IN_TESTSW3
FLASH-MD2
FLASH-CLK_TESTSW4
FLASH-MD0
FLASH-OUT
GND
FAMDRV
/FANLOCK
GND
1
2
3
GND
PWRON-OUT
CAN-L-OUT
CAN-H-OUT
3
4
1
2
1
2
2
1
STMP-SL
+24U
3
2
1
FT1
FT2
3
2
1
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
3
2
5
4
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
8
9
6
7
3
4
5
1
2
Figure 6-9
Circuit diagram for the stapler/stacker
Diagrams for troubleshooting 377
3
4
1
2
4
3
2
1
FD-BND
FD-BD
FD-AND
FD-AD
+5V
BIN1_FULL
BIN1_PAP
BIN2_FULL
BIN2_PAP
GND
ULED_O
ULED_G
GND
JOINT_SW
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
6
5
8
7
4
3
2
1
+5V
BIN1_FULL
BIN1_PAP
BIN2_FULL
BIN2_PAP
GND
ULED_O
ULED_G
2
1
2
1
FD_SL
+24V
3
2
1
1
2
3
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
5
4
3
7
6
2
1
11
10
9
8
GND
GND
+24VA
/SPD-UP
CAN-H
CAN-L
GND
GND
PWRON
+24VA
+24VA
+5VR
GND
BIN3_FULL
+24V
BINFL_SL
3
4
5
1
2
3
2
1
IN_SNS
GND
+5VR
FAN_DRV
FAN_LCK
GND
1
2
3
11
10
9
6
5
8
7
2
1
4
3
FLASH-ACT1_SW2
GND
RCT_CTRL
+5V
FLASH-ACT0_SW1
FLASH-IN_SW3
FLASH-MD2
FLASH-CLK_SW4
FLASH-MD0
FLASH-OUT
GND
GND
PWRON_OUT
CAN_L_OUT
CAN_H_OUT
3
4
1
2
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
SOLD7
SOLD6
SOLD4
SOLD5
11
10
9
8
7
15
14
13
12
4
3
6
5
2
1
Figure 6-10
Circuit diagram for the 3–bin mailbox
378 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Solve general device problems
Device selects media from the wrong tray.
Cause Solution
The tray selection in the software program might be incorrect. For many software programs, the paper tray selection is found on the
Page Setup
menu within the program.
Remove any media in other trays to make the device select from the correct tray.
The configured size does not match the size of the media that is loaded in the tray.
For Macintosh computers, use the HP Printer Utility to change the priority of the tray.
Adjust the width guides to match the size of the media that is loaded in the tray.
Device does not pull paper from tray.
Cause
The tray is empty.
The paper guides are set incorrectly.
Solution
Load paper in the tray.
To set the guides correctly, see “Load Media”.
For tray 2, 3, 4, or 5, make sure that the leading edge of the paper stack is even. An uneven edge can prevent the lift plate from rising.
Paper curls when it exits the device.
Cause
The paper curls when it exits to the top output bin.
Solution
Choose the straightest paper path in the printer driver or control panel.
Turn over the paper that you are printing on.
Reduce the fusing temperature to reduce the curling.
ENWW Solve general device problems 379
Print job is extremely slow.
Cause
The job might be very complex.
The maximum speed of the device cannot be exceeded even when more memory is added.
Printing speeds might be automatically reduced when printing on custom-sized media.
Note: Slower speeds are expected when printing on narrow paper, when printing from tray 1, or when using the
High2
fuser mode.
You are printing a PDF or PostScript (PS) file but are using a PCL device driver.
Solution
Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the printquality settings. If this problem occurs frequently, add memory to the device.
Try using the PS device driver rather than the PCL device driver. (You can usually do this from a software program.)
Print job prints on both sides of the paper.
Cause
The device is set for duplexing.
Solution
Turn duplexing off in the printer driver or at the control panel.
Print job contains only one page but the device processes the back side of the page as well (the page comes part of the way out, and then goes back into the device).
Cause Solution
The device is set for duplexing. Even if the print job contains only one page, the device also processes the back side.
Turn duplexing off in the printer driver or at the control panel.
Do not try to pull the page out of the device before duplexing is complete. Jamming might result.
Pages print, but are totally blank.
Cause
The sealing tape might still be on the print cartridge.
The file might have blank pages.
Solution
Remove the print cartridge and pull out the sealing tape.
Reinstall the print cartridge.
Check the file to make sure that it does not contain blank pages.
The device prints, but the text is wrong, garbled, or incomplete.
Cause Solution
The device cable is loose or defective.
Disconnect the device cable and reconnect it. Try a print job that you know works. If possible, attach the cable and device to another computer and try a print job that you know works.
Finally, try a new cable.
380 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
ENWW
The device prints, but the text is wrong, garbled, or incomplete.
Cause
The wrong driver was selected in the software.
The software program is malfunctioning.
Solution
Check the software device selection menu to make sure that an HP LaserJet M4345 device is selected.
Try printing a job from another program.
The device does not respond when you select Print in the software.
Cause Solution
The device is out of media.
The device might be in the manual-feed mode.
The cable between the computer and the device is not connected correctly.
The device cable is defective.
Add media.
Change the device from manual-feed mode.
Disconnect and reconnect the cable.
The wrong device was selected in the software.
The device might have a jam.
The software for the device is not configured for the device port.
The device is on a network and is not receiving a signal.
The device is not receiving power.
The device is malfunctioning.
If possible, attach the cable to another computer and print a job that you know works. You might also try using a different cable.
Check the software device selection menu to make sure that an HP LaserJet M4345 device is selected.
Clear any jams, paying careful attention to the duplexer area
(if your model has a duplexer). See
.
Check the software device selection menu to make sure that it is using the correct port. If the computer has more than one port, make sure that the device is attached to the correct one.
Check cable connections. Reinstall the printing software.
Print a job that you know works.
Clear any stopped jobs from the print queue.
If no lights are on, check the power cord connections. Check the power switch. Check the power source.
Check the control-panel display for messages and lights to determine if the device is indicating an error.
Solve general device problems 381
Control-panel message types
Four types of control-panel messages can indicate the status of or problems with the device.
Message type
Status messages
Warning messages
Error messages
Description
Status messages reflect the current state of the device. They inform you of normal device operation and require no interaction to clear them. They change as the state of the device changes. Whenever the device is ready, not busy, and has no pending warning messages, the status message
Ready
appears if the device is online.
Warning messages inform you of data and print errors. These messages typically alternate with the
Ready
or status messages and remain until you touch OK . Some warning messages are clearable. If
Clearable Warnings
is set to
Job
on the device Device Behavior menu, the next print job clears these messages.
Error messages communicate that some action must be performed, such as adding paper or clearing a jam.
Some error messages are auto-continuable. If
Auto-Continue
is set on the menus, the device will continue normal operation after an auto-continuable error message appears for 10 seconds.
NOTE
Pressing any button during the 10-second auto-continuable error message overrides the auto-continue feature, and the button function takes precedence. For example, pressing the Stop button pauses printing and offers the option to cancel the print job.
Critical-error messages Critical error messages inform you of a device failure. Some of these messages can be cleared by turning the device off and then on. These messages are not affected by the
Auto-Continue
setting. If a critical error persists, service is required.
382 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Control-panel messages
Table 6-1
Control-panel messages
Control panel message
10.32.00 Unauthorized supply installed
10.XX.YY SUPPLY MEMORY ERROR
11.XX Internal clock error - To Continue
Touch OK
13.JJ.NT JAM IN ENVELOPE FEEDER -
Clear jam, then touch OK
13.JJ.NT JAM IN OUTPUT BIN
13.JJ.NT JAM IN STAPLER
13.JJ.NT JAM IN TRAY 1
Description Recommended action
A print cartridge or other supply posing as genuine HP supply does not pass an authentication test.
The MFP cannot read or write to at least one print cartridge e-label or an e-label is missing from a print cartridge.
10.00.<YY> = E-label is damaged.
10.10.<YY> = MFP cannot communicate with the e-label.
The MFP real time clock has experienced an error.
Replace the supply with genuine HP supply.
1.
2.
Reinstall the print cartridge, or install a new HP print cartridge.
Verify that connector J97 on the DC controller PCA is firmly seated.
Media is jammed in the envelope feeder.
Whenever the MFP is turned off and then turned on again, set the time and date at the control panel.
If the error persists, you might need to replace the formatter.
Remove the jammed media from the envelope feeder. Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog box.
1.
Clear all jammed media.
Media is jammed in the output bin.
Use this list to determine the exact location of the jam:
13.12.07 = Staple cartridge
13.12.08 = Output bin paper-present sensor (media is stuck)
13.12.09 = Output bin inlet sensor (media is stuck)
13.12.10 = Output bin inlet sensor (media did not reach the sensor at the appropriate time)
13.12.11 = Media is present in the output bin when the MFP is turned on.
13.31.00 = Media is jammed in the reversing assembly.
A staple is jammed in the external stapling device.
The tray 1 pickup solenoid might be defective.
2.
Verify that connector J50 on the DC controller PCA is firmly seated.
3.
Verify that the two connectors that are on the rear of the reversing assembly are installed.
4.
Use the component diagnostic test to test three motors: switchback motor, intermediate switchback motor, output motor.
5.
Use the component diagnostic test to test two solenoids: face-up/face-down solenoid (SL105) and alienation solenoid (SL106).
6.
Use the manual sensor test to test two sensors: paper-delivery sensor PS109
(sensor “K”) and reversing-paper sensor PS110 (sensor “H”).
7.
If any of these components fail, replace the reversing assembly.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog box.
Remove the jammed media from tray 1.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog box.
ENWW Control-panel messages 383
Table 6-1
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message Description Recommended action
If the message persists, open the
Troubleshooting
menu and touch
Component Test
. Run the test for
MP
Tray Solenoid
. If the solenoid is defective, replace it.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog box.
13.JJ.NT JAM IN TRAY X - Clear jam, then touch OK
Media is jammed in the specified tray.
13.01.00 = Media did not arrive at the prefeed sensor (PS102) within the specified time.
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE DUPLEXER
Remove duplexer from lower left area
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE LEFT OUTPUT
AREA Remove output bin and duplexer
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE RIGHT ACCESS
DOOR Open all right access doors
ABOVE tray X
13.02.00 = Media did not arrive at the topof-page sensor (PS103) within the specified time.
13.13.00 = Media is stuck inside the duplexer.
Media is jammed in the output area.
Media is jammed inside the jam-access door for the tray that is indicated.
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE TOP COVER AREA
Media is jammed in the top cover area.
13.02.00 = Media is stopped under the topof-page sensor (PS103).
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog box.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog box.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog box.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog box.
13.05.00 = Media did not arrive at the fuserdelivery sensor (PS108) within the specified time.
13.09.00 = Media is jammed under the reversing paper sensor (PS110).
13.20.00 = The pre-feed sensor (PS102), the top-of-page sensor (PS103), or the fuser-delivery sensor (PS108) detected media inside the MFP when it was turned on.
13.21.00 = The top cover was opened during printing, or the top-cover switch
(SW101) is defective.
13.31.00 = Media did not arrive at the reversing paper sensor (PS110) within the specified time.
13.33.00 = Media did not arrive at the paper-delivery sensor (PS109) within the specified time.
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE TOP COVER AREA
Remove print cartridge
Media is jammed in the top cover area and you must remove the print cartridge to clear the jam.
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE TRAY 2 AREA
Media is jammed in tray 2.
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE TRAY 2 RIGHT
DOOR
There is a jam inside the tray 2 right door.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog box.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog box.
Open the tray 2 right access door, remove any jammed paper, and then close the door.
384 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Table 6-1
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
13.JJ.NT JAM Then open and close top cover
13.JJ.NT JAMS INSIDE TOP COVER
AREA Remove print cartridge
13.JJ.NT PAPER JAM OPEN INPUT
TRAYS
20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY - To
Continue Touch OK
21 PAGE TOO COMPLEX - To Continue
Touch OK
22 EIO X BUFFER OVERFLOW - To
Continue Touch OK
22 EMBEDDED I/O BUFFER OVERFLOW
- To Continue Touch OK
30.1.10 Scanner Failure
30.1.6 Scanner Failure
Description
There has been a fault with the pick mechanism in a tray.
Media is jammed in more than one location inside the top cover area. You must remove the print cartridge to clear the jams.
Media is jammed inside one or more of the trays.
The MFP received more data than can fit in the available memory. You might have tried to transfer too many macros, soft fonts, or complex graphics.
The page formatting process was not fast enough for the MFP.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog box.
Touch
OK
to print the transferred data
(some data might be lost), and then simplify the print job or install additional memory.
Too much data was sent to the EIO card in the specified slot (X). An incorrect communications protocol might be in use.
Too much data was sent to the embedded
HP Jetdirect print server.
The ADF fan is not operating.
The ADF fan operates only during a scan process.
This is a scanner-fan error. This fan is located in the base of the scanner assembly. It operates whenever the scanner lamp is illuminated or whenever the scanner flatbed motor is rotating. This fan also operates during the MFP initialization sequence.
Recommended action
Remove any misprinted paper from the output bins. Check all trays to ensure media sizes and types are supported. Open and close the top cover.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog box.
Touch
OK
to print the transferred data.
(Some data might be lost.) If this message appears often, simplify the print job.
Touch
OK
to print the transferred data.
(Some data might be lost.)
Check the host configuration.
Touch
OK
to print the transferred data.
(Some data might be lost.)
1.
Remove the ADF rear cover and watch the fan during a scan process.
2.
Verify that the fan connection on the
ADF intermediate PCA is firmly seated.
3.
If the fan does not rotate, replace the
ADF.
1.
During the MFP initialization sequence, try to listen to this fan to find out if it is operating.
2.
Verify that connector CN108 on the scanner-controller PCA is firmly seated. Also make sure that the connection for the fan in the base of the scanner assembly is firmly seated.
30.1.8 Scanner Failure
This is a scanner-calibration error. The scanner might be locked, or a cable might not be connected correctly.
During the MFP initialization sequence, the scanner optical assembly moves from its home position to the calibration strip. If this movement does not occur, this error appears.
3.
If all the connectors are secure but the fan is not operating, replace the fan.
1.
Raise the ADF, and make sure that the scanner lock is in the unlocked position.
2.
Turn on the MFP and watch to see if the optical assembly moves. If it does not move, remove the scanner glass to see if anything is hindering the optical assembly from moving.
3.
Make sure that the optical-assembly drive belt is installed correctly.
ENWW Control-panel messages 385
Table 6-1
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
30.1.YY SCANNER FAILURE
40 BAD EIO X TRANSMISSION - To
Continue Touch OK
Description
An error has occurred in the scanner. Use the following list to identify specific errors:
30.1.1 = The scanner cover is open.
30.1.2 = A jam has occurred in the ADF.
30.1.3 = The ADF could not pick up the paper.
30.1.6 = An error has occurred at the scanner fan. (See the separate entry for this error.)
30.1.7 = A communication error has occurred in the scanner.
30.1.8 = A scanner-calibration error has occurred. (See the separate entry for this error.)
30.1.10 = An error has occurred at the ADF fan. (See the separate entry for this error.)
30.1.15 = Scanner initialization failed.
30.1.18 = An error occurred on the scanner
PCA.
30.1.19 = An error occurred at the scanner lamp.
Recommended action
4.
Verify that the connector CN106 on the scanner-controller PCA is firmly seated.
5.
Verify that the connector CN109 on the scanner-controller PCA is firmly seated. Also verify that the connector for the scanner-home-position sensor is firmly seated.
1.
Turn the MFP off and then on to try to clear the message.
2.
4.
If the message indicates that a jam has occurred, clear the jam.
3.
Verify that the cable between the print engine and the scanner is securely connected.
Upgrade the firmware.
5.
If you are unable to resolve the problem, replace the scanner assembly.
30.1.22 = A fatal hardware error has occurred in the scanner.
30.1.23 = A scanner-calibration error has occurred.
30.1.24 = The ADF jam-access door is open.
30.1.25 = A general error has occurred in the scanner or ADF. This error is most likely a memory corruption.
30.1.29 = The ADF output bin is full.
30.1.36 = The scanning-firmware upgrade failed. The MFP automatically tries to upgrade the firmware again the next time the MFP is turned on.
The connection between the MFP and the
EIO card in the specified slot has been broken.
Touch
OK
to clear the error message and continue printing.
386 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Table 6-1
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message Description
40 BAD SERIAL TRANSMISSION - To
Continue Touch OK
A serial data error (parity, framing, or line overrun) occurred as data was being sent by the computer.
A temporary printing error has occurred.
40 EMBEDDED I/O BAD TRANSMISSION
- To Continue Touch OK
41.3 LOAD TRAY XX <TYPE> <SIZE>
This is typically caused if two or more sheets of media stick together in the MFP or if the tray is not adjusted correctly.
Recommended action
Touch
OK
to clear the error message.
(Data will be lost.)
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
41.3 LOAD TRAY XX <TYPE> <SIZE> -
To Use Another Tray Touch OK
41.3 MEDIA TOO SHORT CANNOT
DUPLEX
41.3 MEDIA TOO SHORT CANNOT SEND
TO FACE DOWN OUTPUT BIN
41.<X> Error
The specified tray is loaded with media that is longer or shorter in the feed direction than the size adjusted for the tray.
The MFP cannot print on both sides of the selected media because the media does not meet the minimum length specification.
The MFP cannot deliver the selected media face-down because the media does not meet the minimum length specification.
A temporary printing error occurred.
41.2 = Beam-detect misprint error
Reload the tray with the correct media size.
Reconfigure the size in a tray so that the
MFP will use a tray that contains the size required for the print job. Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog box.
Touch
OK
to use another tray. Reconfigure the size in a tray so that the MFP will use a tray that is loaded with the size of media required for the print job. If the message does not clear automatically from the control-panel display, turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
Select single-sided printing or load a longersize media. Resend the job.
49.XXXXX ERROR - To Continue Turn
Off Then On
A critical firmware error has occurred.
This type of error can be caused by invalid print commands, corrupt data, or invalid operations.
In some instances, electrical noise in the cable can corrupt data during transmission to the MFP. Other causes include poorquality parallel cables, poor connections, or specific software programs.
Sometimes, the formatter itself is at fault, which is usually indicated by a
79.XXXX
ERROR - To Continue Turn Off Then On
message.
Select the face-up output option, or load a longer-size media in the tray. Resend the job.
Touch
OK
to clear the error. If the error is not cleared, turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
If these errors become a frequent problem, replace the DC controller PCA.
1.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the
MFP on.
2.
Upgrade the firmware.
3.
Try printing a job from a different software program. If the job prints, go back to the first program and try printing a different file. If the message appears only with a certain software program or print job, contact the software vendor for assistance.
4.
If the message persists when using different software programs and attempting specific print jobs, disconnect all of the cables that connect the MFP to the network or a computer.
5.
Turn the MFP off.
6.
Remove all DIMMs and flash-memory cards.
7.
Remove all of the EIO devices.
ENWW Control-panel messages 387
Table 6-1
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
50.X FUSER ERROR
51.XY ERROR - To Continue Turn Off
Then On
52.XY ERROR - To Continue Turn Off
Then On
53.10.0X - Error Unsupported DIMM
54.<XX> Error
54.<XX> Error
Description
A fuser error has occurred.
50.1 = Low fuser temp
50.2 = Fuser warm up service
50.3 = High fuser temp
50.4 = Faulty fuser
50.5 = Inconsistent fuser
A temporary printing error has occurred.
51.10 = Beam detect error
51.20 = Laser error
A temporary printing error has occurred.
52.0 = Scanner error
52.1 = Scanner startup error
52.2 = Scanner rotation error
A memory error has occurred.
53.10.01 = Unsupported memory/DIMM
A sensor error has occurred.
54.01 = Temperature
A sensor-related error has occurred.
Recommended action
8.
Turn the MFP on.
9.
If the error message disappears, reinstall each DIMM, flash-memory card, and EIO device individually, making sure to turn the MFP power off and then on again as you install each device.
10.
Replace the component that caused the error message.
1.
Turn the MFP off, and allow it to cool.
2.
Verify that the correct model of fuser is installed.
3.
Verify that the correct voltage fuser is installed.
4.
Reinstall the fuser, and check the connection between the fuser and the
MFP. Replace the connector if it is damaged.
5.
Replace the fuser.
6.
Replace the DC controller PCA.
7.
Replace the power supply.
1.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the
MFP on.
2.
Reseat the connectors between the laser/scanner and dc controller PCA
(J83 and J84).
3.
Replace the laser/scanner assembly.
4.
Replace the dc controller PCA.
1.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the
MFP on.
2.
Reseat the connectors between the laser/scanner and dc controller PCA
(J83 and J84).
3.
Replace the laser/scanner assembly.
4.
Replace the dc controller PCA.
Remove the unsupported DIMM, and then try using a different DIMM.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on. If the error reappears, record the message and contact support.
Turn the device off then on. If the error reappears, write down the message and contact HP support.
388 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Table 6-1
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message Description
55.05 Error - To continue turn off then on
This Remote Firmware Upgrade (RFU) error message occurs when an upgrade on the firmware is being performed and something has happened that prevented the upgrade.
55.XX.YY DC CONTROLLER ERROR - To
Continue Turn Off Then On
The print engine is not communicating with the formatter.
55.01.YY = Incoming parity error
56.X ERROR - To Continue Turn Off
Then On
55.02.YY = Outgoing parity error
55.04.YY = Communications timeout
The input device or output device is unknown.
56.1 = Unknown input device
56.2 = Unknown output device
57.01 Error - To continue turn off then on
The DC controller fan (FN104) is not functioning.
57.03 Error - To continue turn off then on
The print-cartridge fan (FN102) is not functioning.
57.04 Error - To continue turn off then on
The main fan (FN101) is not functioning.
57.05 Error - To continue turn off then on
The duplexing-unit fan (FN107) is not functioning.
Recommended action
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
1.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the
MFP on.
2.
For 56.1 errors, reinstall all of the input devices (optional 500-sheet feeders or the envelope feeder.) For 56.2 errors, reinstall the output bin, the stapler/ stacker, or the 3-bin mailbox.
3.
Remove all non-HP paper-handling devices.
1.
Verify that the connector J66 on the
DC controller is firmly seated.
2.
Listen for the fan to operate while the
MFP is initializing.
3.
If the fan does not operate during the initialization sequence, replace it.
1.
Verify that the connector J78 on the
DC controller is firmly seated.
2.
Listen for the fan to operate while the
MFP is initializing.
3.
If the fan does not operate during the initialization sequence, replace it.
1.
Verify that connector J64 on the DC controller is firmly seated.
2.
Listen for the fan to operate while the
MFP is initializing.
3.
If the fan does not operate during the initialization sequence, replace it.
1.
Verify that the connector J44 on the dc controller is firmly seated.
2.
Listen for the fan to operate while the
MFP is initializing.
3.
If the fan does not operate during the initialization sequence, replace the duplex-printing unit.
ENWW Control-panel messages 389
Table 6-1
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
57.07 Error - To continue turn off then on
58.XX ERROR - To Continue Turn Off
Then On
59.XY ERROR - To Continue Turn Off
Then On
60.XX ERROR - To Continue Turn Off
Then On
Description
The reversing-unit fan (FN103) is not functioning.
Recommended action
1.
Verify that the connector J65 on the dc controller is firmly seated.
2.
Listen for the fan to operate while the
MFP is initializing.
3.
If the fan does not operate during the initialization sequence, replace it.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
For 58.2 errors:
A memory error has been detected.
58.2 = Air temperature sensor (TH3)
58.3 = DC controller PCA
58.4 = Engine power supply
1.
Reconnect the connector J63 on the engine power supply. The air temperature sensor is the thermistor
(TH3) that is mounted across the main cooling fan (FN101).
2.
Replace the air-temperature sensor.
3.
Replace the engine power supply.
For 58.3 errors, replace the DC controller
PCA.
An error has occurred in one of the motors.
59.0 = Main motor error
59.1 = Main-motor startup error
59.2 = Main-motor rotation error
For 58.4 errors, replace the engine power supply.
1.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the
MFP on.
2.
Reconnect the wire-harness on the
DC controller PCA for the motor that is indicated. For the main motor, this is connector J98. For the print-cartridge motor, this is connector J86.
59.4 = Print-cartridge-motor error
59.A = Print-cartridge-motor error
3.
Replace the motor.
4.
Replace the DC controller PCA.
The tray specified by
X
is not lifting correctly.
1.
Install the tray and listen carefully. You should be able to hear the paper stack being lifted. You can also watch the paper-level indicator on the front of the tray to see if it moves.
2.
For tray 2, verify that connector J93 on the DC controller PCA is firmly seated.
This connector is for the lift motor.
3.
For trays 3, 4, or 5, verify that connector J91 on the DC controller
PCA is firmly seated.
4.
If the lift motor for that tray is not functional, first verify that nothing is obstructing its movement. Replace the lift motor for the tray if necessary.
390 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Table 6-1
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
62 NO SYSTEM - To Continue Turn Off
Then On
Description
A problem exists with the MFP firmware.
Recommended action
1.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the
MFP on.
64 ERROR - To Continue Turn Off Then
On
65.12.99 Output accessory disconnected
66.XY.ZZ OUTPUT DEVICE FAILURE
68.X PERMANENT STORAGE FULL - To
Continue Touch OK
68.X PERMANENT STORAGE WRITE
FAIL - To Continue Touch OK
68.X STORAGE ERROR SETTINGS
CHANGED - To Continue Touch OK
69.X ERROR - To Continue Turn Off
Then On
A scan buffer error occurred.
An output accessory (stapler/stacker or 3– bin mailbox) is not connected properly.
An error occurred in an external paperhandling accessory.
66.00.15 = The output device was removed and then replaced while the MFP power was on.
66.12.01 = Output-lift roller or paddle-motor error
66.12.02 = Jogger-motor error
2.
Upgrade the firmware.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
Make sure that the cable that connects the stapler/stacker or the 3-bin mailbox to the
MFP is fully seated and that the screws are tightened.
1.
Turn the MFP power off.
2.
Check that the accessory is properly seated on and connected to the MFP, without any gaps between the MFP and the accessory. If the accessory uses cables, disconnect and reconnect them.
66.12.03 = Stapler motor error
The MFP NVRAM is full. Some settings saved in the NVRAM might have been reset to the factory defaults. Printing can continue, but some unexpected functions might occur if an error occurred in permanent storage.
3.
Turn the MFP power on.
4.
If this message persists, replace the output device.
Touch
OK
to clear the message. If the message is not cleared, turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
68.0 = Onboard-NVRAM failure
68.1 = Memory-DIMM or hard-disk failure
The duplex printing unit is not functioning.
For 68.0 errors, perform an NVRAM initialization.
For 68.1 errors:
1.
Use the HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the hard disk.
2.
Reinitialize the hard disk.
3.
Replace the hard disk.
Touch
OK
to clear the message. If the message is not cleared, turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
The MFP NVRAM is failing to write. Printing can continue, but some unexpected functions might occur if an error occurred in permanent storage.
One or more MFP settings are invalid and have been reset to the factory-default settings. Printing can continue, but some unexpected functions might occur if an error occurred in permanent storage.
1.
Touch
OK
to clear the message. If the message is not cleared, turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
2.
Determine which settings have changed by printing a control-panel menu map.
3.
Perform an NVRAM initialization.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
ENWW Control-panel messages 391
Table 6-1
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
79.XXXX ERROR - To Continue Turn Off
Then On
8X.YYYY EIO ERROR
The EIO accessory card has encountered a critical error.
8X.YYYY EMBEDDED JETDIRECT ERROR
The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has encountered a critical error.
ACTION NOT CURRENTLY AVAILABLE
FOR TRAY X TRAY SIZE CANNOT BE
ANY SIZE/ANY CUSTOM
A duplexed (2-sided) document was requested from a tray that is set to
Size
or
Any Custom
Any
. Duplexing is not allowed from a tray configured to
Any Size
or
Any Custom
.
Authentication required
Authentication has been enabled for this feature or destination. A username and password are required.
A user name and password are required.
Authentication required to use this feature
Bad Duplexer Connection
The duplex-printing accessory is not connected correctly to the MFP.
Bad Envelope Feeder Connection - To
Continue Turn Off Then On
Check the glass and remove any paper, then press START
Chosen personality not available. - To
Continue Touch OK.
Close top cover
Description
A critical hardware error occurred.
The envelope feeder is not connected properly.
A digital send or copy job has been performed from the scanner glass, but the original document needs to be removed.
A print job requested a MFP language
(personality) that is not available for this
MFP. The job will not print and will be cleared from memory.
The top cover is open.
Recommended action
1.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the
MFP on.
2.
If the problem persists, reseat the firmware memory card.
3.
Remove and reinstall the formatter.
4.
Upgrade the firmware.
Try the following actions to clear the message.
1.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the
MFP on.
2.
Turn the MFP off, reseat the EIO accessory, and then turn the MFP on.
3.
Replace the EIO accessory.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP on.
Select another tray or reconfigure the tray.
Type the user name and password, or contact the network administrator.
Type the user name and password, or contact the network administrator.
1.
Remove and reinstall the duplexer.
2.
If this message persists, the connector between the duplexer and the engine might be damaged. Inspect the connector, J151L, on the duplexer. If the connector is damaged, replace the duplexer.
3.
If the message still persists, replace the DC controller.
Remove and reinstall the envelope feeder.
Remove the original document from the scanner glass and press
Print the job by using a printer driver for a different printer language, or add the requested language to the MFP (if possible). To see a list of available personalities, print a Configuration page.
Close the top cover.
Start .
392 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Table 6-1
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Digital Send server is not responding
Contact administrator
Document feeder bin full
Document feeder cover open
Document feeder empty
Document feeder pick error
Description
The MFP cannot communicate with the server.
The document feeder output bin holds 50 sheets of paper. The MFP stops when the bin is full.
The document feeder cover is open.
Recommended action
Verify the network connection. Contact the network administrator.
Usually, emptying the ADF output bin clears this message. If the message persists, check the following items:
1.
Verify that the ADF output-bin-full sensor flag can move freely.
2.
Verify that the connector at the sensor flag is seated correctly.
You can use the scanner tests
(
Troubleshooting
>
Scanner Tests
) to test this sensor. Lift up on the sensor flag to simulate the output bin being full. Observe whether the status changes on the controlpanel display. If the status does not change, make sure that the connectors are firmly seated. Clean or replace the sensor if necessary.
The ADF cover-open sensor is located directly above the ADF feed motor. When the ADF jam-access cover is closed, a plastic protrusion that is on the bottom of this cover blocks the sensor, and the scanner-controller PCA detects that the cover is closed.
If you have recently disassembled the ADF, make sure that all of the covers have been installed correctly and make sure that the wiring to this sensor is firmly seated. Also verify that CN105 on the scanner-controller
PCA is firmly seated.
Open the
Troubleshooting
menu, and touch
Scanner Tests
and then
Sensors
.
Open and close the ADF jam-access cover and observe whether the status changes on the control-panel display. If the status does not change, make sure that the connectors are firmly seated. Clean or replace the sensor if necessary.
The user pressed
Start
, but there is nothing in document feeder or on the scanner glass
(if the document feeder is closed).
The document feeder experienced an error while picking media.
Place originals in the document feeder or scanner glass, and then press
Start
.
Clear any jam. Make sure that you have not overloaded the document feeder. Do not load more than 50 sheets of 20 lb paper in the document feeder.
If the message persists, make sure that the
ADF mylar sheet, the ADF pickup-roller assembly, and the ADF separation pad are installed correctly. If any of these components is dirty or worn, replace the component.
ENWW Control-panel messages 393
Table 6-1
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Install Black Cartridge
Description
The print cartridge has been removed or has been installed incorrectly.
Recommended action
The ADF-input motor might be defective.
Observe the motor to see if it is rotating or attempting to pull paper through the paper path. You can use the scanner tests
(
Troubleshooting
>
Scanner Tests
) to test this motor. Run the ADF input motor test and the ADF input motor reverse test. If the motor does not rotate, verify that the connector CN103 is seated correctly on the scanner-controller PCA and that the connector on the motor is seated correctly.
If the motor is defective, replace the ADF.
DUPLEXER ERROR Remove duplexer
Install duplexer with power off
E-mail Gateway did not accept the job because the attachment was too large.
The duplexer has been removed.
The scanned documents have exceeded the size limit of the server.
Reinstall the duplexer. (Any print jobs at the
MFP might be lost.)
Send the job again using a lower resolution, smaller file size setting, or fewer pages.
Contact the network administrator to enable sending the scanned documents by using multiple e-mails.
A gateway has exceeded the time out value. Validate the SMTP IP address.
E-mail Gateway did not respond. Job failed.
E-mail Gateway rejected the job because of the addressing information. Job failed.
One or more of the e-mail addresses is incorrect.
Send the job again with the correct addresses.
Try to send the job again.
Error executing Digital Send job. Job failed.
HP Digital Sending: Delivery Error
Insert or close tray XX
A digital send job has failed and cannot be delivered.
A digital send job has failed and cannot be delivered.
The specified tray is missing or open.
Try to send the job again.
1.
Insert or close the specified tray to continue.
2.
You can use the Manual Sensor Test to test the operation of this switch
(SW102). In the diagnostic test, this switch is represented by the letter “S.”
If the control-panel display shows
“S3,” then A4-size media is installed,
“S5” indicates that letter-size media is installed, and “S7” indicates that no tray is installed.
3.
Replace the media-size detection switch (SW102).
4.
Replace the DC controller PCA.
1.
Make sure that the print cartridge is firmly seated and that the contact points are clean.
2.
Replace the print cartridge.
3.
Replace the DC controller PCA.
4.
Replace the engine power supply PCA.
394 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Table 6-1
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Insufficient memory to load fonts/data
<device> - To Continue Touch OK
Jam in Document Feeder
Description Recommended action
The MFP does not have enough memory to load the data (for example, fonts or macros) from the location specified.
Media is jammed in the document feeder.
Touch
OK
to continue without this information. If the message persists, add more memory.
Clear the jam.
Load envelope feeder <type> <size> - To
Use Another Tray, Touch OK
Load Tray 1 <type> <size>
Manually feed <type> <size>
Manually feed output stack Then touch
OK to print second sides
The envelope feeder is empty.
The tray is empty or configured for a different size than the size requested.
The specified job requires manual feed from tray 1.
The first side of a manual duplex job has printed and the MFP is waiting for a user to insert the output stack to complete the second side.
If the message persists, make sure that the
ADF mylar sheet, the ADF pickup-roller assembly, and the ADF separation pad are installed correctly. If any of these components is dirty or worn, replace the component.
The ADF-read motor might be defective.
Observe the motor to see if it is rotating or attempting to pull paper through the paper path. You can use the scanner tests
(
Troubleshooting
>
Scanner Tests
) to test this motor. Run the ADF read motor test and the ADF read motor reverse test. If the motor does not rotate, verify that connector CN103 is seated correctly on the scanner-controller PCA and that the connector on the motor is seated correctly.
If the motor is defective, replace the ADF.
The ADF paper-present sensor might be defective. Make sure that the sensor flag can move freely. You can use the scanner tests (
Troubleshooting
>
Scanner Tests
) to test this sensor. Manually move the flag and observe whether the status changes on the control-panel display. If the status does not change, make sure that the wiring for the sensor is firmly seated. Clean or replace the sensor if necessary.
1.
Load the envelope feeder.
2.
Replace the tray 1 sensor lever
(PS105).
3.
Replace the DC controller PCA.
1.
Make sure that the tray is loaded with the media type and size that is indicated.
2.
Replace the tray 1 sensor lever
(PS105).
3.
Replace the DC controller PCA.
Load the requested media into tray 1.
To override the message, touch
OK
to use a type and size of media that is available in another tray.
Insert the printed stack in the input tray, and then touch
OK
.
ENWW Control-panel messages 395
Table 6-1
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Moving solenoid To exit press STOP
Non HP supply installed Economode disabled
Order Black Cartridge
Order document feeder kit
Order maintenance kit
Order supplies
Output Paper Path Open
PAPER WRAPPED AROUND FUSER
Please turn device off and install hard disk.
Processing Digital Send Job
Reattach output bin
Description
This message appears during a component test when the component that is moving is a solenoid.
A non-HP supply or a refilled HP supply has been installed.
Recommended action
Touch
Stop
to exit the test. This problem affects printing, so some scan functions might still be available.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog box.
If you are certain that the print cartridge is a genuine HP print cartridge, make sure that connector J97 on the DC controller PCA is connected.
The number of pages remaining for the print cartridge has reached the low threshold. The MFP was set to stop printing when a supply needs to be ordered.
If the problem persists, replace the DC controller PCA.
Touch
OK
to continue printing until the print cartridge is out of toner.
1.
Install a new print cartridge.
2.
If this message appears after you install a new print cartridge, the new print cartridge might be defective.
Install a different cartridge.
3.
Replace the DC controller PCA.
This warning message appears one month before the end of life when the maintenance interval has been reached.
Printing can continue.
This warning message appears one month before the end of life when the maintenance interval has been reached.
Printing can continue.
This message displays if the
Replace
Black Cartridge
option is set to
Stop at out
or
Override at out
and multiple supplies are low.
4.
Replace the engine power-supply PCA.
Order a document feeder kit. To clear the message, touch
OK
to return to the Home screen. Then scroll to and touch
Resets
.
Then touch
Clear Document Feeder
Message
.
Order a maintenance kit. To clear the message, touch
Then touch
OK
to return to the Home screen. Then scroll to and touch
Order a new black print cartridge,
Resets
maintenance kit, or document feeder kit.
.
Clear Maintenance Message
.
The paper path between the MFP and the output device is open and must be closed before printing can continue.
A jam has occurred because paper has wrapped around the fuser.
1.
If you have a 3-bin mailbox installed, make sure the jam-access door is closed.
2.
If you have a stapler/stacker installed, make sure the staple cartridge is snapped into position and that the staple-cartridge door is closed.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog box.
The requested job requires a hard disk, but the MFP does not have a hard disk installed.
Turn the MFP off and install a hard disk.
The device is sending an e-mail or fax.
The standard output bin was detached when the MFP was turned on, or the cable
Turn the MFP off. If you are using the stapler/stacker or the 3-bin mailbox, make
396 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Table 6-1
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message
Reinsert Duplexer - To Continue Turn
Off Then On
Replace cartridge
REPLACE DIMM <X> MEM TEST FAILURE
Right Access Door Open
Description
on the stapler/stacker or the 3-bin mailbox is not connected to the MFP.
The duplexer has been removed and must be reinstalled.
The print cartridge has reached the end of its life. Printing cannot continue.
A memory DIMM failed a test pattern.
The tray 2 jam-access-cover switch,
SW105, has detected that the jam-access cover on tray 2 is open.
Recommended action
sure that the cable is connected to the
MFP. Reattach the output bin, and then turn the MFP on. Observe the LED on the output device.
If the message persists, verify that connector J65 on the DC controller is firmly seated. Replace SW103 if necessary.
1.
Reinsert the duplexer in the MFP.
2.
If the message persists, the connection between the duplexer and the MFP might be faulty. Remove the duplexer and inspect the connectors:
J44 on the DC controller and J151 on the duplexer. Replace the duplexer if necessary.
1.
Replace the print cartridge.
2.
If this message appears after you install a new print cartridge, the new print cartridge might be defective.
Install a different cartridge.
3.
Replace the DC controller PCA.
4.
Replace the engine power-supply PCA.
Reseat or replace the specified DIMM.
Open the
Troubleshooting
menu and touch
Manual Sensor Test
. On the controlpanel display, this switch is represented by the letter “P.” Open and close the tray 2 jam-access door and observe whether the status changes on the control-panel display. If the message persists, verify that the connector J87 on the DC controller is firmly seated. Replace SW105 if necessary.
Contact the network administrator.
SANITIZING DISK <X>% COMPLETE Do not power off
SCAN FAILURE Press 'Start' to rescan
The hard disk is being cleaned.
Too Many Pages In Job To Staple
Tray <XX> Open
The scan was unsuccessful and the document needs to be rescanned.
The maximum number of sheets the stapler can staple is 30.
The tray 2 paper-size-detection switch,
SW102, has detected that tray 2 is not installed or that no media is present.
If necessary, reposition the document to rescan it, and then press Start .
For print jobs that have more than 30 pages, staple them manually.
1.
Verify that connector J90 on the DC controller is firmly seated.
2.
You can use the Manual Sensor Test
(
Troubleshooting
>
Manual Sensor
Test
to test the operation of this switch. Status “S5” indicates that lettersize media is installed in the tray.
Status “S3” indicates that A4-size media is installed in the tray. Status
“S7” indicates that the tray is not installed in the MFP. Pull the tray out
ENWW Control-panel messages 397
Table 6-1
Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message Description Recommended action
Unable to connect
UNABLE TO COPY
Unable to mopy job
UNABLE TO SEND
Unable to send Fax. Please check fax configuration.
Unable to store job
USB accessory error
USB storage <X> not functional
The MFP was unable to copy the document. To temporarily hide this message in order to fax or send to e-mail, touch
IGNORE
.
To temporarily hide this message in order to fax or send to e-mail, touch
HIDE
.
A mopy job cannot be mopied because of a memory, disk, or configuration problem.
To temporarily hide this message in order to fax or send to e-mail, touch
IGNORE
.
The MFP was unable to send the fax.
and reinsert it while you observe the status on the control-panel display. If the status does not change, replace
SW102.
For complete information about solving fax problems, see the
HP LaserJet Analog Fax
300 User Guide
.
A job cannot be stored because of a memory, disk, or configuration problem.
Power requirements for a USB accessory attached to the MFP are beyond supported limits.
A parameter in a USB storage accessory is not working properly.
Detach the USB accessory, and then turn the MFP off then on. Try a similar accessory that has its own power supply or requires less power.
Turn the MFP off. Disconnect the USB storage accessory and replace it with a new
USB storage accessory. Turn the MFP on.
USB storage <X> removed
A USB storage accessory has been disconnected since the MFP was turned on.
The user name or password was typed incorrectly.
To continue using the USB accessory, turn off the MFP and connect the accessory again. Otherwise, turn the MFP off then on to clear the message.
Retype the user name and password.
User name or password is incorrect.
Please re-enter.
User Name, Job Name, or PIN is missing.
One or more of the required items has not been selected or typed.
Warming up scanner
The scanner is warming up and cannot be used.
Select the correct user name and job name, and type the correct PIN.
The message will cease when the scanner is ready to be used.
398 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Common causes of jams
The device is jammed.
Cause Solution
The media does not meet specifications.
A component is installed incorrectly.
You are using media that has already passed through a device or copier.
An input tray is loaded incorrectly.
Use only media that meets HP specifications. See Select print media on page 10 .
Verify that the print cartridge is correctly installed.
Do not use media that has been previously printed on or copied.
Remove any excess media from the input tray. Make sure that the stack is below the maximum stack height mark in
the tray. See Media specifications on page 10 .
The media is skewed.
The media is binding or sticking together.
The media is removed before it settles into the output bin.
During two-sided printing, you removed the paper before the second side of the document was printed.
The input-tray guides are not adjusted correctly. Adjust them so they hold the stack firmly in place without bending it.
Remove the media, flex it, rotate it 180°, or flip it over.
Reload the media into the input tray.
Reset the device. Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it.
Reset the device and print the document again. Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it.
The media is in poor condition.
The internal tray rollers are not picking up the media.
Replace the media.
If the media is heavier than 120 g/m 2 (32 lb), it might not be picked from the tray.
Replace the media.
The media has rough or jagged edges.
The media is perforated or embossed.
Not all device packing material was removed.
Perforated or embossed media does not separate easily.
Feed single sheets from tray 1.
Device supply items have reached the end of their useful life.
Check the device control panel for messages prompting you to replace supplies, or print a supplies status page to verify
the remaining life of the supplies. See Use information pages on page 82 .
Paper was not stored correctly.
Replace the paper in the trays. Paper should be stored in the original packaging in a controlled environment.
Verify that the packing tape, cardboard, and plastic shipping locks have been removed from the device.
1
If the device still continues to jam, contact HP Customer Support or your authorized HP service provider.
ENWW Common causes of jams 399
Clear jams
If a jam message appears on the control-panel display, look for jammed paper or other print media in the locations that are indicated in the following figure.
4
5
6
1
2
3
Top-cover and print-cartridge areas
Envelope-feeder area and tray 1 area (the envelope feeder is optional)
Tray 2 and optional 500-sheet feeder areas
Duplexing area (the duplexer is optional)
Output area
Document feeder
The following table lists the jam messages that might appear on the control-panel display. For information about clearing the jam, see the referenced section. Look for media in locations in addition to those that are indicated in the jam message. If the location of the jam is not obvious, look first in the top-cover area underneath the print cartridge.
Table 6-2
Control-panel messages for jams
Jam message
Jam in Document Feeder
Document feeder pick error
13.JJ.NT JAM IN ENVELOPE FEEDER - Clear jam, then touch OK
13.JJ.NT JAM IN OUTPUT BIN
13.JJ.NT JAM IN TRAY 1 - Clear jam, then touch OK
13.JJ.NT JAM IN TRAY 2
(or TRAY 3, 4 or 5)
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE DUPLEXER Remove duplexer from lower left area
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE LEFT OUTPUT AREA
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE RIGHT ACCESS DOOR
Procedure for clearing the jam
See Clear jams from the document feeder on page 413 .
See Clear jams from the document feeder on page 413 .
See Clear jams from the optional envelope-feeder area on page 403
.
See Clear jams from the output areas on page 409 .
See Clear jams from the tray 1 area on page 405 .
See Clear jams from the tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 areas on page 406
.
See Clear jams from the optional duplexer on page 408 .
See Clear jams from the output areas on page 409 .
See Clear jams from the tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 areas on page 406
.
400 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Table 6-2
Control-panel messages for jams (continued)
Jam message Procedure for clearing the jam
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE TOP COVER AREA
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE TRAY 2 AREA
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE TRAY 2 RIGHT ACCESS DOOR
13.JJ.NT JAM INSIDE TOP COVER AREA
13.JJ.NT PAPER JAM OPEN INPUT TRAYS
13.JJ.NT JAM IN STAPLER
See Clear jams from the top-cover and print-cartridge areas on page 401
.
See Clear jams from the tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 areas on page 406
.
See Clear jams from the tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 areas on page 406
.
See Clear jams from the top-cover and print-cartridge areas on page 401
.
See Clear jams from the tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 areas on page 406
.
See Clear staple jams on page 416 .
When clearing jams, be very careful not to tear jammed media. If a small piece of media is left in the
NOTE
Loose toner might remain in the device after a jam and cause temporary print-quality problems. These problems should clear up within a few pages.
Clear jams from the top-cover and print-cartridge areas
Clear jams that occur during the printing process by using this procedure.
1.
Open the top cover and remove the print cartridge.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover the print cartridge with a sheet of paper while it is outside of the device.
2.
Use the green handle to lift the paper-access plate.
ENWW Clear jams 401
3.
Slowly pull the jammed media out of the device. Do not tear the media.
4.
If jammed media is difficult to remove, open tray 1 and remove the envelope-entrance cover. If media is present, remove it.
5.
Rotate the paper-release guide to check for additional jammed media underneath. If jammed media is present, remove it.
6.
Replace the envelope-entrance cover and close tray 1.
402 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
7.
Reinstall the print cartridge and close the top cover.
8.
If a jam message persists, jammed media is still in the device. Look for the jam in another location.
Clear jams from the optional envelope-feeder area
This section applies only to jams that occur when you are using an optional envelope feeder.
1.
Remove any envelopes that are loaded in the envelope feeder. Lower the envelope weight and lift the tray extension up, to the closed position.
2.
Press and hold the release button on the left side of the optional envelope feeder. Grasp both sides of the optional envelope feeder and carefully pull it out of the device.
ENWW Clear jams 403
3.
Slowly remove any jammed envelopes from the optional envelope feeder and from the device.
4.
Insert the optional envelope feeder into the device until it locks into place. Pull gently on the optional envelope feeder to be sure that it is securely in place.
5.
Fold down the envelope-feeder tray. Lift the envelope weight.
6.
Reload the envelopes, making sure that you push the bottom envelopes in slightly farther than the top envelopes.
7.
If a jam message persists, jammed media is still in the device. Look for the jam in another location.
404 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Clear jams from the tray 1 area
Use this procedure to clear jams that occur in the tray 1 input area.
1.
Open the top cover, open tray 1, and remove the print cartridge.
2.
Use the green handle to lift the paper-access plate.
3.
Slowly pull any jammed media out of the device. Do not tear the media.
4.
If jammed media is difficult to remove, remove the envelope-entrance cover. If media is present, remove it.
ENWW Clear jams 405
5.
Rotate the paper-release guide to check for additional jammed media underneath. If jammed media is present, remove it.
6.
Replace the envelope-entrance cover and close tray 1.
7.
Reinstall the print cartridge and close the top cover.
8.
If a jam message persists, jammed media is still in the device. Look for the jam in another location.
Clear jams from the tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 areas
Use this procedure to clear jams that occur in tray 2 or in the optional 500-sheet feeders.
1.
Pull the jam-access lever to open the jam-access cover.
406 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
ENWW
2.
Carefully pull out any jammed media from either the top or the bottom of the jam-access area.
NOTE
Use an upward or downward pulling motion to avoid tearing the media and to prevent toner from falling into the device.
3.
Close the jam-access cover.
4.
Slide the tray completely out of the device, and remove any damaged media from the tray.
5.
Slide the tray into the device.
6.
If a jam message persists, jammed media is still in the device. Look for the jam in another location.
Clear jams 407
Clear jams from the optional duplexer
If a jam occurs during a duplex printing job, use this procedure to check for the jam and to clear it.
1.
Remove the output bin (or remove the stapler/stacker or the mailbox).
2.
Remove the optional duplexer.
3.
Check for jammed paper in the optional duplexer. Carefully pull out the jammed paper.
4.
Set the duplexer aside.
5.
Check for jammed paper inside the device. Carefully pull out the jammed paper.
408 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
6.
Reinstall the duplexer.
7.
Reinstall the output bin (or reinstall the 3-bin mailbox or the stapler/stacker).
8.
If a jam message persists, jammed media is still in the device. Look for the jam in another location.
Clear jams from the output areas
Use this procedure to clear jams that occur in the output bin, the 3-bin mailbox, or the stapler/stacker.
1.
If you are using the standard output bin, slide the standard output bin away from the device.
2.
If you are using a 3-bin mailbox or a stapler/stacker, remove any media that is stacked, and then press and hold the release button on the top of the accessory. Slide the accessory away from the device.
ENWW Clear jams 409
3.
If the jammed media is inside the device, carefully pull the jammed media out of the device.
4.
If the jammed media is inside the 3-bin mailbox or the stapler/stacker, carefully pull the jammed media up and out of the device.
5.
If you are using a 3-bin mailbox, the jammed media might be completely inside the device.
Open the jam-access cover that is on the top of the 3-bin mailbox, and carefully pull the jammed media out of the mailbox.
6.
Reinstall the output-bin assembly, the 3-bin mailbox, or the stapler/stacker. Insert the device at an angle, and then slide it into the device.
7.
If a jam message persists, jammed media is still in the device. Look for the jam in another location.
Clear jams from the fuser
Use this procedure to clear jams that occur in the fuser.
1.
Turn the device off and wait 30 minutes for the fuser to cool.
WARNING!
The fuser is very hot. To avoid minor burns, wait 30 minutes for the fuser to cool before removing it from the device.
410 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
ENWW
2.
If you are using the standard output bin, grasp the handle at the bottom of the output-bin assembly, and pull it out and then up to remove it.
3.
If you are using a 3-bin mailbox or a stapler/stacker, remove any media that is stacked, and then press and hold the release button on the top of the device. Pull the device away from the device.
4.
Remove the optional duplexer or the duplex cover.
5.
If you cannot see the jammed media inside the fuser, skip to step 9.
6.
If you can see either the leading edge or the trailing edge of the jammed media inside the fuser, carefully pull it out.
Clear jams 411
7.
If you can see the jammed media, but neither the leading edge nor the trailing edge is visible, gently pull on the sides of the sheet of media until one edge becomes free. Then carefully pull the jammed media out of the fuser.
8.
If the media tears as you are removing it, turn the green dial on the fuser, and then carefully pull out the jammed media. Go to step 13.
9.
To remove the fuser-entrance guide, push inward at the left edge to free the left-side alignment pin. Then lift up slightly on the fuser-entrance guide, and remove it from the device. Place your forefingers on the blue levers on the bottom of each side of the fuser. Place your thumbs on the grip points on the top of each side of the fuser. Squeeze the blue levers up, and remove the fuser from the device.
10.
Open the black cover at the top of the fuser, and remove the jammed media.
11.
Reinstall the fuser. Push on the fuser with your thumbs to be sure it snaps securely into place.
412 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
12.
To reinstall the fuser-entrance guide, first insert the right-side mounting pin into the hole on the right side, and then lower the left-side mounting pin into the hole on the left side.
13.
Reinstall the duplexer or the duplex cover.
14.
Reinstall the output-bin assembly, the 3-bin mailbox, or the stapler/stacker. Insert the device at an angle, and then slide it into the device.
15.
If a jam message persists, jammed media is still in the device. Look for the jam in another location.
Clear jams from the document feeder
Use this procedure to clear jams from the document feeder.
1.
Lift the document-feeder input tray, and check for jammed media underneath the tray. Carefully remove any jammed media.
ENWW Clear jams 413
2.
Pull up on the document-feeder-cover-release lever, and open the document feeder cover.
Carefully remove any jammed media.
3.
Lift the green jam lever on the document guide, and then check for jammed media. Carefully remove any jammed media.
4.
Close the document feeder cover.
5.
If a jam message persists, jammed media is still in the device. Look for the jam in another location.
Solve repeated jams
Situation
General repeated jam problems
Solution
1.
Make sure that the media is loaded correctly in the trays and that all width guides are set correctly.
2.
Make sure that the tray is set for the size of media that is installed and that the tray is not overloaded.
3.
Try turning over the stack of media in the tray. If you are using prepunched or letterhead paper, try printing from tray 1.
4.
Do not use media that has been printed on previously or torn, worn, or irregular media.
5.
Check the media specifications. If media is outside of the recommended specifications, problems can occur.
414 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Situation Solution
6.
The device might be dirty. Clean the device.
7.
Check that all damaged or jammed media is removed from device.
Repeated jams in the document feeder
1.
The document feeder might be dirty. Clean the document feeder.
2.
Make sure that the media is loaded squarely and that the media-width guides are adjusted to the sides of the media stack.
3.
Make sure that no more than 50 sheets of 75g/m 2 (20 lb) bond paper are loaded in the document feeder.
4.
If the original document that is being copied has been folded or stapled, flatten it as much as you can and smooth any wrinkles. Make sure the pages are not stuck together where the staple was.
5.
Media that has been pre-punched or perforated in any way might be difficult to feed through the document feeder. If the leading edge of the document is excessively worn or frayed, try rotating the document 180 degrees before copying.
Paper-path test
The paper path test can be used to verify that various paper paths are working correctly or to troubleshoot problems with tray configuration.
1.
Scroll to and touch Administration .
2.
Scroll to and touch Troubleshooting .
3.
Scroll to and touch Paper Path Test .
4.
Touch Print Test Page .
ENWW Clear jams 415
Clear staple jams
The stapler is designed to avoid staple jams. To reduce the risk of staple jams, make sure that you observe the following media limits:
●
Plain media: 30 sheets of 75 g/m
2
(20 lb) media
Glossy media: 20 sheets
Thick media (128-199 g/m 2 [34-53 lb]): Stack height must not exceed 3 mm (0.27 inches)
Occasionally, staples become jammed in the optional stapler/stacker. If jobs are not being stapled correctly or are not being stapled at all, use the following procedure to clear staple jams.
1.
Turn off the device.
2.
Press and hold the release button on the top of the stapler/stacker. Pull the stapler/stacker away from the device.
3.
Open the staple-cartridge cover.
4.
To remove the staple cartridge, pull up on the green handle and pull out the staple cartridge.
416 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
ENWW
5.
Lift up on the small lever at the back of the staple cartridge.
6.
Remove the staples that protrude from the staple cartridge.
7.
Close the lever at the back of the staple cartridge. Be sure that it snaps into place.
8.
Reinsert the staple cartridge into the staple-cartridge holder, and push down on the green handle until it snaps into place.
9.
Close the staple-cartridge cover, and slide the stapler/stacker into the device.
Clear staple jams 417
Solve print-quality problems
Print-quality problems associated with media
Some print-quality problems arise from the use of inappropriate media.
●
Use media that meets HP specifications.
●
The surface of the media is too smooth. Use media that meets HP specifications.
●
The moisture content is uneven, too high, or too low. Use media from a different source or from an unopened ream.
●
Some areas of the media reject toner. Use media from a different source or from an unopened ream.
●
The letterhead you are using is printed on rough media. Use a smoother, xerographic media. If this solves your problem, ask the supplier of your letterhead to use media that meets the specifications for this device.
●
The media is excessively rough. Use a smoother, xerographic media.
●
The driver setting is incorrect.
●
The media that you are using is too heavy for the media type setting that you selected, and the toner is not fusing to the media.
Print-quality problems associated with the environment
If the device is operating in excessively humid or dry conditions, verify that the printing environment is within specifications.
Print-quality problems associated with jams
Make sure that all sheets are cleared from the paper path.
●
If the device recently jammed, print two to three pages to clean the device.
●
If the sheets do not pass through the fuser and cause image defects on subsequent documents, print three pages to clean the device. If the problem persists, print and process a cleaning page.
Overhead transparency defects
Overhead transparencies can contain any of the image-quality problems that appear in other types of media in addition to defects that are specific to transparencies. In addition, because transparencies are pliable, they can be affected by the media-handling components in the paper path.
NOTE
Allow transparencies to cool at least 30 seconds before handling them.
●
On the printer driver
Paper
tab, select
Transparency
as the media type. Also, make sure that the tray is correctly configured for transparencies.
●
Make sure that the transparencies meet the specifications for this monochrome HP LaserJet
MFP. For more information, consult the
HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide
.
418 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
●
Handle transparencies by the edges. Skin oil on the surface of transparencies can cause spots and smudges.
●
Small, random dark areas on the trailing edge of solid fill pages might be caused by transparencies sticking together in the output bin. Try printing the job in smaller batches.
●
To show the printed transparency, use a standard overhead projector instead of a reflective overhead projector.
Image defect examples
Light print (partial page)
Defect description
Printing is light on a portion of the page.
Possible causes
The print cartridge is not installed properly. The media might not meet HP specifications (for example, the media is too moist or too rough). The toner level in the print cartridge might be low.
Troubleshooting and suggestions
1.
Make sure that the print cartridge is fully installed.
2.
Verify that the media meets HP specifications.
3.
Replace the print cartridge.
Light print (entire page)
ENWW
Defect description
Printing is light on the entire page.
Possible causes
Solve print-quality problems 419
Specs
The print cartridge is not installed properly. Economode is on. The toner density is not set correctly.
The media might not meet HP specifications (for example, the media is too moist or too rough). The toner level in the print cartridge might be low.
Troubleshooting and suggestions
1.
Make sure that the print cartridge is fully installed.
2.
Make sure that Economode is turned off at the control panel and in the printer driver.
3.
Increase the toner density at the control panel by touching Administration , Print Quality , and
Toner Density .
4.
Verify that the media meets HP specifications.
5.
Replace the print cartridge.
Defect description
Toner specks appear on the page, especially after a jam is cleared.
Possible causes
The device needs to be cleaned. The media might not meet HP specifications (for example, the media is too moist or too rough). A print cartridge is leaking.
Troubleshooting and suggestions
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Clean the inside of the device and run a cleaning page.
3.
Try using a different type of media.
4.
Check the print cartridge for leaks. If the print cartridge is leaking, replace it.
Dropouts
420 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Defect description
A large area of toner is missing.
Possible causes
Operating environment or media in use does not meet HP specifications.
Troubleshooting and suggestions
1.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met.
2.
If the media is rough and the toner easily rubs off, touch Administration , Print Quality , and Fuser
Modes , and then select the media type you are using.
3.
Try using a smoother media.
Lines
A
A
A
A a a
B
B
B
B
A a a a B b b b b b
C c c c c
C
C
C
C c
Defect description
Lines or streaks appear on the page.
Possible causes
The device needs to be cleaned. The print cartridge is not functioning properly.
Troubleshooting and suggestions
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Clean the inside of the device and run a cleaning page.
3.
Replace the print cartridge.
Gray background
ENWW
Defect description
The background of the page is gray or has a grayish cast.
Solve print-quality problems 421
Possible causes
Operating environment or media in use does not meet HP specifications.
Troubleshooting and suggestions
1.
Do not use media that has already been run through the device.
2.
Try using a different type of media.
3.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
4.
Turn over the stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.
5.
Increase the toner density at the control panel by touching Administration , Print Quality , and
Toner Density .
6.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met.
7.
Replace the print cartridge.
Toner smear
Defect description
Toner is smeared on the page.
Possible causes
The device needs to be cleaned. Operating environment or media in use does not meet HP specifications.
Troubleshooting and suggestions
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Try using a different type of media.
3.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met.
4.
Clean the inside of the device and run a cleaning page.
5.
Replace the print cartridge.
422 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Loose toner
Defect description
Toner can be rubbed off the page.
Possible causes
Operating environment or media in use does not meet HP specifications.
Troubleshooting and suggestions
1.
If the media is heavy or rough, touch Administration , Print Quality , and Fuser Modes , and then select the media type you are using.
2.
If you have observed a rougher texture on one side of your media, try printing on the smoother side.
3.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met.
4.
Make sure that type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications.
Repeating defects
ENWW
Defect description
A print defect appears on the page at regular intervals.
Possible causes
The print cartridge needs to be replaced. The device needs to be cleaned.
Troubleshooting and suggestions
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
If the distance between defects is 44 mm (1.7 in), 58 mm (2.3 in), or 94 mm (3.7 in), the print cartridge might need to be replaced.
3.
Clean the inside of the device and run a cleaning page.
Solve print-quality problems 423
Repeating image
Dear Mr. Abhjerhjk,
The dhjhfiuhu if teint hhkjhjnf j us a weue jd, fnk ksneh vnk kjdfkaakd ss hsjhnckkajhdhf kashfhnduujdn.
Pkshkkhklhlkhkhyufwe4yrh9jjflkln djd skshkshdcnksnjcnal aksnclnslskjlncsl nas lnslna, ncnsljsjscljckn nsnclknsllj hwlsdknls nwljs nlnscl nijhsn clsncij hn. Iosi fsjs jlkh andjna this is a hn. jns fir stie a djakjd ajjssk. Thsi ius vnvlu tyeh lch afted, and when hghj hgjhk jdj a dt sonnleh.
Suolklv jsdj hvjkrt ten sutc of jthjkfjkn vjdj hwjd, an olk d
.at fhjdjht ajshef. Sewlfl nv atug ahgjfjknvr kdkjdh sj hvjk sjskrplo book. Camegajd sand their djnln as orged tyehha as as hf hv of the tinhgh in the cescmdal vlala tojk. Ho sn shj shjkh a sjca kvkjn? No ahdkj ahhtuah ahavjnv hv vh aefve r
Tehreh ahkj vaknihidh was skjsaa a dhkjfn anj cjkhapsldnlj llhfoihrfhthej ahjkkjna oa h j a kah w asj kskjnk as sa fjkank cakajhjkn eanjsdn qa ejhc pjtpvjlnv4purlaxnwl. Ana l, and the askeina of ahthvnasm. Sayhvjan tjhhjhr ajn ve fh k v nja vkfkahjd a. Smakkljl a sehiah adheufh if you do klakc k w vka ah call lthe cjakha aa d a sd fijs.
Sincerely,
Mr. Scmehnjcj
Defect description
An image defect appears on the page at regular intervals. This defect might occur when using preprinted forms or a large quantity of narrow media.
Possible causes
Media in use does not meet HP specifications. The print cartridge needs to be replaced.
Troubleshooting and suggestions
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Make sure that the type and quality of media you are using meet HP specifications.
3.
If the distance between defects is 44 mm (1.7 in), 58 mm (2.3 in), or 94 mm (3.7 in), the print cartridge might need to be replaced.
Misformed characters
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
Defect description
Some or all characters are misformed on the page.
Possible causes
Operating environment does not meet HP specifications.
Troubleshooting and suggestions
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met.
424 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Page skew
Defect description
The printed image slants on the page.
Possible causes
Media is not loaded properly. Operating environment or media in use does not meet HP specifications.
Troubleshooting and suggestions
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Verify that no torn pieces of media are inside the device.
3.
Make sure that media is loaded correctly and that all adjustments have been made. Make sure that the guides in the tray are not too tight or too loose against the media.
4.
Turn over the stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.
5.
Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications.
6.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met.
7.
Perform a tray alignment by opening the Administration menu at the device control panel. On the Print Quality submenu, touch Set Registration . Choose a tray under Source and then run a test page.
Curl or wave
ENWW
Defect description
The paper curls or has a wave in it.
Possible causes
Media is not loaded properly. Operating environment or media in use does not meet HP specifications.
Solve print-quality problems 425
Troubleshooting and suggestions
1.
Turn over the stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.
2.
Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications.
3.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met.
4.
Try printing to a different output bin.
5.
If media is lightweight and smooth, open the Administration menu at the device control panel.
On the Print Quality submenu, touch Fuser Modes , and then select the media type you are using. Change the setting to Low , which helps reduce the heat in the fusing process.
Wrinkles or creases
Defect description
The page is wrinkled or has creases.
Possible causes
Media is not loaded properly. Operating environment or media in use does not meet HP specifications.
Troubleshooting and suggestions
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met.
3.
Turn over the stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.
4.
Make sure that media is loaded correctly and that all adjustments have been made. Make sure that the guides in the tray are not too tight or too loose against the media.
5.
Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications.
6.
If envelopes are creasing, try storing envelopes so that they lie flat.
7.
Open the Administration menu at the device control panel. On the Print Quality submenu, touch
Fuser Modes , and then select the media type you are using. Change the setting to Low , which helps reduce the heat in the fusing process.
426 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Vertical white lines
Defect description
Vertical white lines appear on the printed page.
Possible causes
Media in use does not meet HP specifications. The print cartridge needs to be replaced.
Troubleshooting and suggestions
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Make sure that the type and quality of media you are using meet HP specifications.
3.
Replace the print cartridge.
Tire tracks
A
A
A
A
A a a a a a
B
B
B
B
B b b b b b C c c c c
C
C
C
C c
Defect description
Images resembling tire tracks appear on the printed page. This defect typically occurs when the print cartridge has far exceeded its rated life, especially when printing a very large quantity of pages with very little toner coverage.
Possible causes
The print cartridge needs to be replaced.
Troubleshooting and suggestions
1.
Replace the print cartridge.
2.
Reduce the number of pages that you print with very low toner coverage.
ENWW Solve print-quality problems 427
White spots on black
Defect description
White spots appear on a black background.
Possible causes
Operating environment or media in use does not meet HP specifications. The print cartridge needs to be replaced.
Troubleshooting and suggestions
1.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.
2.
Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications.
3.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met.
4.
Replace the print cartridge.
Scattered lines
Defect description
Lines are not sharp and precise on the printed page.
Possible causes
Operating environment or media in use does not meet HP specifications. Print settings need to be changed.
Troubleshooting and suggestions
1.
Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications.
2.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met.
3.
Turn over the stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.
428 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
4.
Open the Administration menu at the device control panel. Open the Print Quality submenu and change the Toner Density setting.
5.
Open the Administration menu at the device control panel. On the Print Quality submenu, open
Optimize and set Line Detail to On .
Blurred print
Defect description
The printed image is blurred.
Possible causes
Operating environment or media in use does not meet HP specifications. Print settings need to be changed.
Troubleshooting and suggestions
1.
Make sure that the type and quality of the media you are using meet HP specifications.
2.
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the device are being met.
3.
Turn over the stack in the tray. Also, try rotating the stack 180°.
4.
Do not use media that already has been run through the device.
5.
Decrease the toner density. Open the Administration menu at the device control panel. Open the Print Quality submenu and change the Toner Density setting.
6.
Open the Administration menu at the device control panel. On the Print Quality submenu, open
Optimize and set High Transfer to On .
Random image repetition
ENWW Solve print-quality problems 429
Defect description
An image that appears at the top of the page (in solid black) repeats further down the page (in a gray field). The repeated image might be lighter or darker than the field it appears in.
Possible causes
The toner might not have been completely erased from the last job.
Troubleshooting and suggestions
1.
Change the tone (darkness) of the field that the repeated image appears in.
2.
Change the order in which the images are printed. For example, have the lighter image at the top of the page, and the darker image farther down the page.
3.
From your software program, rotate the whole page 180° to print the lighter image first.
4.
If the defect occurs later in a print job, turn the device off for 10 minutes. Ten turn it on to restart the print job.
430 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Repetitive defect ruler
Defects on rollers can cause image defects to appear at regular intervals on the page, corresponding to the circumference of the roller that is causing the defect. Measure the distance between defects that recur on a page. Use the repetitive defect ruler to determine which roller is causing the defect.
To resolve the problem, try cleaning the roller first. If the roller remains dirty after cleaning or if it is damaged, replace the part indicated in
Table 6-3 Repetitive defects on page 431 .
NOTE
Do not use solvents or oils to clean rollers. Instead, rub the roller with lint-free paper.
If dirt is difficult to remove, rub the roller with lint-free paper that has been dampened with water.
ENWW
Table 6-3
Repetitive defects
4
5
Reference
1
2
3
Roller
Primary charging roller
Transfer roller
Distance between defects
First occurrence of the defect
38.0 mm (1.5 inches)
47.0 mm (1.9 inches)
Developing cylinder (see note)
Developing cylinder (see note)
54.0 mm (2.13 inches)
63.0 mm (2.5 inches)
Replacement part
Print cartridge
Transfer roller (part of the printer maintenance kit)
Print cartridge
Print cartridge
Solve print-quality problems 431
Table 6-3
Repetitive defects (continued)
Reference Roller
6
7
Fuser
Photosensitive drum
Distance between defects
94.0 mm (3.75 inches)
94.2 mm (3.75 inches)
Replacement part
Fuser
Print cartridge
NOTE
The developing cylinder circumference is 62.83 mm (2.5 inches). A defect that is related to the developing cylinder will most likely repeat at intervals of 54.0 mm (2.15 inches) because of the way the roller is geared.
To identify if the print cartridge is the problem, insert a print cartridge from another
HP LaserJet M4345 MFP, if one is available, before ordering a new print cartridge.
If the defect repeats at 94.0 mm (3.75 inch) intervals, try replacing the print cartridge before replacing the fuser.
432 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Solve network printing problems
NOTE
HP recommends using the device CD to install and set up the device on a network.
●
Print a configuration page (see Use information pages on page 82
). If an HP Jetdirect print server is installed, printing a configuration page also prints a second page that shows the network settings and status.
●
See the
HP Jetdirect Embedded Print Server Administrator's Guide
on the device CD for help and for more information about the Jetdirect configuration page. To open the guide, run the CD, click
Printer Documentation
, click
HP Jetdirect Guide
, and then click
Troubleshooting the
HP Jetdirect Print Server
.
●
Try printing the job from another computer.
●
To verify that a device works with a computer, use a USB cable to connect it directly to a computer, and then reinstall the printing software. Print a document from a program that has printed correctly in the past. If this works, a problem with the network might exist.
●
Contact a network administrator for assistance.
ENWW Solve network printing problems 433
Solve copy problems
Prevent copy problems
The following are a few simple steps you can take to improve copy quality:
●
Copy from the flatbed scanner. This will produce a higher quality copy than copying from the automatic document feeder (ADF).
●
Use quality originals.
●
Load the media correctly. If the media is loaded incorrectly, it might skew, causing unclear images and problems with the OCR program. See
Media specifications on page 10 for
instructions.
●
Use or make a carrier sheet to protect your originals.
NOTE
Verify that the media meets HP specifications. If the media meets HP specifications, recurring feed problems indicate the pickup roller or separation pad is worn. Contact
HP Customer Care. See
HP Customer Care on page 609 or the flyer that came in the device
box.
Image problems
Problem
Images are missing or faded.
Vertical white or faded stripes appear on the copy.
Cause
The print-cartridge toner-level might be low.
The original might be of poor quality.
The original might have a colored background.
The media might not meet
HP specifications.
The print-cartridge toner-level might be low.
Solution
Replace the print cartridge. See
Change the print cartridge on page 93 .
If your original is too light or damaged, the copy might not be able to compensate, even if you adjust the darkness. If possible, find an original document in better condition.
Touch Copy , and then touch Image
Adjustment.
Adjust the Background
Cleanup slider to the right to decrease the background.
Use media that meets
HP specifications. See
Select print media on page 10 .
Replace the print cartridge. See
Change the print cartridge on page 93 .
434 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Problem
Unwanted lines appear on the copy.
A
A
A
A
A a a a a a
B
B
B
B
B b b b b b C c c c c
C
C
C
C c
Black dots or streaks appear on the copy.
Copies are too light or dark.
Text is unclear.
Cause
Tray 1 or tray 2 might not be installed correctly.
The flatbed scanner or the ADF glass might be dirty.
The photosensitive drum inside the print cartridge might have been scratched.
Solution
Verify that the tray is in place.
Clean the flatbed scanner or the ADF glass. See
Install a new HP print cartridge. See
Change the print cartridge on page 93 .
Ink, glue, correction fluid, or an unwanted substance might be on the automatic document feeder (ADF) or flatbed scanner.
The darkness setting needs to be adjusted.
Clean the device. See device on page 95 .
The sharpness setting needs to be adjusted.
The image should be optimized for text.
Touch Copy , and then touch Image
Adjustment.
Adjust the Darkness slider to lighten or darken the image.
To adjust the sharpness, touch Copy , and then touch Image Adjustment.
Adjust the Sharpness slider to the right to increase the sharpness.
To optimize the image for text, touch
Copy and then touch Optimize Text/
Picture . Select Text .
Media-handling problems
Problem
Poor print quality or toner adhesion
Dropouts, jamming, or curl
Excessive curl
Jamming, damage to device
Cause Solution
The paper is too moist, too rough, too heavy or too smooth, or it is embossed or from a faulty paper lot.
Try another kind of paper, between 100 and 250 Sheffield, 4 to 6% moisture content.
The paper has been stored incorrectly.
Store paper flat in its moisture-proof wrapping.
The paper has variability from one side to the other.
Turn the paper over.
Open the rear output bin, or use longgrain paper.
The paper is too moist, has the wrong grain direction, or is of short-grain construction
The paper varies from side-to-side.
The paper has cutouts or perforations.
Turn the paper over.
Use paper that is free of cutouts or perforations.
ENWW Solve copy problems 435
Problem Cause Solution
Problems with feeding
Print is crooked or misaligned on the page.
The paper has ragged edges.
Use high-quality paper that is made for laser printers.
The paper varies from side-to-side.
The paper is too moist, too rough, too heavy or too smooth, has the wrong grain direction, or is of short-grain construction or it is embossed or from a faulty paper lot.
The media guides might be incorrectly adjusted.
Turn the paper over.
●
Try another kind of paper,
● between 100 and 250 Sheffield, 4 to 6% moisture content.
Use long-grain paper.
Remove all media from the input tray, straighten the stack, and then load the media in the input tray again. Adjust the media guides to the width and length of the media that you are using and try printing again.
The scanner might require a calibration.
Perform a tray alignment, and then calibrate the scanner.
●
Perform a tray alignment by opening the Administration menu at the device control panel. On the
Print Quality submenu, touch Set
Registration . Choose a tray under
Source and then run a test page.
For more information, see
.
●
See
Calibrate the scanner on page 106 for information about
calibrating the scanner.
More than one sheet feeds at one time.
The media tray might be overloaded.
The device does not pull media from a media tray.
The media might be wrinkled, folded, or damaged.
The device might be in manual feed mode.
The pickup roller might be dirty or damaged.
The paper-length adjustment control in the tray is set at a length that is greater than the media size.
Remove some of the media from the tray. See
Media specifications on page 10 .
Verify that the media is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. Try printing on media from a new or different package.
●
If
Manual Feed
appears on the control-panel display, press
OK
to print the job.
●
Verify that the device is not in manual feed mode, and then print your job again.
Contact HP Customer Care. See
HP Customer Care on page 609 or the
support flyer that came in the device box.
Adjust the paper-length adjustment control to the correct length.
436 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Performance problems
Problem
No copy came out.
Copies are blank.
The wrong original was copied.
Copies are reduced in size.
Cause
The input tray might be empty.
The original might have been loaded incorrectly.
The sealing tape might not have been removed from the print cartridge.
The original might have been loaded incorrectly.
The media might not meet
HP specifications.
The print-cartridge toner-level might be low.
The ADF might be loaded.
The device software settings might be set to reduce the scanned image.
Solution
Load media in the device. See Media specifications on page 10
for more information.
Load the original correctly in the ADF or flatbed scanner. See
Media specifications on page 10
.
Remove the print cartridge from the device, pull out the sealing tape, and then reinstall the print cartridge.
Load the original correctly in the ADF or flatbed scanner. See
Media specifications on page 10
.
Use media that meets
HP specifications. See Select print media on page 10 .
Replace the print cartridge. See
Change the print cartridge on page 93 .
Make sure that the ADF is empty.
See the device software Help for more information about changing the settings.
ENWW Solve copy problems 437
Solve fax problems
More extensive fax troubleshooting information is available in the
Fax Support Guide
. For additional help troubleshooting the Send Fax driver, see the
Send Fax Driver User Guide
.
Solve sending problems
Faxes quit during sending.
Cause
The fax machine to which you are sending might be malfunctioning.
Your telephone line might not be working, or the line might be experiencing interference.
Solution
Call the recipient to make sure that the receiving fax machine is turned on and ready to receive faxes, or try sending to another fax machine.
Disconnect the fax cable from the telephone jack, and then connect a telephone. Make a phone call to ensure that the telephone line is working.
Try using a lower baud rate by adjusting the Maximum Baud
Rate setting in the Administration menu. See Initial Setup menu on page 60
.
The device fax is receiving faxes but is not sending them.
Cause Solution
If the device is on a PBX system, the PBX system might be generating a dial tone that the fax cannot detect.
There might be a poor telephone connection.
The fax machine to which you are sending might be malfunctioning.
Your telephone line might not be working.
Disable the detect dial tone setting. See the fax guide for information about changing the setting.
Resend the fax later.
Call the recipient to make sure that the receiving fax machine is turned on and ready to receive faxes, or try sending to another fax machine.
Disconnect the fax cable from the telephone jack, and then connect a telephone. Make a phone call to ensure that the telephone line is working.
Outgoing fax calls keep dialing.
Cause
The fax automatically redials a fax number if either the
Redial on Busy feature or the Redial on No Answer feature is enabled.
Solution
Disable the Redial on Busy and Redial on No Answer features. See the fax guide for information about changing the settings.
438 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Faxes you send are not arriving at the receiving fax machine.
Cause Solution
The receiving fax machine might be turned off or might have an error condition, such as being out of paper.
A fax might be stored in memory because it is waiting to redial a busy number, or there are other jobs ahead of it waiting to be sent.
Call the recipient to make sure that the fax machine is turned on and ready to receive faxes.
If a fax job is in memory for either of these reasons, an entry for the job appears in the fax log. Print the fax activity log
(see the fax guide), and check the
Result
column for jobs with a
Pending
designation.
NOTE
If the fax is sending very slowly, see "Faxes are transmitting or being received very
slowly" in Initial Setup menu on page 60 .
Solve receiving problems
Incoming fax calls are not being answered by the fax (no fax detected).
Cause Solution
The rings-to-answer setting might not be set correctly.
The telephone cord might not be connected properly, or the telephone cord is not working.
The telephone line might not be working.
A voice-messaging service might be interfering with the ability to answer calls.
Check the rings-to-answer setting. See the fax guide for information about changing the setting.
Check the installation. Make sure you are using the telephone cord that came with the device.
Disconnect the fax cable from the telephone jack, and then connect a telephone. Make a phone call to ensure that the telephone line is working.
Do one of the following:
●
Discontinue the messaging service.
●
Get a telephone line dedicated to fax calls.
●
Decrease the rings-to-answer setting for the fax to a number less than the rings-to-answer for the voice mail. See the fax guide for information about changing the setting.
Faxes are transmitting or being received very slowly.
Cause Solution
You might be sending or receiving a very complex fax, such as one with many graphics.
Complex faxes take longer to be sent or received.
The receiving fax machine might have a slow modem speed.
The device fax only sends the fax at the fastest modem speed the receiving fax machine can use.
ENWW Solve fax problems 439
Faxes are transmitting or being received very slowly.
Cause
The resolution at which the fax was sent or is being received is very high. A higher resolution typically results in better quality, but also requires a longer transmission time.
A poor telephone-line connection is forcing the device fax and the sending or receiving fax machine to slow down the transmission to adjust for errors.
Solution
If you are receiving the fax, call and ask the sender to decrease the resolution and resend the fax. If you are sending, decrease the resolution or change the Page
Content mode setting. See the fax guide for information about changing the settings.
Cancel and resend the fax. Have the telephone company check the telephone line.
Faxes are not printing at the device.
Cause
There is no media in the input trays.
The Schedule Printing of Faxes mode is enabled. Faxes will not print until it is disabled
The device toner level is low, or it has run out of toner.
The device stops printing as soon as it is low on toner or runs out of toner. Any faxes received are stored in memory and are printed after the toner has been replaced.
Solution
Load media. Any faxes received while the input trays are empty are stored and will print after the trays have been refilled.
Disable the Schedule Printing of Faxes mode. See the fax guide for information about changing the setting.
Replace the print cartridge.
440 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Solve e-mail problems
If you are unable to send e-mails by using the digital-send feature, you might need to reconfigure the
SMTP gateway address or the LDAP gateway address. Print a Configuration page to find the current
SMTP and LDAP gateway addresses. Use the following procedures to check if the SMTP and LDAP gateway addresses are valid.
Validate the SMTP gateway address
NOTE
This procedure is for Windows operating systems.
1.
Open an MS-DOS command prompt: click
Start
, click
Run
, and then type cmd
.
2.
Type telnet
followed by the SMTP gateway address and then the number 25, which is the port over which the MFP is communicating. For example, type telnet 123.123.123.123
25
where "123.123.123.123" represents the SMTP gateway address.
3.
Press Enter . If the SMTP gateway address is
not
valid, the response contains the message
Could not open connection to the host on port 25: Connect Failed.
4.
If the SMTP gateway address is not valid, contact the network administrator.
Validate the LDAP gateway address
NOTE
This procedure is for Windows operating systems.
1.
Open Windows Explorer. In the address bar, type
LDAP://
immediately followed by the LDAP gateway address. For example, type
LDAP://12.12.12.12
where "12.12.12.12" represents the LDAP gateway address.
2.
Press Enter . If the LDAP gateway address is valid, the
Find People
dialog box opens.
3.
If the LDAP gateway address is not valid, contact the network administrator.
ENWW Solve e-mail problems 441
Solve network connectivity problems
Troubleshooting network printing problems
NOTE
HP recommends that you use the MFP CD-ROM to install and set up the MFP on a network.
1.
Make sure that the network cable is securely seated into the MFP's RJ45 connector.
2.
Make sure that the Jetdirect LED on the formatter is lit.
3.
Make sure that the I/O card is ready. Print a Configuration page. If an HP Jetdirect print server is installed, printing a Configuration page also prints a second page that shows the network settings and status.
NOTE
The HP Jetdirect embedded print server supports various network protocols
(TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, Novell/Netware, AppleTalk, and DCL/LLC). Make sure that the correct protocol is enabled for your network.
4.
On the HP Jetdirect Configuration page, verify the following items for your protocol:
a.
Under HP Jetdirect Configuration, the status is "I/O Card Ready".
b.
The status is "Ready".
c.
An IP address is listed.
d.
The configuration method (Config by:) is listed correctly. See the network administrator if you are not sure which method is correct.
e.
The domain name is correct.
5.
Perform a loopback test to verify that the firmware is functioning correctly and that the hardware that is on the formatter is functioning correctly.
6.
Perform a ping test to verify that the MFP is communicating with other devices on the network.
7.
Try printing the job from another computer.
8.
To verify that a MFP works with a computer, use a USB cable to connect it directly to a computer. You will have to reinstall the printing software. Print a document from a program that has printed correctly in the past. If this works, a problem with the network might exist.
Loopback test
Use the loopback test to verify that the firmware is functioning correctly and that the hardware that is on the formatter is functioning correctly. This test causes the formatter to send data to itself.
1.
Disconnect the network cable.
2.
Press Menu .
3.
Touch CONFIGURE DEVICE .
4.
Touch I/O , touch EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU , touch DIAGNOSTICS , and then touch
LOOPBACK TEST .
442 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
5.
Let the test run for several hours or overnight.
6.
If the test fails, an error message appears on the control-panel display. Replace the formatter.
7.
To stop the test, turn the MFP off and then on. Make sure that you reconnect the network cable.
Ping test
Use the ping test to verify that the MFP is communicating over the network. Before performing the ping test, obtain the IP address for a target destination, such as a PC, that is on the same network as the MFP. Consult the network administrator for help with obtaining the IP address.
1.
Scroll to and touch Administration .
2.
Touch Management .
3.
Touch Embedded Jetdirect or EIO <X> Jetdirect .
4.
Touch Ping Test .
5.
Set the appropriate options for each of the menu items that follow:
●
Dest Type
●
Dest IP
●
Packet Size
●
Timeout
●
Count
●
Print Results
●
Execute
After setting Execute to Yes , the ping test starts automatically. If you selected to print the results, a page prints that lists the ping statistics. If the page prints, the test was successful.
ENWW Solve network connectivity problems 443
Solve stapler/stacker problems
Control panel message
13.12.07 Jam In Stapler
13.12.08 Jam In Left Accessory
Description
There is no power to the stapler/stacker.
NOTE
The stapler/stacker is powered by the printer through the communication cable connecting the two devices.
The stapler could not finish its cycle but was able to return to the home position
If the stapler drive does not return to home position (HP) during the normal cycle, the stapler/stacker driver signals M1304
(stapler motor) to rotate once in reverse. If the HP signal is now detected, the stapler/ stacker driver sends a signal to the formatter that a staple jam is present.
Recommended action
1.
Check the communication cable between the stapler/stacker and the printer for a loose connection or damage. Make sure that the connector is securely screwed in. If the cable is damaged, go to step 4.
2.
Check wiring connection J1301 on the stapler/stacker driver board.
3.
Replace the stapler/stacker driver board.
4.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the stapler/stacker unit.
1.
Remove the staple cartridge and any loose staples or staples that might be obstructing stapler movement.
2.
Remove one sheet of staples from staple cartridge and try again.
3.
Inspect the staple cartridge for damage. Replace the staple cartridge if it is damaged.
4.
Verify that genuine HP staples are being used.
NOTE
Staples come preloaded in the staple cartridge and cannot be ordered separately as a refill from HP.
5.
Remove the stapler assembly. Inspect the stapler for jammed staples around the staple plunger and crimper.
Remove any jammed staples that are found.
6.
Install a new staple cartridge.
7.
Replace the stapler assembly.
8.
If none of the above corrects problem, replace the stapler/stacker unit.
Stay jam in accumulator. Paper sensor PS
1302 stayed activated longer than expected.
1.
Remove any jammed paper obstructing the paper path to the delivery rollers.
This signal is generated by sensor PS1302
(delivery sensor). PS1302 is located just before the delivery rollers. In order to reach or see the sensor arm, lift the upper delivery rollers and upper paper-path guide plate. You will now be able to see and toggle the sensor arm activating PS1302.
2.
Check the delivery flappers and linkages to make sure flappers are not blocking paper from exiting the machine to the output tray. If broken parts are found, go to step 6.
444 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Control panel message
13.12.09 Jam In Left Accessory
13.12.10 Jam In Left Accessory
Description
Stay jam at the entrance to the stapler/ stacker. Sensor PS1301 stayed activated longer than expected.
This signal is generated by sensor PS1301
(paper-inlet sensor). PS1301 is located under the lower-entrance guide plate with the sensor arm extending up through the guide plate and into the paper path.
Delay jam in entry. Paper did not arrive at the paper-inlet sensor PS1301 within the expected time.
This signal is generated from sensor
PS1301 (paper-inlet sensor). PS1301 is located under the lower entrance guide plate with the sensor arm extending up
Recommended action
3.
If the delivery rollers are not turning, go to step 6.
4.
If the jogger guides are not in the correct position to receive paper and are obstructing paper, check the jogger-guide sensors and connectors on the jogger assembly. If necessary, replace the jogger assembly.
5.
If the problem only occurs when stapling, check for deformed staples. If deformed staples are found, replace the staple cartridge and/or stapler assembly. If paper is being held back from exiting by the clamping device while stapling, go to step 6.
6.
If none of the above corrects problem, replace the stapler/stacker unit.
1.
Check PS1301 sensor and flag for smooth operation and damage. Make sue that the lower plate is free and is not touching the sides of the cutout of the lower guide plate that the arm operates within. If damaged, go to step 7.
2.
Check for any damage or obstructions to the entrance of the upper and lower guide plates. If damaged, go to step 7.
3.
Inspect the upper-entrance guide plate to make sure its alignment allows the sensor arm to move freely though the hole cut in it for the sensor arm. If damaged, go to step 7.
4.
Check for excessive paper curl when paper leaves the fuser. The cause could be damp paper.
5.
Clean PS1301 by gently blowing air into the sensor.
6.
Check connection J1303 on the stapler/stacker driver board.
7.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the stapler/stacker unit.
1.
Check for excessive paper curl as paper leaves the fuser. The cause could be damp paper.
2.
Check for any damage to the entrance guide plates.
ENWW Solve stapler/stacker problems 445
Control panel message
13.12.11 Jam In Left Accessory
65.00.15 Output Device Failure
65.12.01 Output Device Failure
Description
through the guide plate and into the paper path.
Initial jam. At power on, paper was present at the entrance of the stapler/stacker at sensor PS1301.
This signal is generated by sensor PS1301
(paper-inlet sensor). PS1301 is located under the lower entrance guide plate with the sensor arm extending up through the guide plate and into the paper path.
Recommended action
3.
Check the PS1301 sensor, sensor arm, and sensor flag for smooth operation and damage.
4.
Clean PS1301 by gently blowing air into the sensor.
5.
Check connection J1303 on the stapler/stacker driver board.
6.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the stapler/stacker unit.
1.
Remove any paper found in the entrance guides.
2.
Inspect the sensor PS1301 actuation arm to make sure it moves freely and is not rubbing against the entrance guide plates (upper and lower plates).
3.
Check connection J1303 on the stapler/stacker driver board..
4.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the stapler/stacker unit.
After the MFP boot process, the external device requested a new boot process. This can happen during an upgrade; the 24 V power goes off momentarily, which makes the stapler/stacker think it is initializing again.
1.
Turn off the MFP.
2.
Disconnect the communication cable between the output device and the
MFP.
3.
Check the connection pins for damage. If you are unable to align the pins so they work properly, go to step 6.
NOTE
During an upgrade of the external device, if the connection with the device is lost for 9 minutes, the firmware crashes with a 66.00.15 error and forces the user to reboot. It will then display a
Resend external accessory firmware
message.
4.
5.
Reconnect the communication cable to the MFP, making sure the connector is properly screwed down in.
Turn on the printer.
The paddle (retainer) motor M1301 was not able to move the sensor flag to the home position detected by sensor PS1305.
This signal is generated by sensor PS1305
(paddle home-position sensor). Sensor
PS1305 is located on the rear frame of the stapler/stacker, between the two DC
6.
Reload the latest firmware bundle.
7.
Check connection J1301 on the stapler/stacker driver board.
8.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the stapler/stacker unit.
1.
Inspect sensor PS1305 to make sure it is correctly mounted and the wires are connected.
2.
Clean sensor PS1305 by gently blowing air into the sensor.
446 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Control panel message
65.12.02 Output Device Failure
65.12.03 Output Device Failure
65.12.34 Output Device Failure
Description
motors: M1301 Paddle motor, and M1303
Feed Motor.
Jogger-motor malfunction. The jogger home position could not be sensed by sensor PS1304.
This signal is generated by sensor PS1304
(jogger home-position sensor). Sensor
PS1304 is located on the jogger assembly and can be accessed after removing the front, rear, and top covers of the stapler/ stacker.
Staple-motor malfunction. The staple motor was unable to return to the home position as read by sensor PHOl1.
This signal is generated by sensor PHOl1
(stapler home-position sensor). PHOl1 is located in the stapler assembly and cannot be serviced. If the stapler drive does not return to home position (HP) during the normal cycle, the stapler/stacker driver signals M1304 (stapler motor) to rotate once in reverse. If the HP signal is not detected, the stapler/stacker driver sends a signal to the formatter that the staple motor has malfunctioned.
Cooling fan failure.
This failure is detected by the stapler/ stacker control board. If the rotation speed of the cooling fan is not normal for 5 seconds or longer, the stapler/stacker control board notifies the formatter of the problem.
Recommended action
3.
Check connections J1314 and J1313 on the stapler/stacker control board.
4.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the stapler/stacker unit.
1.
Check for anything that might be obstructing or restricting the movement of the jogger guides.
2.
Inspect PS1304 for the correct mounting and secure wiring connections. Also check for damage.
If there is damage, go to step 5.
3.
Clean PS1304 by gently blowing air into the sensor.
4.
Check connectors J1302 and J1311 on the stapler/stacker driver board.
5.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the jogger guide assembly.
6.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the stapler/stacker unit.
1.
Check for a staple jam in the stapler; remove any jammed staples.
2.
3.
4.
Check the wiring connections at the stapler assembly.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the stapler assembly.
Check connector J1312 on the stapler/ stacker driver board.
5.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the stapler/stacker unit.
1.
Inspect the fan to make sure nothing is obstructing the fan rotation.
2.
Clean the fan blades of any dust accumulation.
3.
Check connector J1309 on the stapler/ stacker driver board.
4.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the stapler/stacker unit.
ENWW Solve stapler/stacker problems 447
Control panel message
65.12.35 Output Device Failure
65.12.99 Output Device Disconnected
66.12.33 Output Device Failure
Description Recommended action
Stapler malfunction. The stapler self-prime sensor PHOl2 did not activate.
1.
Verify that genuine HP staples are being used and that the staples are the correct type for this stapler.
This signal is generated by sensor PHOl2
(staple-ready sensor). Sensor PHOl2 is located in the stapler assembly and cannot be serviced.
When a new staple cartridge is installed, the stapler goes through the stapling motion 11 times in order to advance the first staple to the proper stapling position. If the staples are not advanced after 11 attempts, the control board notifies the formatter that self-priming has failed.
2.
NOTE
Staples come preloaded in the staple cartridge and cannot be ordered separately as a refill from HP.
Replace the staple cartridge.
3.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the stapler assembly.
4.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the stapler/stacker unit.
When the printer was turned on, the stapler/ stacker lost communication with the MFP.
1.
Turn off the MFP.
2.
Disconnect the communication cable between the output device and the
MFP.
3.
Check the connection pins for damage. If you are unable to align the pins so they work properly, go to step 7.
4.
Reconnect the communication cable to the MFP, making sure that the connector is properly screwed in.
The delivery-roller lift motor could not reach the home position as detected by sensor
PS1303.
This signal is generated by sensor PS1303
(delivery-roller disengaging sensor). PS
1303 is located behind the front cover and to the left of the stapler assembly.
5.
Turn on the MFP. If the problem still exists, go to Step 6.
6.
Check connection J1301 on the stapler/stacker driver board.
7.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the stapler/stacker unit.
1.
Inspect sensor PS1303 to make sure it is correctly mounted and not damaged. Also make sure that the wires are connected.
2.
Clean sensor PS1303 by gently blowing air into the sensor.
3.
Check connector J 1308 on stapler/ stacker driver board.
4.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the stapler/stacker unit.
448 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Control panel message
Corrupt Firmware In External Device
Left Output Bin Full
Output Paper Path Open
Description
The stapler/stacker needs a firmware upgrade.
The control panel indicates that the output bin is full; however, there is no paper in the output tray.
The signal is generated by sensor PS1306
(delivery-full sensor). Sensor PS1306 is located on left side of stapler/stacker, above the delivery rollers. The sensor is activated by paper exiting the output device lifting the delivery flappers.
The stapler door is open, or the stapler/ stacker is not fully latched to the MFP.
This signal is generated by switch SW1301
(door switch). Switch SW1301 is located behind the front cover and is actuated by a tab on the stapler door and a tab on the engine.
Recommended action
1.
Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest firmware and review the upgrade procedure.
2.
Install the latest firmware on the device.
3.
If the new firmware does not correct the problem, replace the stapler/ stacker unit.
1.
Verify that the output flappers used to actuate the sensor flag are not caught behind the jogger guides and have full range of motion needed to actuate the sensor.
2.
Check the sensor flag and actuator movement, making sure that by raising the output flappers the sensor flag actuates PS1306.
3.
Clean PS1306 by gently blowing air into the sensor.
4.
Check sensor PS1306 mounting.
5.
Check the wiring connector at sensor
PS1306 as well as connector J1313 on the stapler/stacker driver board.
6.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the stapler/stacker unit.
1.
Inspect the stapler-access door for damage or misalignment, and also make sure that the actuation tab is not broken off of the door. If there is damage, replace the stapler/stacker jam-access door or replace the front cover assembly (includes the front cover and the jam-access door).
2.
Inspect SW1301 and the actuator assembly for damage or mounting problems. If damaged beyond repair, go to step 4.
3.
Check wiring connection J1304 on the stapler/stacker driver board.
4.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the stapler/stacker unit.
ENWW Solve stapler/stacker problems 449
Control panel message
Replace Staple Cartridge
Stapler Low On Staples
Too Many Pages In Job To Staple
Description
The control panel indicates that the stapler is out of staples; however, after putting in a new cartridge, the message remains.
The signal is generated by sensor PHOI2
(staple-ready sensor) or sensor PHOI3
(staple-level sensor). Both are located in the stapler assembly and cannot be cleaned or serviced.
Recommended action
1.
Make sure that a genuine HP staple cartridge is being used.
2.
Replace the staple cartridge.
NOTE
Staples come preloaded in the staple cartridge and cannot be ordered separately as a refill from HP.
The control panel indicates that the stapler is low on staples or the staple cartridge is missing; however, after putting in a new cartridge, the message remains.
The signal is generated by sensor PHOI3
(staple-level sensor). Sensor PHOI3 is located in the stapler assembly and cannot be cleaned or serviced.
3.
Check the wiring connections at the stapler assembly.
4.
Remove the stapler assembly and any loose staples found in and around stapling assembly.
5.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the stapler assembly.
6.
Check wiring connection J1312 on the stapler/stacker driver board.
7.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the stapler/stacker unit.
1.
Make sure that a genuine HP staple cartridge is being used.
2.
Replace the staple cartridge.
NOTE
Staples come preloaded in the staple cartridge and cannot be ordered separately as a refill from HP.
When the firmware detects that the job is attempting to staple more than the maximum 30 pages, the firmware signals the jogger guides to open, dropping the unstapled stack of paper into the output tray below. The remainder of the copies will print out and be directed to the output tray without being stapled.
3.
Check the wiring connections at the stapler assembly.
4.
Remove the stapler assembly and any loose staples found in and around stapling assembly.
5.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the stapler assembly.
6.
Check wiring connection J1312 on the stapler/stacker driver board.
7.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the stapler/stacker unit.
Do not attempt to staple more than 30 pages of 20 lb bond (75g/m 2 ) paper. For heavier paper, the maximum stack height that can be stapled is 3 mm.
450 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Solve 3-bin mailbox problems
Control panel message
13.12.09 Jam In Left Accessory
13.12.10 Jam In Left Accessory
Description Recommended action
There is no power to the MBM.
NOTE
The MBM is powered by the printer through the communication cable connecting the two devices.
Stay jam. Inlet-paper sensor PS1501 remained activated longer than expected.
This signal is generated by sensor PS1501
(paper-inlet sensor). PS1501 is located under the lower entrance guide plate with the sensor arm extending up through the guide plate and into the paper path.
1.
Check the communication cable between the MBM and the printer for a loose connection or damage. Make sure that the connector is securely screwed in. If the cable is damaged, go to step 4.
2.
Check wiring connection J1501 on the
MBM driver board.
3.
Replace the MBM driver board.
4.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the MBM unit.
1.
Check sensor PS1501 and flag for smooth operation and damage, making sure its movement down through the lower plate is free and is not touching the sides of the cutout on the lower guide plate. If there is damage, go to step 7.
2.
Check for any damage or obstructions to the entrance to the upper and lower guide plates. If there is damage, go to step 7.
3.
Inspect the upper entrance guide plate to make sure its alignment allows the sensor arm to move freely through the hole cut in it for the sensor arm. If there is damage, go to step 7.
4.
Check for excessive paper curl as paper leaves the fuser. Damp paper could be the cause.
5.
Clean PS1501 by gently blowing air into the sensor.
6.
Check connection J1503 on the MBM driver board.
Delay jam. Paper did not arrive at the paperinlet sensor PS1501 within the expected time.
1.
Check for excessive paper curl as paper leaves the fuser. The cause could be damp paper.
This signal is generated from sensor
PS1501 (paper-inlet sensor). PS1501 is located under the lower entrance guide plate with the sensor arm extending up through the guide plate and into the paper path.
7.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the MBM unit.
2.
Check for any damage to the entrance guide plates.
3.
Check the PS1501 sensor, sensor arm, and sensor flag for smooth operation and damage.
ENWW Solve 3-bin mailbox problems 451
Control panel message
13.12.11 Jam In Left Accessory
65.12.34 Output Device Failure
65.12.99 Output Device Disconnected
Description
Initial jam. At power on, paper was present at the entrance of the MBM at sensor
PS1501.
This signal is generated by sensor PS1501
(paper-inlet sensor). PS1501 is located under the lower entrance guide plate with the sensor arm extending up through the guide plate and into the paper path.
Cooling fan failure.
This failure is detected by the MBM driver board. If the rotation speed of the cooling fan is not normal for 5 seconds or longer, the MBM control board notifies the formatter of the problem.
When the printer was turned on, the MBM lost communication with the MFP.
Recommended action
4.
Clean PS1501 by gently blowing air into the sensor.
5.
Check connection J1503 on the MBM driver board.
6.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the MBM unit.
1.
Remove any paper found in the entrance guides of the MBM that might be activating PS1501.
2.
Inspect the sensor PS1501 actuation arm to make sure it moves freely and is not rubbing against the entrance guide plates (upper and lower plates).
If damage is found, go to step 4.
3.
Check connection J1503 on the MBM driver board.
4.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the MBM unit.
1.
Inspect the fan to make sure nothing is obstructing the fan rotation.
2.
Clean the fan blades of any dust accumulation.
3.
Check connector J1509 on the MBM driver board.
4.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the MBM unit.
1.
Turn off the MFP.
2.
Disconnect the communication cable between the output device and the
MFP.
3.
Check the connection pins for damage. If you are unable to align the pins so they work properly, go to step 7.
4.
Reconnect the communication cable to the MFP, making sure that the connector is screwed in properly.
5.
Turn on the MFP. If the problem still exists, go to Step 6.
6.
Check connection J1501 on the MBM driver board.
7.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the MBM unit.
452 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Control panel message
Corrupt Firmware In External Device
Output Bin <X> Full
Output Paper Path Open
Description
The MBM needs a firmware upgrade.
The control panel indicates that the output bin is full; however, there is no paper in the output tray.
The signal is generated by sensor PS1503
(bin 1 delivery-full sensor), PS1505 (bin 2 delivery-full sensor), or PS1507 (bin 3 delivery-full sensor). Sensors PS1503 and
PS1505 are located behind the front cover of the MBM. Sensor PS1507 is located above the bin 3 delivery rollers, close to the
MBM rear frame.
The control panel indicates that the MBM is not latched to the MFP; however, it is physically attached to the MFP.
This signal is generated by switch SW1501
(engine-connection switch). Switch
SW1501 is located behind the front cover, near the bottom of the MBM. This switch is actuated by a tab on the MFP that engages the actuation arm on the MBM when the
MBM is moved against the MFP and they become latched together.
Recommended action
1.
Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest firmware and review the upgrade procedure.
2.
Install the latest firmware on the device.
3.
If the new firmware does not correct the problem, replace the MBM unit.
1.
Bins 1 and 2: Verify that the upper Yshaped sensor actuator arms are actually activating the associated sensors. The bin 1 and bin 2 bin-full sensors are the left sensors of the sensor set.
Verify that the output flappers used to actuate the sensor are actually activating sensor PS1507 and have the full range of motion needed to actuate the sensor.
2.
Check the sensor flag actuator arms for free, quick, and unobstructed movement when rising and falling.
3.
Clean the problematic sensor by gently blowing air into the sensor.
4.
Check the problematic sensor to make sure it is mounted properly and is in correct alignment with the sensor flag
(not touching the sides of the plate).
5.
For bins 1 and 2, check the wiring connector at the sensor board as well as connector J1502 on the MBM driver board.
6.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the MBM driver board.
7.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the MBM unit.
1.
Verify that the MBM is latching properly to the MFP.
2.
Inspect the actuator tab on the MFP for damage.
3.
Remove the front cover of the MBM and inspect SW1501 and the actuator assembly for damage or mounting problems. If either is damaged beyond repair, go to step 5.
4.
Check wiring connection J1502 on the
MBM driver board.
5.
If none of the above corrects the problem, replace the MBM unit.
ENWW Solve 3-bin mailbox problems 453
Functional checks
Use the following procedures to help diagnose and solve problems that occur in the print engine.
Early boot diagnostic test
When the device is powered on, it runs several self tests on the formatter and displays the results using the three control-panel LEDs (Ready, Data, and Attention). If the boot process stops and nothing is displayed on the control panel, examine the control-panel LEDs for any of the following light combinations:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Ready
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Data
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Attention
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
If the boot process stops and any of these LED combinations are visible, perform the following actions:
1.
Turn the device off.
2.
Reseat the formatter.
3.
Ensure that the engine connectors and properly connected to the formatter.
4.
Remove any memory DIMMs that are installed.
5.
Verify the cable connections to the control panel.
6.
Turn the device on.
If the boot process stops with the same error, replace the formatter.
Engine test
To verify that the print engine (all components except the formatter, formatter DIMMs, EIO products, and the stacker or stapler/stacker) is functioning, print an engine test page. Use a small, nonmetallic, pointed object to depress the engine-test switch, which is located on the back of the MFP.
NOTE
The standard output bin must be installed in order for the engine test page to print. If either the stapler/stacker or the 3-bin mailbox is installed, a jam occurs.
454 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Figure 6-11
Engine-test-print switch
The test page should have a series of vertical lines. The test page prints from the last tray that you used. However, if the MFP has been turned off and then on since the most recent print job, the page prints from tray 2. The MFP continuously prints test pages as long as the test-page switch is depressed. The MFP cannot print a test page if it is in Sleep mode.
NOTE
A damaged formatter might interfere with the engine test. If the engine-test page does not print, try removing the formatter and performing the engine test again. If the engine test is then successful, the problem is almost certainly with the formatter, the control panel, or the cable that connects them.
Formatter test
To verify that the formatter is functioning correctly, print a Configuration page. If the page prints, the formatter is functioning.
The heartbeat LED on the formatter also indicates whether the formatter is functioning.
Half self-test
Use the half self-test to determine which of the eight image-formation processes might be malfunctioning.
1.
Print a Configuration page.
2.
Open the top cover after the paper advances half-way through the MFP, which is about 3 to
5 seconds after the main motor begins rotation. The leading edge of the paper should have advanced past the print cartridge.
3.
Remove the print cartridge.
4.
Open the print cartridge drum shield to view the drum surface.
ENWW Functional checks 455
If a dark and distinct toner image is present on the drum surface, assume that the first four functions of the electrophotographic process are functioning (cleaning, conditioning, writing, and developing), and troubleshoot the failure as a transfer or fusing problem.
If no image is present on the photosensitive drum, perform the drum-rotation test.
Drum-rotation test
The photosensitive drum, which is located in the print cartridge, must rotate in order for the print process to work. The photosensitive drum receives its drive from the main gear assembly. Use this procedure to determine whether the drum is rotating.
1.
Open the top cover.
2.
Remove the print cartridge.
3.
Mark the cartridge drive-gear with a felt-tipped marker. Note the position of the mark.
4.
Install the print cartridge and close the top cover. The start-up sequence should rotate the drum enough to move the mark on the gear.
5.
Open the MFP and inspect the gear that was marked in step 3. Verify that the mark moved. If the mark did not move, inspect the main gear assembly to make sure that it meshes with the print-cartridge gears. If the drive gears function but the drum does not move, replace the print cartridge.
NOTE
This test is especially important if refilled print cartridges are in use.
456 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
MFP resets
Use the following information to perform system-wide reset procedures. Customers do not have access to this information.
Cold reset
A cold reset unlocks menus that have been previously locked and resets all control-panel menu items to the factory defaults. A cold reset does not clear the values in the service menu, such as the serial number and the page counts.
NOTE
Before performing a cold reset, print a menu map and a Configuration page. Use the information on these pages to reset customer-specific settings.
CAUTION
All HP Jetdirect settings are also reset. Be sure to print a Configuration page before performing a cold reset. Make note of the IP address that is listed on the Jetdirect
Configuration page. You will need to restore the IP address after performing a cold reset.
1.
Turn the MFP off and then on.
2.
When the memory count appears on the control-panel display, press and hold 6 until all three
LEDs flash once and then stay on. This might take up to 20 seconds.
3.
Press 3 two times until
COLD RESET
appears on the control-panel display.
4.
Press 6 one time. The MFP continues its initialization sequence.
NVRAM initialization
NOTE
If an HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300 is installed, performing an NVRAM initialization can cause the MFP to violate local telephone regulations. Reset the language and country/region after performing NVRAM initialization. For more information, see the
HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 Service Manual
.
Before performing an NVRAM initialization, print a menu map and a Configuration page. Use the information on these pages to reset any customer-specific settings.
CAUTION
All HP Jetdirect settings are also reset. Be sure to print a Configuration page before performing a cold reset. Make note of the IP address that is listed on the Jetdirect
Configuration page. You will need to restore the IP address after performing an NVRAM initialization.
Performing an NVRAM initialization resets the following settings and information:
●
All menu settings are reset to factory default values, including the fax header and company name.
●
All faxes in memory are erased.
●
All speed-dials, group-dials, and phonebook entries are erased.
●
All localization settings, including language and country/region, are reset.
ENWW MFP resets 457
After performing an NVRAM initialization, reconfigure any computers that print to this MFP so that the computers can recognize the MFP.
1.
Turn the MFP off and then on.
2.
Before the memory count appears on the control-panel display, press and hold 9 until all three
LEDs flash once and then stay on. This might take up to 20 seconds.
3.
Press 3 one time, and then press Start .
4.
Press 3 two times until
NVRAM INIT
appears on the control-panel display.
5.
Press 6 one time, and wait while the MFP completes its initialization sequence.
Hard-disk initialization
A hard-disk initialization erases and reformats the hard disk. Perform a hard-disk initialization only if an error message on the control-panel indicates a disk error. Always try initializing the hard disk before replacing it.
NOTE
Before performing a hard-disk initialization, print a menu map and a Configuration page. Use the information on these pages to reset any customer-specific settings.
CAUTION
A hard-disk initialization deletes the following information: all stored copy jobs, the local address book (e-mail addresses), the speed-dial list (fax numbers), and the Java™ applet files.
1.
Turn the MFP off and then on.
2.
Before the memory count appears on the control-panel display, press the
right-hand side
of the
Start button until all three LEDs are lit. Release the Start button.
3.
Press 5 one time.
INITIALIZE DISK
appears on the control-panel display.
4.
Press 6 one time. A series of asterisks appears on the control-panel display. Wait for the MFP to complete its initialization sequence.
458 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Individual component diagnostics
From the diagnostics menu, you can run tests to check the status of various components in the MFP.
During many of the diagnostic tests, the MFP enters a special diagnostics mode, which allows you to send print jobs and interact with the menus.
Paper-path-sensor test
1.
Scroll to and touch Administration .
2.
Touch Troubleshooting .
3.
Touch Paper Path Sensors .
The paper-path-sensor test checks for the presence of media at each of the sensors along the paper path. As the media passes each sensor, the sensor's state is updated. On the control-panel display, each sensor is represented by a string of alphabetic letters followed by a corresponding status for each sensor. Use the following table to associate the letters that are shown on the control-panel display with the sensor that they represent. A “0” next to the letter indicates that no media is present.
A “1” indicates that media is present.
Table 6-4
Paper-path sensor letter designations
Letter
C
D
A
B
E
Component
Tray 5 paper feed
Tray 4 paper feed
Tray 3 paper feed
PS106: front paper width
PS102: tray 2 pre-feed
Letter
H
J
F
G
K
Component
PS103: top-of-page
PS110: reversing paper sensor
PS108: exit sensor to the fuser
PS109: delivery
Manual sensor test
1.
Scroll to and touch Administration .
2.
Touch Troubleshooting .
3.
Touch Manual Sensor Test .
The manual sensor test indicates the status of the sensors and switches in the MFP. On the controlpanel display, each sensor is represented by a string of letters followed by a corresponding status for each sensor. Except for the paper-size switches, a “0” next to the letter indicates that no media is present or the switch is open. A “1” indicates that media is present or the switch is closed. For the paper-size switches (SW102), the number ranges from 0 to 7 to indicate the state of the three switches. Use the following table to associate the letters that appear on the control-panel display with the switch or sensor that they represent. Note that both uppercase and lowercase letters are used.
ENWW Individual component diagnostics 459
B
C
D
E
F
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
Table 6-5
Manual sensor test letter designations
Q
R
Letter
A
Component
Tray 5 paper feed sensor
Tray 4 paper feed sensor
Tray 3 paper feed sensor
PS106: paper-width sensor
PS102: pre-feed sensor
PS103: top-of-page sensor
PS111: reverse-unit paper sensor
PS108: fuser-delivery sensor
PS109: delivery paper sensor
PS104: output bin full sensor
PS105: tray 1 paper-present sensor
SW103: standard output-bin detection switch
SW105: jam-access-cover switch
PS101: tray 2 paper-out sensor
PS107: tray 2 paper-stack surface sensor f
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z a b c d e
Letter
S
Component
SW102: tray 2 paper-size switches (3 switches)
●
S0 = all three switches are closed
●
S1 = the bottom and middle switches are closed
●
S3 = the bottom switch is closed
●
S5 = the middle switch is closed
●
S6 = the top switch is closed
●
S7 = no switches are closed
Tray 3 jam-access-cover switch
Tray 3 paper out sensor
Tray 3 paper-stack surface sensor
Tray 3 paper-size switches (The number ranges from 0 to 7 as for tray 2. See the entry for letter “S”.)
Tray 4 jam-access-cover switch
Tray 4 paper-out sensor
Tray 4 paper-stack surface sensor
Tray 4 paper size switches (The number ranges from 0 to 7 as for tray 2. See the entry for letter “S”.)
Tray 5 jam-access cover switch
Tray 5 paper-out sensor
Tray 5 paper-stack surface sensor
Tray 5 paper size switches (The number ranges from 0 to 7 as for tray 2. See the entry for letter “S”.)
SW101: top-cover switch
Scanner tests
1.
Scroll to and touch Administration .
2.
Touch Troubleshooting .
3.
Touch Scanner Tests .
Use the scanner tests to verify that specific components in the scanner assembly are operating correctly. For most of the components, you must observe or listen to the component in order to verify that it is functioning as stated on the control-panel display. For the scanner sensors, you must activate the sensor and watch the condition indicator on the control-panel display to see if it changes.
460 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Component test
1.
Scroll to and touch Administration .
2.
Touch Troubleshooting .
3.
Touch Component Test .
Use the component test to exercise individual parts one-at-a-time, so that you can determine the cause of noise inside the MFP. For most of the components, you must observe or listen to the component in order to verify that it is functioning as stated on the control-panel display.
ENWW Individual component diagnostics 461
Service ID
This information appears on the Configuration page, which eliminates the need for customers to keep paper receipts for proof of the warranty. Because the MFP does not have an internal clock, the availability of the service ID date depends on the MFP being connected to a source that can provide the date, in this case a time server that is on the same network as the MFP. When the MFP is not connected to a date source, the service ID is not available, and “00000” appears on the
Configuration page.
Restoring the Service ID
If you replace the formatter, the date is lost. Use this menu item to reset the value to the date that the
MFP was first used. The date format is YYDDD. Use the following procedure to calculate the date.
1.
To calculate YY, subtract 1990 from the calendar year. For instance, if the MFP was first used in
2002, calculate YY as follows: 2002 – 1990 = 12 (YY = 12).
2.
To calculate DDD, use the following formula: 30 (calendar month – 1) + calendar day = DDD. If the calendar day is 31, use 30 instead. For instance, if the MFP was first used on October 17, calculate DDD as follows:
a.
Subtract 1 from 10 (October is the tenth month of the year): 10 – 1 = 9.
b.
Multiply 9 by 30: 9 x 30 = 270.
c.
Add 17 to 270: 270 + 17 = 287 (DDD = 287).
Converting the service ID to an actual date
You can use the MFP Service ID number to determine whether the MFP is still under warranty. Use the following procedure to convert the Service ID into the installation date.
1.
Add 1990 to YY to determine the actual year that the MFP was installed.
2.
Divide DDD by 30, and add 1 to the whole-number part of the quotient. The total is the month.
3.
The remainder from the calculation in step 2 is the day of the month.
Using the Service ID 12287 as an example, the date conversion is as follows:
1.
12 + 1990 = 2002, so the year is 2002.
2.
287 divided by 30 = 9 with a remainder of 17. Add 1 to 9 to get 10, so the month is October.
3.
The remainder (from the above calculation) is 17, so that is the day of the month.
4.
The complete date is 17-October-2002.
462 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Troubleshooting the embedded HP Jetdirect print server
If network-connection errors occur, you can disable the HP Jetdirect print server in order to determine if the problem is with the print server or with the network. This procedure requires that you temporarily install an optional EIO HP Jetdirect print server card while disabling the embedded
HP Jetdirect print server.
1.
Turn the MFP off and then on.
2.
When the memory count appears on the control-panel display, press and hold 6 until all three
LEDs flash once and then stay on. This might take up to 20 seconds.
3.
Release 6 , and then press and release 3 until
EMBEDDED LAN DISABLE
appears on the control-panel display.
4.
Press 6 one time, and wait for the MFP to complete its initialization sequence.
NOTE
To enable the HP Jetdirect print server again, perform this same procedure.
EMBEDDED LAN ENABLE
appears on the control panel.
ENWW Troubleshooting the embedded HP Jetdirect print server 463
Firmware-stack trace
In rare instances, you might need to work with a call-center escalation agent to find the source of a
49.XXXX ERROR
. Use the firmware-stack trace procedure to collect data that the agent might need.
A firmware-stack trace indicates which firmware commands were executing at the time of the error.
The firmware-stack trace procedure does not produce a report. Instead, you must write down the firmware instructions that appear on the control-panel display and relay them to the agent.
1.
When the error message appears on the control-panel display, press 6 and then press 5 .
2.
Press 9 to scroll through each line of the firmware-stack trace.
464 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Solve common Windows problems
Error message:
"General Protection FaultException OE"
"Spool32"
"Illegal Operation"
Cause Solution
Close all software programs, restart Windows, and try again.
Select a different printer driver. If the device PCL 6 printer driver is selected, switch to the PCL 5 or HP postscript level
3 emulation printer driver, which can be done from a software program.
Delete all temp files from the Temp subdirectory. Determine the name of the directory by opening the AUTOEXEC.BAT
file and looking for the statement "Set Temp =". The name after this statement is the Temp directory. It is usually C:
\TEMP by default, but can be redefined.
See the Microsoft Windows documentation that came with the computer for more information about Windows error messages.
ENWW Solve common Windows problems 465
Solve common Macintosh problems
In addition to the problems that are listed in
Solve general device problems on page 379
, this section lists problems that can occur when using Mac OS X.
NOTE
Setup for USB and IP printing is performed through the
Desktop Printer Utility
. The device will
not
appear in the Chooser.
The printer driver is not listed in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
Cause Solution
The device software might not have been installed or was installed incorrectly.
The Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file is corrupt.
Make sure that the PPD is in the following hard drive folder:
Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/
<lang>.lproj
, where “<lang>” represents the two-letter language code for the language that you are using. If necessary, reinstall the software. See the getting started guide for instructions.
Delete the PPD file from the following hard drive folder:
Library/
Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/<lang>.lproj
, where “<lang>” represents the two-letter language code for the language that you are using. Reinstall the software. See the getting started guide for instructions.
The device name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name does not appear in the printer list in the Print Center or Printer Setup
Utility.
Cause
The device might not be ready.
Solution
The wrong connection type might be selected.
The wrong device name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name is being used.
The interface cable might be defective or of poor quality.
Make sure that the cables are connected correctly, the device is on, and the Ready light is on. If you are connecting through a USB or Ethernet hub, try connecting directly to the computer, or use a different port.
Make sure that USB, IP Printing, or Rendezvous is selected, depending on the type of connection that exists between the device and the computer.
Check the device name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name by printing a configuration page. See
Use information pages on page 82 . Verify that the name, IP address, or Rendezvous host
name on the configuration page matches the device name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name in the Print Center or Printer
Setup Utility.
Replace the interface cable. Make sure to use a high-quality cable.
The printer driver does not automatically set up the selected device in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
Cause Solution
The device might not be ready.
Make sure that the cables are connected correctly, the device is on, and the Ready light is on. If you are connecting through a USB or Ethernet hub, try connecting directly to the computer or use a different port.
466 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
The printer driver does not automatically set up the selected device in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
Cause
The device software might not have been installed or was installed incorrectly.
The PPD file is corrupt.
The device might not be ready.
The interface cable might be defective or of poor quality.
Solution
Make sure that the PPD file is in the following hard drive folder:
Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/
<lang>.lproj
, where “<lang>” represents the two-letter language code for the language that you are using. If necessary, reinstall the software. See the getting started guide for instructions.
Delete the PPD file from the following hard drive folder:
Library/
Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/<lang>.lproj
, where “<lang>” represents the two-letter language code for the language that you are using. Reinstall the software. See the getting started guide for instructions.
Make sure that the cables are connected correctly, the device is on, and the Ready light is on. If you are connecting through a USB or Ethernet hub, try connecting directly to the computer or use a different port.
Replace the interface cable. Make sure to use a high-quality cable.
A print job was not sent to the device that you wanted.
Cause
The print queue might be stopped.
The wrong device name or IP address is being used. Another device with the same or similar name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name might have received your print job.
Solution
Restart the print queue. Open
Print Monitor
and select
Start Jobs
.
Check the device name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name by
Rendezvous host name on the configuration page matches the device name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name in the Print
Center or Printer Setup Utility.
An encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file does not print with the correct fonts.
Cause
This problem occurs with some programs.
Solution
●
Try downloading the fonts that are contained in the EPS file to the device before printing.
●
Send the file in ASCII format instead of binary encoding.
You are unable to print from a third-party USB card.
Cause Solution
This error occurs when the software for USB printers is not installed. When adding a third-party USB card, you might need the Apple
USB Adapter Card Support software. The most current version of this software is available from the Apple Web site.
ENWW Solve common Macintosh problems 467
When connected with a USB cable, the device does not appear in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility after the driver is selected.
Cause Solution
This problem is caused by either a software or a hardware component.
Software troubleshooting
●
Check that your Macintosh supports USB.
●
Verify that your Macintosh operating system is Mac OS X version 10.2.8 or later.
●
Ensure that your Macintosh has the appropriate USB software from Apple.
Hardware troubleshooting
●
Check that the device is turned on.
●
Verify that the USB cable is connected correctly.
●
Check that you are using the appropriate Hi-Speed USB 2.0
cable.
●
Ensure that you do not have too many USB devices drawing power from the chain. Disconnect all of the devices from the chain, and connect the cable directly to the USB port on the host computer.
●
Check to see if more than two nonpowered USB hubs are connected in a row on the chain. Disconnect all of the devices from the chain and connect the cable directly to the USB port on the host computer.
NOTE
The iMac keyboard is a nonpowered USB hub.
468 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
Solve Linux problems
For information about Linux problem solving, go to the HP Linux support Web site: hp.sourceforge.net/ .
ENWW Solve Linux problems 469
Solve PostScript problems
The following situations are specific to the PostScript (PS) language and might occur when several printer languages are being used. Check the control-panel display for messages that might help resolve problems.
NOTE
To receive a printed or screen message when PS errors occur, open the
Options
dialog box and click the selection next to the PS Errors section that you want.
General problems
The job prints in Courier (the default typeface) instead of the typeface that you requested.
Cause Solution
The requested typeface is not downloaded.
Download the font that you want and send the print job again. Verify the font type and location. Download the font to the device if applicable. See the software documentation for more information.
A legal page prints with clipped margins.
Cause
The print job was too complex.
Solution
You might need to print your job at 600 dpi, reduce the complexity of the page, or install more memory.
A PS error page prints.
Cause
The print job might not be a PS job.
Solution
Make sure that the print job is a PS job. See whether the software program expected a setup or PS header file to be sent to the device.
470 Chapter 6 Problem solving ENWW
7 Parts and diagrams
This chapter contains information about ordering parts, supplies, and accessories. It includes diagrams of the major subassemblies of the MFP and includes the part numbers for replaceable parts.
ENWW 471
Order parts, accessories, and supplies
●
●
Order through service or support providers
●
Order directly through the embedded Web server
Order directly from HP
You can obtain the following directly from HP:
●
Replacement parts
. To order replacement parts in the U.S. see http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .
Outside the United States, order parts by contacting your local authorized HP service center.
●
Supplies and accessories
. To order supplies in the U.S., see http://www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies .
To order supplies worldwide, see http://www.hp.com/ghp/buyonline.html
. To order accessories, see http://www.hp.com/support/cljcm4730mfp .
Order through service or support providers
To order a part or accessory, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.
Order directly through the embedded Web server
1.
In the Web browser on the computer, type the IP address for the MFP. The MFP status window appears.
2.
In the
Other links
area, double-click
Order Supplies
. This provides a URL from which to purchase consumables. Supplies information with part numbers and MFP information is provided.
3.
Select the part numbers that you want to order and follow the instructions on the screen.
How to use the parts lists and diagrams
The figures in this chapter illustrate the major field replaceable unit (FRU) assemblies and subassemblies in the HP LaserJet M4345 MFP Series. A table (parts number list) follows each exploded assembly diagram. The tables list a reference number for each specific part, the part number, and a brief description of the part.
CAUTION
When looking for an electrical part, pay careful attention to the voltage that is listed in the part description column to ensure that the component part number that you select is for the correct MFP model.
NOTE
Parts that do not have a reference number or part number are not FRUs, and cannot be ordered as individual replacement parts. However, all serviceable parts should be available as part of a larger operable subassembly.
The following lists of supplies and accessories were current at the time of printing. Availability of accessories might change during the life of the MFP.
472 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Screws that are used in the MFP
The following table describes the screws that are used in the MFP and provides guidelines to help determine where each type of screw is used. The screws can vary in length depending on the thickness of the material that is being fastened. Always note where each type of screw is located and replace each one in its original location.
NOTE
When you are disassembling the MFP, place the screws into the chassis holes from which they were removed. This prevents their loss, and ensures that the correct type and length of screw for each location is used when the MFP is reassembled.
Table 7-1
Common fasteners used in this MFP
Drawing and description Purpose
This screw is used to fasten metal to metal when good electrical contact is needed. This screw also provides high resistance to loosening.
Phillips-head machine screw with captive star washer
Phillips-head screw with self-tapping threads
This screw is used to fasten sheet metal or plastic to plastic frames (the deep, coarsely spaced threads provide an increased holding capability while decreasing the possibility of stripping the target hole).
NOTE
To install a self-tapping screw, first turn it counterclockwise to align it with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn it clockwise to tighten it. You will feel resistance and hear the screw click when it engages the existing threads in the hole. Do not overtighten the screw. If a self-tapping screw-hole becomes stripped, repair the screwhole or replace the affected assembly.
This screw is used to fasten sheet metal parts to the sheet metal chassis. It spans large clearance holes and distributes the load by increasing the bearing surface.
Phillips washer-head machine screw with a broad, flat washer attached to the screw head
Screw measurement guide
ENWW Screws that are used in the MFP 473
Customer-replaceable parts and accessories
Accessories
Figure 7-1
Accessories
474 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-2
Accessories
7
8
4
5
6
2
3
Reference Description
1
Optional 500-sheet tray and feeder unit
Envelope feeder
Duplexer (duplex printing accessory)
3-bin mailbox
500-sheet stapler/stacker
5,000-staple cartridge
Storage cabinet
HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300
Part number
Q5968-67901
Q2438-67902
Q5969A
Q5692-60503
Q5691-60501
C8085-60541
Q5970A
Q3701-60010
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Quantity
1
ENWW Customer-replaceable parts and accessories 475
Customer-replaceable components (print engine)
Figure 7-2
Customer-replaceable components (print engine)
476 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-3
Customer-replaceable components (print engine)
7
8
9
10
11
5
6
4
4
2
3
Reference Description
1 Output bin
Delivery tray assembly
Fuser entrance guide
Fuser, 110-volt, new
Fuser, 220-volt, new
Roller assembly, transfer
Roller, pickup, multipurpose assembly
Roller, paper-feed (cassette)
Roller, paper-pickup (cassette)
Cover, formatter
Formatter assembly, new
500–sheet tray
Part number
RM1-0940-000CN
RM1-1047-000CN
RM1-1046-000CN
RM1-1043-000CN
RM1-1044-000CN
RM1-1110-000CN
RL1-0019-000CN
RM1-0037-000CN
RM1-0036-000CN
RC1-3035-000CN
CB425–67901
Q5968A
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Quantity
1
ENWW Customer-replaceable parts and accessories 477
Customer-replaceable components (ADF and scanner)
Figure 7-3
Customer-replaceable components (ADF and scanner)
478 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-4
Customer-replaceable components (ADF and scanner)
6
7
4
5
8
9
2
3
Reference Description
1 ADF input tray
ADF pickup-roller cover
ADF pickup-roller assembly
ADF separation-pad assembly
ADF fan filter
ADF fan-filter cover
ADF mylar-holder assembly
ADF front-cover flange
Mylar sheet kit (3 sheets)
Part number
PF2282K042NI
PF2282K040NI
PF2282K039NI
PF2282K035NI
IR4041P007NI
IR4041P217NI
PF2282K043NI
IR4041P215NI
Q6496–67901
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Quantity
1
ENWW Customer-replaceable parts and accessories 479
Cables and interfaces
Figure 7-4
Cables and interfaces
480 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-5
Cables and interfaces
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
Reference Description
1 HP Jetdirect 620n Fast Ethernet (10/100Base-TX) print server
(EIO card)
1 HP Jetdirect connectivity card for USB, serial, and LocalTalk connections
USB cable, 2-meter standard device connector
PWR-CORD OPT-903 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS United
States/Canada
PWR-CORD OPT-934 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Taiwan
PWR-CORD OPT-902 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Southern
Europe/Western Europe/Eastern Europe/Indonesia/Baltics/
Vietnam/Korea 220V
3
PWR-CORD OPT-922 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS China
POWER CORD, OPT-906 3-COND 2.25-M-LG
PWR-CORD OPT-927 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Phillipines/
Singapore/Mexico/Brazil/Thailand
PWR-CORD OPT-900 3-COND 1.9-M-LG 5A ROHS United
Kingdom/Middle East 220V/Phillipines/Singapore/Hong Kong
SAR/Malaysia
PWR-CORD OPT-901 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Australia
PWR-CORD OPT-918 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Japan
PWR-CORD OPT-919 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Israel
PWR-CORD OPT-912 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Denmark
PWR-CORD OPT-920 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Argentina
PWR-CORD OPT-923 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS India
PWR-CORD OPT-917 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Africa
PWR-CORD OPT-903 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS South
America/Mexico/Brazil
PWR-CORD OPT-900 3-COND 1.9-M-LG 5A ROHS Maylasia
PWR-CORD OPT-906 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Switzerland
4
PWR-CORD OPT-903 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Middle East
PWR-CORD OPT-902 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Middle East
220V
PHN-CORD OPT-501 US 3.0-M-LG ROHS United States/
Taiwan/China/Thailand/Japan/Argentina/India/European Union/
South America/Indonesia/Malaysia/MiddleEast/Phillipines/
Singapore/Mexico/Brazil/Canada/Russia/Bulgaria/Baltics/
Vietnam
PHN-CORD OPT-516 KR 3.0-M-LG ROHS Korea
PHN-CORD US 3.0-M-LG ROHS Hong Kong SAR
PHN-CORD OPT-519 AU 3.0-M-LG ROHS Australia
Part number
J7934A
J4135A
C6518A
8121-0740
8121-0964
8121-0731
8121-0943
8120-6815
8121-0734
8121-0739
8121-0837
8121-0736
8121-1004
8121-0733
8121-0729
8121-0564
8121-0737
8121-0740
8121-0739
8121-0738
8121-0740
8121-0731
8121-0811
8120-8908
8121-1042
8120-8907
1
1
1
Customer-replaceable parts and accessories 481
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Quantity
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Reference Description
4 PHN-CORD OPT-517 IL 3.0-M-LG ROHS Israel
4 PHN-CORD OPT-505 UK/HK/NZ 3.0-M-LG ROHS United
Kingdom
PHN-CORD OPT-506 DK 3.0-M-LG ROHS Denmark
PHN-CORD OPT-520 EE 3.0-M-LG ROHS South Africa
PHN-CORD OPT-502 DE 3.0-M-LG ROHS Denmark
PHN-CORD OPT-508 NL 3.0-M-LG ROHS Netherlands
PHN-CORD OPT-504 FR 3.0-M-LG ROHS France
PHN-CORD OPT-514 IT 3.0-M-LG ROHS Southern Europe
PHN-CORD OPT-512 CH 3.0-M-LG ROHS Switzerland
PHN-CORD OPT-511 SE 3.0-M-LG ROHS NO/FI/SV
PHN-CORD OPT 510 NORWAY/FINLAND 3.0M-LG
PHN-CORD OPT-507 TR 3.0-M-LG ROHS Turkey/Greece
PHN-CORD OPT-520 EE 3.0-M-LG ROHS SK/SL/HR/RO/CS/
HU/PL
Part number
8120-8913
8120-8921
8120-8911
8120-8922
8120-8912
8120-8915
8120-8923
8120-8914
8121-0844
8120-8918
8120-8916
8120-8920
8120-8922
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Quantity
1
1
482 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Control panel and control-panel overlays
Figure 7-5
Control panel and control-panel overlays
ENWW Customer-replaceable parts and accessories 483
Table 7-6
Control panel and control-panel overlays
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Reference Description
1 Control-panel assembly
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right EN
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right FR
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right IT
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right DE
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right ES
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right NL
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right PT
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right NO
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right SV
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right FI
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right DA
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right PL
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right RU
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right CS
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right HU
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right ZHTW
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right ZHCN
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right KO
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right JA
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right TR
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right HE
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right EL
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right AR
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right TH
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right HR
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right RO
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right SK
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right SL
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Quantity
1
CB425-60117
CB425-60118
CB425-60119
CB425-60120
CB425-60121
CB425-60122
CB425-60123
CB425-60124
CB425-60125
CB425-60126
CB425-60129
CB425-60130
CB425-60131
CB425-60132
Part number
Q3942-60102
CB425-60103
CB425-60104
CB425-60105
CB425-60106
CB425-60107
CB425-60108
CB425-60109
CB425-60110
CB425-60111
CB425-60112
CB425-60113
CB425-60114
CB425-60115
CB425-60116
484 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Memory
Figure 7-6
Memory
ENWW Customer-replaceable parts and accessories 485
Table 7-7
Memory
2
3
4
1
1
Reference Description
1 100-pin DDR memory DIMM (dual inline memory module),
64 MB
100-pin DDR memory DIMM, 128 MB
100-pin DDR memory DIMM, 256 MB
Hard disk, 40 GB
Power cable for hard disk (5-wire)
Data cable for hard disk (2-wire)
Part number
Q2625A
Q2626A
Q2627-67951
0950-4717
5851-3051
5851-2720
1
1
1
1
1
Quantity
1
486 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Print cartridge and maintenance kits
ENWW
Figure 7-7
Print cartridge and maintenance kits
Customer-replaceable parts and accessories 487
Table 7-8
Print cartridge and maintenance kits
3
4
2
2
Reference Description
1
HP LaserJet print cartridge
Printer maintenance kit, 110-volt
Printer maintenance kit, 220-volt
ADF maintenance kit
ADF mylar replacement kit
Part number
Q5945-67901
Q5998-67901
Q5999-67901
Q5997-67901
Q6496–67901
1
1
1
1
Quantity
1
488 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW Customer-replaceable parts and accessories 489
Documentation, software, and training material
Figure 7-8
Documentation, software, and training material
490 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-9
Documentation, software, and training material
3
4
5
1
2
Reference Description
1 HP LaserJet M4345 MFP Series software CD, ROW/AR
HP LaserJet M4345 MFP Series software CD, Asia/EN/DR
Customer in-box training CD, English only
Service and support training CD
HP Digital Sending Software CD (trial version)
HP LaserJet M4345 MFP Series service manual
Part number
CB425-60135
CB425-60136
CB425-60155
CB425-14005
MKTNG-00539
CB425-90908
1
1
1
1
1
Quantity
1
ENWW Documentation, software, and training material 491
Assembly locations
Figure 7-9
Print-engine assemblies (1 of 2)
492 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
3
4
5
6
7
Item
1
2
Assembly name
Fuser
Electrical/forward assembly
Multipurpose assembly
Upper-plate assembly
Cassette
Registration assembly
Paper-feed-roller assembly
Details
See
.
See
Figure 7-18 Electrical/forward assembly on page 510 .
See
Figure 7-25 Multipurpose assembly on page 524 .
See
Figure 7-12 Upper-plate assembly on page 498 .
See
Figure 7-22 Cassette on page 518 .
See
Figure 7-24 Registration assembly on page 522 .
See
Figure 7-23 Paper-feed roller assembly on page 520 .
ENWW Assembly locations 493
Figure 7-10
Print-engine assemblies (2 of 2)
494 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
11
12
13
Item
8
9
10
Assembly name
Delivery assembly
Reverse assembly
Reverse-separation-guide assembly
Main drive assembly
Paper-pickup-drive assembly
Lifter-drive assembly
Details
See Figure 7-28 Delivery assembly on page 530 .
See Figure 7-26 Reverse assembly on page 526 .
See Figure 7-27 Reverse-separation-guide assembly on page 528
.
See Figure 7-19 Main drive assembly on page 512 .
See Figure 7-20 Paper-pickup-drive assembly on page 514
.
See Figure 7-21 Lifter-drive assembly on page 516 .
ENWW Assembly locations 495
External components
Figure 7-11
External panels and covers
496 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-10
External panels and covers
8
9
10
11
12
13
6
7
4
5
2
3
Reference Description
1 Cover, duplexing-unit assembly
Output-bin assembly
Delivery assembly
Cover, formatter
Cover, rear
Cover, front corner
Cover, right assembly
Cover, right lower assembly
Control-panel assembly
Cover, front assembly
Screw, tapping, pan-head, M4 x 10
Switch, power
Cover, cassette, left side
Part number
RM1-1018-000CN
RM1-0940-000CN
RM1-1047-000CN
RC1-3035-000CN
RM1-1017-000CN
RL1-0457-000CN
RM1-1016-000CN
RM1-1033-000CN
CB425-60127
RM1-1100-000CN
XB4-7401-0007CN
RC1-3044-000CN
RC1-3043-000CN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Quantity
1
ENWW External components 497
Print-engine internal components
Upper-plate assembly
Figure 7-12
Upper-plate assembly
498 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-11
Upper-plate assembly
8
9
10
11
6
7
4
5
2
3
Reference Description
1 Rod, link (upper plate)
Cover, rear lock (upper plate)
Holder, right shutter (upper plate)
Guide, legal-size (upper plate)
Guide, cartridge (upper plate)
Support, cartridge (upper plate)
Link, handle (upper plate)
Handle, lock (upper plate)
Cover, lock, front (upper plate)
Block, guide support (upper plate)
Screw, RS, M3 x 6
Part number
RC1-2830-000CN
RC1-2821-000CN
RC1-2855-000CN
RC1-2854-000CN
RC1-2853-000CN
RC1-2856-000CN
RC1-2822-000CN
RC1-2818-000CN
RC1-2820-000CN
RC1-3102-000CN
XA9-1495-000CN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Quantity
1
ENWW Print-engine internal components 499
Internal components (1 of 5)
Figure 7-13
Internal components (1 of 5)
500 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-12
Internal components (1 of 5)
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
6
7
4
5
2
3
Reference Description
1
Laser/scanner assembly
Screw, RS, M3 x 12
Cable, image scanner (print engine)
Registration assembly
Cable, laser (print engine)
Cable, beam-detect to scanner (print engine)
Lever, shutter
Flag, shutter
Spring, torsion
Paper-pickup-drive assembly
Solenoid (SL101)
Gear, 18T
Gear, 23T
Guide, paper sensing (PS101)
Spring, tension
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
Photointerrupter (PS107)
Roller, paper-feed (cassette)
Limiter, torque
Roller, paper-pickup (cassette)
Spring, torsion
Roller, paper-feed assembly
Flag, paper-feed sensor
Thermistor (TH3)
24
25
26
27
Screw, S, M3 x 8
Fan, main cooling (FN101)
Fan, reversing unit (FN103)
Cover, left-side, front not shown Complete print engine (110 volt) not shown Complete print engine (220 volt)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Quantity
1
Part number
RM1-1573-000CN
XA9-1447-000CN
RM1-1398-000CN
RM1-0011-060CN
RM1-1367-000CN
RM1-1372-000CN
RC1-3106-000CN
RC1-0378-000CN
RC1-0379-000CN
RM1-0034-070CN
RK2-0269-000CN
RU5-0045-020CN
RU5-0256-000CN
RM1-1010-000CN
RC1-0167-000CN
WG8-5624-000CN
RM1-0037-020CN
RC1-2758-000CN
RM1-0036-000CN
RC1-0061-000CN
RM1-0012-020CN
RC1-0060-000CN
RK2-0359-000CN
XA9-1500-000CN
RK2-0278-000CN
RK2-0280-000CN
RC1-3052-000CN
CB425-69001
CB425-69002
Print-engine internal components 501
Internal components (2 of 5)
Figure 7-14
Internal components (2 of 5)
502 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-13
Internal components (2 of 5)
11
12
13
14
7
8
9
10
15
16
5
6
3
4
1
2
Reference Description
1
Fuser (100–127 volt)
Fuser (220–240 volt)
Reverse assembly
Holder, door switch
Microswitch (SW101)
Stopper, hinge shaft
Cable, door switch
Case, envelope-feeder connector
Cable, envelope-feeder connector
Hinge, door, right-side
Screw, with washer, M3 x 6
Roller assembly, transfer
Sensor assembly, right door
Cover, handle, lower right
Spacer, screw
Electrical/forward assembly
Fuser entrance guide
Part number
RM1-1043-000CN
RM1-1044-000CN
RM1-1022-000CN
RC1-3063-000CN
WC4-5139-000CN
RC1-3124-000CN
RM1-1397-000CN
RC1-0245-000CN
RM1-1193-000CN
RC1-2901-000CN
XB2-7300-607CN
RM1-1110-000CN
RM1-1045-000CN
RC1-2881-000CN
RC1-0392-000CN
For reference only
RM1-1046-000CN 1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Quantity
1
ENWW Print-engine internal components 503
Internal components (3 of 5)
Figure 7-15
Internal components (3 of 5)
504 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-14
Internal components (3 of 5)
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
16
17
6
7
4
5
2
3
Reference Description
1 Motor, DC 24-volt, (M101)
Motor, DC 24-volt, (M102)
Screw, tapping, M3 x 6
Main drive assembly
Lifter drive assembly
Rod, link
Multipurpose tray assembly
Cover, envelope-feeder slot
Cassette rail assembly, right
Cassette rail assembly, left
Spring, grounding
Guide, rear
Cover, side, rear
Rod, switch, front
Link, switch
Holder, link
Screw, tapping, truss-head, M4 x 16
Part number
RK2-0272-000CN
RK2-0274-000CN
XA9-1503-000CN
RM1-1049-000CN
RM1-1029-000CN
RC1-2902-000CN
RM1-1572-000CN
RL1-0455-000CN
RM1-1012-000CN
RM1-1011-000CN
RU5-2251-000CN
RC1-2884-000CN
RC1-3042-000CN
RC1-2980-000CN
RC1-3003-000CN
RC1-3002-000CN
XB4-7401-605CN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Quantity
1
ENWW Print-engine internal components 505
Internal components (4 of 5)
Figure 7-16
Internal components (4 of 5)
506 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-15
Internal components (4 of 5)
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
16
17
18
6
7
4
5
2
3
Reference Description
1 Cross-member, support
Upper plate assembly
Cable, reverse unit
Reverse-separation guide assembly
Bolt, hex-head
Cable, output device connection
Cable, output-bin full sensor
Cover, front stopper
Stopper, front lock
Support, gas damper
Stopper, bushing arm
Arm, door, 1 (top cover)
Cover, door arm (top cover)
Arm, door, 2 (top cover)
Flag, full-detect (output bin)
Cable, control panel
Holder, output-device-full sensor flag
Cover, inner front
Part number
RC1-2911-000CN
For reference only
RM1-1380-000CN
RM1-1019-000CN
WS9-0255-000CN
RM1-1371-000CN
RM1-1368-000CN
RC1-2823-000CN
RL1-0434-000CN
RL1-0436-000CN
RC1-3090-000CN
RC1-2827-000CN
RC1-2833-000CN
RC1-2828-000CN
RC1-2863-000CN
RM1-1381-000CN
RC1-2864-000CN
RC1-3041-000CN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
Quantity
1
ENWW Print-engine internal components 507
Internal components (5 of 5)
Figure 7-17
Internal components (5 of 5)
508 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-16
Internal components (5 of 5)
11
12
13
7
8
9
10
5
6
3
4
2
3
Reference Description
1 Fan, DC controller (FN104)
Fan, print cartridge (FN102)
Power supply, PFC (100–127 volt)
Power supply, PFC (220–240 volt)
DC controller PCA
Spring, compression
Cable, optional 500-sheet feeder connection
Sensor assembly, paper size (SW102)
Swing-plate assembly
Cable, power
Cable, fan docking (for DC-controller fan)
Guide assembly, flat-flexible cable
Formatter assembly
Screw, stepped, M3
Part number
RK2-0472-000CN
RK2-0280-000CN
RM1-1013-000CN
RM1-1014-000CN
RM1-1354-000CN
RU5-2265-000CN
RM1-1370-000CN
RM1-0041-020CN
RM1-0043-020CN
RM1-1375-000CN
RM1-1376-000CN
RM1-1027-000CN
CB425-67901
RC1-0266-020CN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Quantity
1
ENWW Print-engine internal components 509
Electrical/forward assembly
Figure 7-18
Electrical/forward assembly
510 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-17
Electrical/forward assembly
6
7
4
5
2
3
Reference Description
1 Paper-feed assembly
4
Cable, flat-flexible (engine power supply)
Cable, flat-flexible (engine power supply)
Engine power supply assembly (100–127 volt)
Engine power supply assembly (220–240 volt)
Cable, duplexing-unit grounding
Screw, with washer, M3 x 6
Screw, flathead, RS, M3 x 6
Part number
RM1-0025-040CN
RK2-0470-000CN
RK2-0469-000CN
RM1-1041-000CN
RM1-1042-000CN
RM1-1400-000CN
XA9-1420-000CN
XA9-1464-000CN
1
1
1
1
Quantity
1
1
ENWW Print-engine internal components 511
Main drive assembly
Figure 7-19
Main drive assembly
512 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-18
Main drive assembly
Reference Description
1 Main drive assembly
Part number
RM1-1049-000CN
Quantity
1
ENWW Print-engine internal components 513
Paper-pickup-drive assembly
Figure 7-20
Paper-pickup-drive assembly
514 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-19
Paper-pickup-drive assembly
Reference Description
1 Paper-pickup-drive assembly
Part number
RM1-0034-070CN
Quantity
1
ENWW Print-engine internal components 515
Lifter-drive assembly
Figure 7-21
Lifter-drive assembly
516 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-20
Lifter-drive assembly
Reference Description
1 Lifter-drive assembly
Part number
RM1-1029-000CN
Quantity
1
ENWW Print-engine internal components 517
Cassette
Figure 7-22
Cassette
518 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-21
Cassette
4
5
6
2
3
Reference Description
1 Cassette (tray 2, 3, 4 or 5)
Gear, 20T (cassette)
Lever, paper-size-sensing (cassette)
Gear, 14T (cassette)
Gear, 80T (cassette)
Guide, cassette, front
Part number
RM1-1001–000CN
RC1-0331-000CN
RC1-2782-000CN
RU5-0254-000CN
RU5-0253-000CN
RC1-3020-000CN
1
1
1
1
3
Quantity
1
ENWW Print-engine internal components 519
Paper-feed roller assembly
Figure 7-23
Paper-feed roller assembly
520 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-22
Paper-feed roller assembly
2
3
Reference Description
1 Paper-feed roller assembly
4
Clutch, paper feed, electromagnetic (CL101)
Gear, 30T (paper-feed roller assembly)
E-ring (paper-feed roller assembly)
Part number
RM1-0012-020CN
RK2-0349-000CN
RU5-0050-000CN
XD9-0132-020CN
1
1
Quantity
1
1
ENWW Print-engine internal components 521
Registration assembly
Figure 7-24
Registration assembly
522 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-23
Registration assembly
Reference Description
1 Registration assembly
Part number
RM1-0011-060CN
Quantity
1
ENWW Print-engine internal components 523
Multipurpose assembly
Figure 7-25
Multipurpose assembly
524 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-24
Multipurpose assembly
4
5
6
2
3
Reference Description
1 Multipurpose assembly
Solenoid, multipurpose assembly (SL102)
Plate, main pad support (multipurpose assembly)
Roller, pickup, multipurpose assembly
Multipurpose tray assembly
Screw, tapping, truss-head, M3 x 8
Part number
RM1-1572-000CN
RK2-0276-000CN
RL1-0007-000CN
RL1-0019-000CN
RM1-0005-020CN
XB4-7300-809CN
1
1
1
1
1
Quantity
1
ENWW Print-engine internal components 525
Reverse assembly
Figure 7-26
Reverse assembly
526 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-25
Reverse assembly
8
9
10
6
7
4
5
2
3
Reference Description
1 Reverse assembly
Sensor, reverse-unit (PS109)
Sensor, reverse-unit jam (PS111)
Motor, crossing, (stepping) (M104)
Solenoid, reverse-unit (SL105)
Motor, delivery (stepping) (M106)
Motor, reverse-unit (stepping) (M105)
Reverse-unit PCA
Solenoid, reversing-roller separation (SL106)
Screw, TP, M3 x 4
Part number
RM1-1022-000CN
RM1-1570-000CN
RM1-1571-000CN
RK2-0473-000CN
RK2-0485-000CN
RK2-0475-000CN
RK2-0474-000CN
RM1-1379-000CN
RK2-0486-000CN
XB6-7300-406CN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Quantity
1
ENWW Print-engine internal components 527
Reverse-separation-guide assembly
Figure 7-27
Reverse-separation-guide assembly
528 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-26
Reverse-separation-guide assembly
Reference Description
1 Reverse-separation-guide assembly
Part number
RM1-1019-000CN
Quantity
1
ENWW Print-engine internal components 529
Delivery assembly
Figure 7-28
Delivery assembly
530 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-27
Delivery assembly
Reference Description
1 Delivery assembly
Part number
RM1-1047-000CN
Quantity
1
ENWW Print-engine internal components 531
Fuser
Figure 7-29
Fuser
532 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-28
Fuser
3
4
1
2
Reference Description
1 Fuser (100–127 volt)
Fuser (220–240 volt)
Screw, stepped
Screw, M3 x 8
Screw, RS, M3 x 8
Part number
RM1-1043-000CN
RM1-1044-000CN
RS1-9004-020CN
XA9-0650-000CN
XA9-1449-000CN
1
1
1
1
Quantity
1
ENWW Print-engine internal components 533
ADF components
ADF assembly
Figure 7-30
ADF assembly
534 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-29
ADF assembly
12
13
14
15
16
8
9
10
11
6
7
4
5
2
3
Reference Description
1 ADF assembly
ADF rear cover
ADF cable
Screw, ADF
ADF input tray
ADF front cover
ADF mylar replacement kit
ADF white scan background
ADF mylar holder assembly
ADF white mylar backing
ADF, springs for white mylar backing
ADF left cover
ADF, springs for left cover
Screw, ADF, wave 4 x 10
ADF jam-access cover
ADF hinge flaps (ESD)
Part number
PF2282K006NI
PF2282P044NI
PF2282K165NI
030080FWWSNI
PF2282K042NI
PF2282P059NI
Q6496–67901
PF2282P339NI
PF2282K043NI
PF2282P025NI
PF2282P343NI
PF2282P058NI
PF2282P352NI
PF2245P369NI
PF2282P041NI
PF2282K166NI
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Quantity
1
ENWW ADF components 535
ADF internal components (1 of 3)
Figure 7-31
ADF internal components (1 of 3)
536 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-30
ADF internal components (1 of 3)
2
3
Reference Description
1 ADF output-bin paper stop
Screw, ADF
ADF output-bin-base cover
Part number
PF2282P061NI
NS-SCR00029NI
PF2282P060NI
1
1
Quantity
1
ENWW ADF components 537
ADF internal components (2 of 3)
1
2
Figure 7-32
ADF internal components (2 of 3)
538 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-31
ADF internal components (2 of 3)
Reference Description
1 ADF hinge, left
2 ADF hinge, right
Part number
PF2282K041NI
PF2282K008NI
Quantity
1
1
ENWW ADF components 539
ADF internal components (3 of 3)
Figure 7-33
ADF internal components (3 of 3)
540 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-32
ADF internal components (3 of 3)
2
3
Reference Description
1 ADF jam-access latch
4
ADF clear plastic paper guide
ADF pickup-roller assembly
ADF pickup-roller cover
Part number
PF2282K164NI
PF2282P353NI
PF2282K039NI
PF2282K040NI
1
1
Quantity
1
1
ENWW ADF components 541
ADF input tray
Figure 7-34
ADF input tray
542 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-33
ADF input tray
Reference Description
1 ADF input tray
2 Screw, ADF, button, M3 x 8
Part number
PF2282K042NI
IR4041P021NI
Quantity
1
1
ENWW ADF components 543
ADF separation pad
Figure 7-35
ADF separation pad
544 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-34
ADF separation pad
Reference Description
1 ADF separation-pad assembly
Part number
PF2282K035NI
Quantity
1
ENWW ADF components 545
ADF separation-pad case
Figure 7-36
ADF separation-pad case
546 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-35
ADF separation-pad case
Reference Description
1 ADF separation-pad case
2 ADF separation pad
Part number
PF2282K034NI
PF2282K035NI
Quantity
1
1
ENWW ADF components 547
ADF pickup-roller assembly
Figure 7-37
ADF pickup-roller assembly
548 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-36
ADF pickup-roller assembly
Reference Description
1 ADF pickup-roller assembly
Part number
PF2282K039NI
Quantity
1
ENWW ADF components 549
ADF pickup-roller cover
Figure 7-38
ADF pickup-roller cover
550 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-37
ADF pickup-roller cover
Reference Description
1 ADF pickup-roller cover
Part number
PF2282K040NI
Quantity
1
ENWW ADF components 551
ADF mylar-holder assembly
Figure 7-39
ADF mylar-holder assembly
552 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-38
ADF mylar-holder assembly
Reference Description
1 ADF mylar-holder assembly
Part number
PF2282K043NI
Quantity
1
ENWW ADF components 553
ADF mylar replacement kit
Figure 7-40
ADF mylar replacement kit
554 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-39
ADF mylar replacement kit
Reference Description
1 ADF mylar replacement kit
Part number
Q6496–67901
Quantity
1
ENWW ADF components 555
Scanner components
Scanner-base components
Figure 7-41
Scanner-base components
556 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-40
Scanner-base components
2
3
Reference Description
1 Scanner controller PCA
Scanner fan-filter cover
Scanner-fan filter
Part number
IR4041K512NI
IR4041P217NI
IR4041P007NI
1
1
Quantity
1
ENWW Scanner components 557
Scanner flatbed-unit assembly
Figure 7-42
Scanner flatbed-unit assembly
558 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-41
Scanner flatbed-unit assembly
2
3
Reference Description
1 Scanner flatbed-unit assembly
Screw, scanner flatbed
Scanner rear cover
Part number
IR4041K081NI
040100FNBBNI
IR4041P216NI
Quantity
1
ENWW Scanner components 559
Scanner covers
Figure 7-43
Scanner covers
560 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-42
Scanner covers
4
5
2
3
Reference Description
1 Scanner left cover
Scanner, spring for left cover
Scanner-carriage-lock cover
Scanner top-cover flatbed flange
Scanner right cover
Part number
IR4041K114NI
IR4041P041NI
IR4041P214NI
IR4041P125NI
IR4041P213NI
1
1
1
Quantity
1
ENWW Scanner components 561
Cassette
Figure 7-44
Cassette
562 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-43
Cassette
Ref Description
Cassette
Part number
RM1–1001–000CN
Qty
ENWW Cassette 563
Optional devices
Duplex-printing accessory
Figure 7-45
Duplex-printing assembly
564 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-44
Duplex-printing assembly
Reference Description
1 Duplex-printing assembly
Part number
Q5969-67901
Quantity
1
ENWW Optional devices 565
Stapler/stacker
8
6
7
Figure 7-46
Stapler/stacker accessory
566 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-45
Stapler/stacker accessory
3
4
5
1
2
Reference Description
500 sheet stapler/stacker replacement unit
Door, jam access
Front cover
Rear cover
Jog guide assembly
Stapler unit
7
8
Stapler/stacker driver board
Paper delivery tray assembly
Part number
Q5691-60501
RC1-2597-000CN
RM1-0942-000
RC1-2598-000CN
RM1-0947-000CN
RK2-0507-000CN
C8085-60541
RM1-1123-000CN
RM1-0940-000CN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Quantity
1
ENWW Optional devices 567
3-bin mailbox
4
1
3
2
Figure 7-47
3-bin mailbox accessory
5
568 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 7-46
3-bin mailbox accessory
3
4
5
1
2
Reference Description
3-bin mailbox replacement unit
Jam-access door, 3-bin mailbox
Front cover
Rear cover
Paper delivery tray assembly
MBM driver board
Part number
Q5692-67901
RM1-0981-000CN
RM1-0985-000CN
RC1-2691-000CN
RM1-0940-000CN
RM1-1124-000CN
1
1
1
1
1
Quantity
1
ENWW Optional devices 569
Alphabetical parts list
Table 7-47
Alphabetical parts list
Description
100-pin DDR memory DIMM (dual inline memory module),
64 MB
100-pin DDR memory DIMM, 128 MB
100-pin DDR memory DIMM, 256 MB
3-bin mailbox replacement unit
3-bin mailbox
5,000-staple cartridge
500 sheet stapler/stacker replacement unit
500-sheet stapler/stacker
500–sheet tray
Part number
Q2625A
Q2626A
Q2627-67951
Q5692-67901
Q5692-60503
C8085-60541
Q5691-60501
Q5691-60501
Q5968A
ADF assembly
ADF cable
ADF clear plastic paper guide
ADF fan filter
ADF fan-filter cover
PF2282K006NI
PF2282K165NI
PF2282P353NI
IR4041P007NI
IR4041P217NI
ADF front cover
ADF front-cover flange
ADF hinge flaps (ESD)
ADF hinge, left
ADF hinge, right
ADF input tray
ADF input tray
ADF input tray
ADF jam-access cover
PF2282P059NI
IR4041P215NI
PF2282K166NI
PF2282K041NI
PF2282K008NI
PF2282K042NI
PF2282K042NI
PF2282K042NI
PF2282P041NI
570 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams
Table and page
3-bin mailbox accessory on page 569
Stapler/stacker accessory on page 567
Customer-replaceable components (print engine) on page 477
ADF internal components (3 of 3) on page 541
Customer-replaceable components (ADF and scanner) on page 479
Customer-replaceable components (ADF and scanner) on page 479
Customer-replaceable components (ADF and scanner) on page 479
ADF internal components (2 of 3) on page 539
ADF internal components (2 of 3) on page 539
Customer-replaceable components (ADF and scanner) on page 479
ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-47
Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
ADF jam-access latch
ADF left cover
ADF maintenance kit
ADF mylar holder assembly
ADF mylar replacement kit
ADF mylar replacement kit
ADF mylar replacement kit
ADF mylar-holder assembly
ADF mylar-holder assembly
ADF output-bin paper stop
ADF output-bin-base cover
ADF pickup-roller assembly
ADF pickup-roller assembly
ADF pickup-roller assembly
ADF pickup-roller cover
ADF pickup-roller cover
ADF pickup-roller cover
ADF rear cover
ADF separation pad
ADF separation-pad assembly
ADF separation-pad assembly
ADF separation-pad case
PF2282K039NI
PF2282K039NI
PF2282K040NI
PF2282K040NI
PF2282K040NI
PF2282P044NI
PF2282K035NI
PF2282K035NI
PF2282K035NI
PF2282K034NI
Part number
PF2282K164NI
PF2282P058NI
Q5997-67901
PF2282K043NI
Q6496–67901
Q6496–67901
Q6496–67901
PF2282K043NI
PF2282K043NI
PF2282P061NI
PF2282P060NI
PF2282K039NI
Table and page
ADF internal components (3 of 3) on page 541
Print cartridge and maintenance kits on page 488
Print cartridge and maintenance kits on page 488
ADF mylar replacement kit on page 555
Customer-replaceable components (ADF and scanner) on page 479
ADF mylar-holder assembly on page 553
ADF internal components (1 of 3) on page 537
ADF internal components (1 of 3) on page 537
Customer-replaceable components (ADF and scanner) on page 479
ADF internal components (3 of 3) on page 541
ADF pickup-roller assembly on page 549
Customer-replaceable components (ADF and scanner) on page 479
ADF internal components (3 of 3) on page 541
ADF pickup-roller cover on page 551
ADF separation-pad case on page 547
Customer-replaceable components (ADF and scanner) on page 479
ADF separation pad on page 545
ADF separation-pad case on page 547
Alphabetical parts list 571
Table 7-47
Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
ADF white mylar backing
ADF white scan background
ADF, springs for left cover
ADF, springs for white mylar backing
Arm, door, 1 (top cover)
Arm, door, 2 (top cover)
Block, guide support (upper plate)
Bolt, hex-head
Cable, beam-detect to scanner (print engine)
Cable, control panel
Cable, door switch
Cable, duplexing-unit grounding
Cable, envelope-feeder connector
Cable, fan docking (for DC-controller fan)
Cable, flat-flexible (engine power supply)
Cable, flat-flexible (engine power supply)
Cable, image scanner (print engine)
Cable, laser (print engine)
Cable, optional 500-sheet feeder connection
Cable, output device connection
Cable, output-bin full sensor
Cable, power
Cable, reverse unit
572 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams
RK2-0470-000CN
RK2-0469-000CN
RM1-1398-000CN
RM1-1367-000CN
RM1-1370-000CN
RM1-1371-000CN
RM1-1368-000CN
RM1-1375-000CN
RM1-1380-000CN
Part number
PF2282P025NI
PF2282P339NI
PF2282P352NI
PF2282P343NI
RC1-2827-000CN
RC1-2828-000CN
RC1-3102-000CN
WS9-0255-000CN
RM1-1372-000CN
RM1-1381-000CN
RM1-1397-000CN
RM1-1400-000CN
RM1-1193-000CN
RM1-1376-000CN
Table and page
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Upper-plate assembly on page 499
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Electrical/forward assembly on page 511
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
Electrical/forward assembly on page 511
Electrical/forward assembly on page 511
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-47
Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Case, envelope-feeder connector
Cassette
Cassette (tray 2, 3, 4 or 5)
Cassette rail assembly, left
Cassette rail assembly, right
Clutch, paper feed, electromagnetic (CL101)
Complete print engine (110 volt)
Complete print engine (220 volt)
Control-panel assembly
Control-panel assembly
Cover, cassette, left side
Cover, door arm (top cover)
Cover, duplexing-unit assembly
Cover, envelope-feeder slot
Cover, formatter
Cover, formatter
Cover, front assembly
Cover, front corner
Cover, front stopper
Cover, handle, lower right
Cover, inner front
Cover, left-side, front
Part number
RC1-0245-000CN
RM1–1001–000CN
RM1-1001–000CN
RM1-1011-000CN
RM1-1012-000CN
RK2-0349-000CN
CB425-69001
CB425-69002
Q3942-60102
CB425-60127
RC1-3043-000CN
RC1-2833-000CN
RM1-1018-000CN
RL1-0455-000CN
RC1-3035-000CN
RC1-3035-000CN
RM1-1100-000CN
RL1-0457-000CN
RC1-2823-000CN
RC1-2881-000CN
RC1-3041-000CN
RC1-3052-000CN
Table and page
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Paper-feed roller assembly on page 521
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
External panels and covers on page 497
External panels and covers on page 497
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
External panels and covers on page 497
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Customer-replaceable components (print engine) on page 477
External panels and covers on page 497
External panels and covers on page 497
External panels and covers on page 497
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Alphabetical parts list 573
Table 7-47
Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Cover, lock, front (upper plate)
Cover, rear
Cover, rear lock (upper plate)
Cover, right assembly
Cover, right lower assembly
Cover, side, rear
Cross-member, support
Customer in-box training CD, English only
Data cable for hard disk (2-wire)
DC controller PCA
Delivery assembly
Delivery assembly
Delivery tray assembly
Door, jam access
Duplex-printing assembly
Duplexer (duplex printing accessory)
E-ring (paper-feed roller assembly)
Electrical/forward assembly
Engine power supply assembly (100–127 volt)
Engine power supply assembly (220–240 volt)
Envelope feeder
Fan, DC controller (FN104)
Fan, main cooling (FN101)
574 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams
Part number
RC1-2820-000CN
RM1-1017-000CN
RC1-2821-000CN
RM1-1016-000CN
RM1-1033-000CN
RC1-3042-000CN
RC1-2911-000CN
CB425-60155
5851-2720
RM1-1354-000CN
RM1-1047-000CN
RM1-1047-000CN
RM1-1047-000CN
RC1-2597-000CN
Q5969-67901
Q5969A
XD9-0132-020CN
For reference only
RM1-1041-000CN
RM1-1042-000CN
Q2438-67902
RK2-0472-000CN
RK2-0278-000CN
Table and page
Upper-plate assembly on page 499
External panels and covers on page 497
Upper-plate assembly on page 499
External panels and covers on page 497
External panels and covers on page 497
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Documentation, software, and training material on page 491
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
External panels and covers on page 497
Customer-replaceable components (print engine) on page 477
Stapler/stacker accessory on page 567
Duplex-printing assembly on page 565
Paper-feed roller assembly on page 521
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Electrical/forward assembly on page 511
Electrical/forward assembly on page 511
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-47
Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Fan, print cartridge (FN102)
Fan, reversing unit (FN103)
Flag, full-detect (output bin)
Flag, paper-feed sensor
Flag, shutter
Formatter assembly
Formatter assembly, new
Front cover
Front cover
Fuser (100–127 volt)
Fuser (100–127 volt)
Fuser (220–240 volt)
Fuser (220–240 volt)
Fuser entrance guide
Fuser entrance guide
Fuser, 110-volt, new
Fuser, 220-volt, new
Gear, 14T (cassette)
Gear, 18T
Gear, 20T (cassette)
Gear, 23T
Gear, 30T (paper-feed roller assembly)
Part number
RK2-0280-000CN
RK2-0280-000CN
RC1-2863-000CN
RC1-0060-000CN
RC1-0378-000CN
CB425-67901
CB425–67901
RM1-0942-000
RM1-0985-000CN
RM1-1043-000CN
RM1-1043-000CN
RM1-1044-000CN
RM1-1044-000CN
RM1-1046-000CN
RM1-1046-000CN
RM1-1043-000CN
RM1-1044-000CN
RU5-0254-000CN
RU5-0045-020CN
RC1-0331-000CN
RU5-0256-000CN
RU5-0050-000CN
Table and page
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
Customer-replaceable components (print engine) on page 477
Stapler/stacker accessory on page 567
3-bin mailbox accessory on page 569
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Customer-replaceable components (print engine) on page 477
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Customer-replaceable components (print engine) on page 477
Customer-replaceable components (print engine) on page 477
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Paper-feed roller assembly on page 521
Alphabetical parts list 575
Table 7-47
Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Gear, 80T (cassette)
Guide assembly, flat-flexible cable
Guide, cartridge (upper plate)
Guide, cassette, front
Guide, legal-size (upper plate)
Guide, paper sensing (PS101)
Guide, rear
Handle, lock (upper plate)
Hard disk, 40 GB
Hinge, door, right-side
HP LaserJet M4345 MFP Series software CD, Asia/EN/DR
HP LaserJet M4345 MFP Series software CD, ROW/AR
HP LaserJet print cartridge
Jam-access door, 3-bin mailbox
Part number
RU5-0253-000CN
RM1-1027-000CN
RC1-2853-000CN
RC1-3020-000CN
RC1-2854-000CN
RM1-1010-000CN
RC1-2884-000CN
RC1-2818-000CN
0950-4717
RC1-2901-000CN
Holder, door switch
Holder, link
Holder, output-device-full sensor flag
Holder, right shutter (upper plate)
RC1-3063-000CN
RC1-3002-000CN
RC1-2864-000CN
RC1-2855-000CN
HP Digital Sending Software CD (trial version) MKTNG-00539
HP Jetdirect 620n Fast Ethernet (10/100Base-TX) print server
(EIO card)
HP Jetdirect connectivity card for USB, serial, and LocalTalk connections
HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300
HP LaserJet M4345 MFP Series service manual
J7934A
J4135A
Q3701-60010
CB425-90908
CB425-60136
CB425-60135
Q5945-67901
RM1-0981-000CN
Table and page
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
Upper-plate assembly on page 499
Upper-plate assembly on page 499
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Upper-plate assembly on page 499
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Upper-plate assembly on page 499
Documentation, software, and training material on page 491
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Documentation, software, and training material on page 491
Documentation, software, and training material on page 491
Documentation, software, and training material on page 491
Print cartridge and maintenance kits on page 488
3-bin mailbox accessory on page 569
576 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-47
Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Jog guide assembly
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right AR
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right CS
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right DA
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right DE
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right EL
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right EN
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right ES
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right FI
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right FR
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right HE
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right HR
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right HU
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right IT
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right JA
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right KO
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right NL
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right NO
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right PL
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right PT
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right RO
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right RU
CB425-60112
CB425-60104
CB425-60123
CB425-60129
CB425-60117
CB425-60105
CB425-60121
CB425-60120
Part number
RM1-0947-000CN
CB425-60125
CB425-60116
CB425-60113
CB425-60106
CB425-60124
CB425-60103
CB425-60107
CB425-60108
CB425-60110
CB425-60114
CB425-60109
CB425-60130
CB425-60115
Table and page
Stapler/stacker accessory on page 567
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Alphabetical parts list 577
Table 7-47
Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right SK
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right SL
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right SV
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right TH
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right TR
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right ZHCN
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right ZHTW
Laser/scanner assembly
Lever, paper-size-sensing (cassette)
Lever, shutter
Lifter drive assembly
Lifter-drive assembly
Limiter, torque
Link, handle (upper plate)
Link, switch
Main drive assembly
Main drive assembly
MBM driver board
Microswitch (SW101)
Motor, crossing, (stepping) (M104)
Motor, DC 24-volt, (M101)
Motor, DC 24-volt, (M102)
578 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams
Part number
CB425-60131
CB425-60132
CB425-60111
CB425-60126
CB425-60122
CB425-60119
CB425-60118
RM1-1573-000CN
RC1-2782-000CN
RC1-3106-000CN
RM1-1029-000CN
RM1-1029-000CN
RC1-2758-000CN
RC1-2822-000CN
RC1-3003-000CN
RM1-1049-000CN
RM1-1049-000CN
RM1-1124-000CN
WC4-5139-000CN
RK2-0473-000CN
RK2-0272-000CN
RK2-0274-000CN
Table and page
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Lifter-drive assembly on page 517
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Upper-plate assembly on page 499
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Main drive assembly on page 513
3-bin mailbox accessory on page 569
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-47
Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Motor, delivery (stepping) (M106)
Motor, reverse-unit (stepping) (M105)
Multipurpose assembly
Multipurpose tray assembly
Multipurpose tray assembly
Mylar sheet kit (3 sheets)
Part number
RK2-0475-000CN
RK2-0474-000CN
RM1-1572-000CN
RM1-1572-000CN
RM1-0005-020CN
Q6496–67901
Optional 500-sheet tray and feeder unit
Output bin
Q5968-67901
RM1-0940-000CN
Output-bin assembly
Paper delivery tray assembly
Paper delivery tray assembly
Paper-feed assembly
Paper-feed roller assembly
RM1-0940-000CN
RM1-0940-000CN
RM1-0940-000CN
RM1-0025-040CN
RM1-0012-020CN
Paper-pickup-drive assembly
Paper-pickup-drive assembly
RM1-0034-070CN
RM1-0034-070CN
PHN-CORD OPT 510 NORWAY/FINLAND 3.0M-LG 8120-8916
PHN-CORD OPT-501 US 3.0-M-LG ROHS United States/
Taiwan/China/Thailand/Japan/Argentina/India/European Union/
South America/Indonesia/Malaysia/MiddleEast/Phillipines/
Singapore/Mexico/Brazil/Canada/Russia/Bulgaria/Baltics/
Vietnam
PHN-CORD OPT-502 DE 3.0-M-LG ROHS Denmark
8121-0811
8120-8912
PHN-CORD OPT-504 FR 3.0-M-LG ROHS France
PHN-CORD OPT-505 UK/HK/NZ 3.0-M-LG ROHS United
Kingdom
8120-8923
8120-8921
Table and page
Multipurpose assembly on page 525
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Multipurpose assembly on page 525
Customer-replaceable components (ADF and scanner) on page 479
Customer-replaceable components (print engine) on page 477
External panels and covers on page 497
Stapler/stacker accessory on page 567
3-bin mailbox accessory on page 569
Electrical/forward assembly on page 511
Paper-feed roller assembly on page 521
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Paper-pickup-drive assembly on page 515
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Alphabetical parts list 579
Table 7-47
Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
PHN-CORD OPT-506 DK 3.0-M-LG ROHS Denmark
PHN-CORD OPT-507 TR 3.0-M-LG ROHS Turkey/Greece
PHN-CORD OPT-508 NL 3.0-M-LG ROHS Netherlands
PHN-CORD OPT-511 SE 3.0-M-LG ROHS NO/FI/SV
PHN-CORD OPT-512 CH 3.0-M-LG ROHS Switzerland
PHN-CORD OPT-514 IT 3.0-M-LG ROHS Southern Europe
PHN-CORD OPT-516 KR 3.0-M-LG ROHS Korea
PHN-CORD OPT-517 IL 3.0-M-LG ROHS Israel
PHN-CORD OPT-519 AU 3.0-M-LG ROHS Australia
PHN-CORD OPT-520 EE 3.0-M-LG ROHS SK/SL/HR/RO/CS/
HU/PL
PHN-CORD OPT-520 EE 3.0-M-LG ROHS South Africa
8120-8922
8120-8922
PHN-CORD US 3.0-M-LG ROHS Hong Kong SAR 8121-1042
Photointerrupter (PS107)
Plate, main pad support (multipurpose assembly)
Power cable for hard disk (5-wire)
POWER CORD, OPT-906 3-COND 2.25-M-LG
Power supply, PFC (100–127 volt)
WG8-5624-000CN
RL1-0007-000CN
5851-3051
8120-6815
RM1-1013-000CN
Part number
8120-8911
8120-8920
8120-8915
8120-8918
8121-0844
8120-8914
8120-8908
8120-8913
8120-8907
Power supply, PFC (220–240 volt)
Printer maintenance kit, 110-volt
Printer maintenance kit, 220-volt
RM1-1014-000CN
Q5998-67901
Q5999-67901
PWR-CORD OPT-900 3-COND 1.9-M-LG 5A ROHS Maylasia 8121-0739
PWR-CORD OPT-900 3-COND 1.9-M-LG 5A ROHS United
Kingdom/Middle East 220V/Phillipines/Singapore/Hong Kong
SAR/Malaysia
8121-0739
Table and page
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Multipurpose assembly on page 525
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
Print cartridge and maintenance kits on page 488
Print cartridge and maintenance kits on page 488
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
580 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-47
Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
PWR-CORD OPT-901 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Australia
Part number
8121-0837
PWR-CORD OPT-902 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Middle East
220V
PWR-CORD OPT-902 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Southern
Europe/Western Europe/Eastern Europe/Indonesia/Baltics/
Vietnam/Korea 220V
PWR-CORD OPT-903 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Middle East
8121-0731
8121-0731
8121-0740
PWR-CORD OPT-903 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS South
America/Mexico/Brazil
8121-0740
PWR-CORD OPT-903 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS United States/
Canada
8121-0740
PWR-CORD OPT-906 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Switzerland 8121-0738
PWR-CORD OPT-912 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Denmark
PWR-CORD OPT-917 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Africa
PWR-CORD OPT-918 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Japan
PWR-CORD OPT-919 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Israel
PWR-CORD OPT-920 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Argentina
PWR-CORD OPT-922 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS China
PWR-CORD OPT-923 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS India
PWR-CORD OPT-927 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Phillipines/
Singapore/Mexico/Brazil/Thailand
PWR-CORD OPT-934 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Taiwan
Rear cover
Rear cover
Registration assembly
Registration assembly
Reverse assembly
8121-0733
8121-0737
8121-0736
8121-1004
8121-0729
8121-0943
8121-0564
8121-0734
8121-0964
RC1-2598-000CN
RC1-2691-000CN
RM1-0011-060CN
RM1-0011-060CN
RM1-1022-000CN
Table and page
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Stapler/stacker accessory on page 567
3-bin mailbox accessory on page 569
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Registration assembly on page 523
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Alphabetical parts list 581
Table 7-47
Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Reverse assembly
Reverse-separation guide assembly
Reverse-separation-guide assembly
Reverse-unit PCA
Rod, link
Rod, link (upper plate)
Rod, switch, front
Roller assembly, transfer
Roller assembly, transfer
Roller, paper-feed (cassette)
Roller, paper-feed (cassette)
Roller, paper-feed assembly
Roller, paper-pickup (cassette)
Roller, paper-pickup (cassette)
Roller, pickup, multipurpose assembly
Roller, pickup, multipurpose assembly
Scanner controller PCA
Scanner fan-filter cover
Scanner flatbed-unit assembly
Scanner left cover
Scanner rear cover
582 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams
Part number
RM1-1022-000CN
RM1-1019-000CN
RM1-1019-000CN
RM1-1379-000CN
RC1-2902-000CN
RC1-2830-000CN
RC1-2980-000CN
RM1-1110-000CN
RM1-1110-000CN
RM1-0037-000CN
RM1-0037-020CN
RM1-0012-020CN
RM1-0036-000CN
RM1-0036-000CN
RL1-0019-000CN
RL1-0019-000CN
IR4041K512NI
IR4041P217NI
IR4041K081NI
IR4041K114NI
IR4041P216NI
Table and page
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Reverse-separation-guide assembly on page 529
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Upper-plate assembly on page 499
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Customer-replaceable components (print engine) on page 477
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Customer-replaceable components (print engine) on page 477
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Customer-replaceable components (print engine) on page 477
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Customer-replaceable components (print engine) on page 477
Multipurpose assembly on page 525
Scanner-base components on page 557
Scanner-base components on page 557
Scanner flatbed-unit assembly on page 559
Scanner flatbed-unit assembly on page 559
ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-47
Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Scanner right cover
Scanner top-cover flatbed flange
Scanner, spring for left cover
Scanner-carriage-lock cover
Scanner-fan filter
Screw, ADF
Screw, ADF
Screw, ADF, button, M3 x 8
Screw, ADF, wave 4 x 10
Screw, flathead, RS, M3 x 6
Screw, M3 x 8
Screw, RS, M3 x 12
Screw, RS, M3 x 6
Screw, RS, M3 x 8
Screw, S, M3 x 8
Screw, scanner flatbed
Screw, stepped
Screw, stepped, M3
Screw, tapping, M3 x 6
Screw, tapping, pan-head, M4 x 10
Screw, tapping, truss-head, M3 x 8
Screw, tapping, truss-head, M4 x 16
Screw, TP, M3 x 4
Screw, with washer, M3 x 6
Screw, with washer, M3 x 6
RS1-9004-020CN
RC1-0266-020CN
XA9-1503-000CN
XB4-7401-0007CN
XB4-7300-809CN
XB4-7401-605CN
XB6-7300-406CN
XB2-7300-607CN
XA9-1420-000CN
Part number
IR4041P213NI
IR4041P125NI
IR4041P041NI
IR4041P214NI
IR4041P007NI
030080FWWSNI
NS-SCR00029NI
IR4041P021NI
PF2245P369NI
XA9-1464-000CN
XA9-0650-000CN
XA9-1447-000CN
XA9-1495-000CN
XA9-1449-000CN
XA9-1500-000CN
040100FNBBNI
Table and page
Scanner-base components on page 557
ADF internal components (1 of 3) on page 537
Electrical/forward assembly on page 511
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Upper-plate assembly on page 499
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Scanner flatbed-unit assembly on page 559
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
External panels and covers on page 497
Multipurpose assembly on page 525
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Electrical/forward assembly on page 511
Alphabetical parts list 583
Table 7-47
Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Sensor assembly, paper size (SW102)
Sensor assembly, right door
Sensor, reverse-unit (PS109)
Sensor, reverse-unit jam (PS111)
Service and support training CD
Solenoid (SL101)
Solenoid, multipurpose assembly (SL102)
Solenoid, reverse-unit (SL105)
Solenoid, reversing-roller separation (SL106)
Spacer, screw
Spring, compression
Spring, grounding
Spring, tension
Spring, torsion
Spring, torsion
Staple cartridge
Stapler unit
Stapler/stacker driver board
Stopper, bushing arm
Stopper, front lock
Stopper, hinge shaft
Storage cabinet
584 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams
Part number
RM1-0041-020CN
RM1-1045-000CN
RM1-1570-000CN
RM1-1571-000CN
CB425-14005
RK2-0269-000CN
RK2-0276-000CN
RK2-0485-000CN
RK2-0486-000CN
RC1-0392-000CN
RU5-2265-000CN
RU5-2251-000CN
RC1-0167-000CN
RC1-0379-000CN
RC1-0061-000CN
C8085-60541
RK2-0507-000CN
RM1-1123-000CN
RC1-3090-000CN
RL1-0434-000CN
RC1-3124-000CN
Q5970A
Table and page
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Documentation, software, and training material on page 491
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Multipurpose assembly on page 525
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Stapler/stacker accessory on page 567
Stapler/stacker accessory on page 567
Stapler/stacker accessory on page 567
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
ENWW
Table 7-47
Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Support, cartridge (upper plate)
Support, gas damper
Swing-plate assembly
Switch, power
Thermistor (TH3)
Upper plate assembly
USB cable, 2-meter standard device connector
Part number
RC1-2856-000CN
RL1-0436-000CN
RM1-0043-020CN
RC1-3044-000CN
RK2-0359-000CN
For reference only
C6518A
Table and page
Upper-plate assembly on page 499
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
External panels and covers on page 497
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Cables and interfaces on page 481
ENWW Alphabetical parts list 585
Numerical parts list
Table 7-48
Numerical parts list
Part number
030080FWWSNI
040100FNBBNI
0950-4717
5851-2720
5851-3051
8120-6815
8120-8907
8120-8908
8120-8911
8120-8912
8120-8913
8120-8914
8120-8915
8120-8916
8120-8918
8120-8920
8120-8921
8120-8922
8120-8922
8120-8923
8121-0564
8121-0729
Description
Screw, ADF
Screw, scanner flatbed
Hard disk, 40 GB
Data cable for hard disk (2-wire)
Power cable for hard disk (5-wire)
POWER CORD, OPT-906 3-COND 2.25-M-LG
PHN-CORD OPT-519 AU 3.0-M-LG ROHS Australia
PHN-CORD OPT-516 KR 3.0-M-LG ROHS Korea
PHN-CORD OPT-506 DK 3.0-M-LG ROHS Denmark
PHN-CORD OPT-502 DE 3.0-M-LG ROHS Denmark
PHN-CORD OPT-517 IL 3.0-M-LG ROHS Israel
PHN-CORD OPT-514 IT 3.0-M-LG ROHS Southern Europe
PHN-CORD OPT-508 NL 3.0-M-LG ROHS Netherlands
PHN-CORD OPT 510 NORWAY/FINLAND 3.0M-LG
PHN-CORD OPT-511 SE 3.0-M-LG ROHS NO/FI/SV
PHN-CORD OPT-507 TR 3.0-M-LG ROHS Turkey/Greece
PHN-CORD OPT-505 UK/HK/NZ 3.0-M-LG ROHS United
Kingdom
PHN-CORD OPT-520 EE 3.0-M-LG ROHS South Africa
PHN-CORD OPT-520 EE 3.0-M-LG ROHS SK/SL/HR/RO/CS/
HU/PL
PHN-CORD OPT-504 FR 3.0-M-LG ROHS France
PWR-CORD OPT-923 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS India
PWR-CORD OPT-920 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Argentina
Table and page
Scanner flatbed-unit assembly on page 559
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
586 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-48
Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
8121-0731
8121-0731
8121-0733
8121-0734
8121-0736
8121-0737
8121-0738
8121-0739
8121-0739
8121-0740
8121-0740
8121-0740
8121-0811
8121-0837
8121-0844
8121-0943
8121-0964
8121-1004
8121-1042
C6518A
Description Table and page
PWR-CORD OPT-902 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Southern
Europe/Western Europe/Eastern Europe/Indonesia/Baltics/
Vietnam/Korea 220V
PWR-CORD OPT-902 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Middle East
220V
PWR-CORD OPT-912 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Denmark
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
PWR-CORD OPT-927 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Phillipines/
Singapore/Mexico/Brazil/Thailand
PWR-CORD OPT-918 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Japan
PWR-CORD OPT-917 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Africa
PWR-CORD OPT-906 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Switzerland
PWR-CORD OPT-900 3-COND 1.9-M-LG 5A ROHS United
Kingdom/Middle East 220V/Phillipines/Singapore/Hong Kong
SAR/Malaysia
PWR-CORD OPT-900 3-COND 1.9-M-LG 5A ROHS Maylasia
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
PWR-CORD OPT-903 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS South
America/Mexico/Brazil
PWR-CORD OPT-903 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Middle East
Cables and interfaces on page 481
PWR-CORD OPT-903 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS United States/
Canada
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
PHN-CORD OPT-501 US 3.0-M-LG ROHS United States/
Taiwan/China/Thailand/Japan/Argentina/India/European Union/
South America/Indonesia/Malaysia/MiddleEast/Phillipines/
Singapore/Mexico/Brazil/Canada/Russia/Bulgaria/Baltics/
Vietnam
PWR-CORD OPT-901 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Australia
PHN-CORD OPT-512 CH 3.0-M-LG ROHS Switzerland
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
PWR-CORD OPT-922 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS China
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
PWR-CORD OPT-934 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Taiwan
PWR-CORD OPT-919 3-COND 1.9-M-LG ROHS Israel
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
PHN-CORD US 3.0-M-LG ROHS Hong Kong SAR
USB cable, 2-meter standard device connector
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Numerical parts list 587
Table 7-48
Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
C8085-60541
C8085-60541
5,000-staple cartridge
Staple cartridge
CB425-60109
CB425-60110
CB425-60111
CB425-60112
CB425-60113
CB425-60114
CB425-60115
CB425-60116
CB425-14005
CB425-60103
CB425-60104
CB425-60105
CB425-60106
CB425-60107
CB425-60108
CB425-60117
CB425-60118
CB425-60119
CB425-60120
CB425-60121
Service and support training CD
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right EN
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right FR
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right IT
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right DE
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right ES
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right NL
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right PT
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right NO
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right SV
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right FI
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right DA
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right PL
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right RU
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right CS
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right HU
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right ZHTW
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right ZHCN
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right KO
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right JA
588 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams
Table and page
Stapler/stacker accessory on page 567
Documentation, software, and training material on page 491
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-48
Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
CB425-60122 Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right TR
CB425-60131
CB425-60132
CB425-60135
CB425-60136
CB425-60155
CB425-67901
CB425-69001
CB425-69002
CB425-90908
CB425–67901
CB425-60123
CB425-60124
CB425-60125
CB425-60126
CB425-60127
CB425-60129
CB425-60130
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right HE
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right EL
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right AR
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right TH
Control-panel assembly
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right HR
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right RO
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right SK
Kit-Control Pnl Overlay Left/Right SL
HP LaserJet M4345 MFP Series software CD, ROW/AR
HP LaserJet M4345 MFP Series software CD, Asia/EN/DR
Customer in-box training CD, English only
Formatter assembly
Complete print engine (110 volt)
Complete print engine (220 volt)
HP LaserJet M4345 MFP Series service manual
Formatter assembly, new
For reference only
For reference only
IR4041K081NI
IR4041K114NI
Electrical/forward assembly
Upper plate assembly
Scanner flatbed-unit assembly
Scanner left cover
Table and page
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
External panels and covers on page 497
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Documentation, software, and training material on page 491
Documentation, software, and training material on page 491
Documentation, software, and training material on page 491
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Documentation, software, and training material on page 491
Customer-replaceable components (print engine) on page 477
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Scanner flatbed-unit assembly on page 559
Numerical parts list 589
Table 7-48
Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
IR4041K512NI
IR4041P007NI
IR4041P007NI
IR4041P021NI
IR4041P041NI
IR4041P125NI
IR4041P213NI
IR4041P214NI
IR4041P215NI
IR4041P216NI
IR4041P217NI
IR4041P217NI
J4135A
J7934A
MKTNG-00539
NS-SCR00029NI
PF2245P369NI
PF2282K006NI
PF2282K008NI
PF2282K034NI
PF2282K035NI
PF2282K035NI
PF2282K035NI
Description
Scanner controller PCA
ADF fan filter
Scanner-fan filter
Screw, ADF, button, M3 x 8
Scanner, spring for left cover
Scanner top-cover flatbed flange
Scanner right cover
Scanner-carriage-lock cover
ADF front-cover flange
Scanner rear cover
ADF fan-filter cover
Scanner fan-filter cover
HP Jetdirect connectivity card for USB, serial, and LocalTalk connections
HP Jetdirect 620n Fast Ethernet (10/100Base-TX) print server
(EIO card)
HP Digital Sending Software CD (trial version)
Screw, ADF
Screw, ADF, wave 4 x 10
ADF assembly
ADF hinge, right
ADF separation-pad case
ADF separation-pad assembly
ADF separation-pad assembly
ADF separation pad
Table and page
Scanner-base components on page 557
Customer-replaceable components (ADF and scanner) on page 479
Scanner-base components on page 557
Customer-replaceable components (ADF and scanner) on page 479
Scanner flatbed-unit assembly on page 559
Customer-replaceable components (ADF and scanner) on page 479
Scanner-base components on page 557
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Cables and interfaces on page 481
Documentation, software, and training material on page 491
ADF internal components (1 of 3) on page 537
ADF internal components (2 of 3) on page 539
ADF separation-pad case on page 547
Customer-replaceable components (ADF and scanner) on page 479
ADF separation pad on page 545
ADF separation-pad case on page 547
590 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-48
Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
PF2282K039NI ADF pickup-roller assembly
PF2282K039NI
PF2282K039NI
PF2282K040NI
PF2282K040NI
PF2282K040NI
PF2282K041NI
PF2282K042NI
PF2282K042NI
PF2282K042NI
PF2282K043NI
PF2282K043NI
PF2282K043NI
PF2282K164NI
PF2282K165NI
PF2282K166NI
PF2282P025NI
PF2282P041NI
PF2282P044NI
PF2282P058NI
PF2282P059NI
PF2282P060NI
PF2282P061NI
PF2282P339NI
PF2282P343NI
ADF pickup-roller assembly
ADF pickup-roller assembly
ADF pickup-roller cover
ADF pickup-roller cover
ADF pickup-roller cover
ADF hinge, left
ADF input tray
ADF input tray
ADF input tray
ADF mylar-holder assembly
ADF mylar holder assembly
ADF mylar-holder assembly
ADF jam-access latch
ADF cable
ADF hinge flaps (ESD)
ADF white mylar backing
ADF jam-access cover
ADF rear cover
ADF left cover
ADF front cover
ADF output-bin-base cover
ADF output-bin paper stop
ADF white scan background
ADF, springs for white mylar backing
Table and page
Customer-replaceable components (ADF and scanner) on page 479
ADF internal components (3 of 3) on page 541
ADF pickup-roller assembly on page 549
Customer-replaceable components (ADF and scanner) on page 479
ADF internal components (3 of 3) on page 541
ADF pickup-roller cover on page 551
ADF internal components (2 of 3) on page 539
Customer-replaceable components (ADF and scanner) on page 479
Customer-replaceable components (ADF and scanner) on page 479
ADF mylar-holder assembly on page 553
ADF internal components (3 of 3) on page 541
ADF internal components (1 of 3) on page 537
ADF internal components (1 of 3) on page 537
Numerical parts list 591
Table 7-48
Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
PF2282P352NI
PF2282P353NI
ADF, springs for left cover
ADF clear plastic paper guide
Q2438-67902
Q2625A
Q2626A
Q2627-67951
Q3701-60010
Q3942-60102
Q5691-60501
Q5691-60501
Q5692-60503
Q5692-67901
Q5945-67901
Q5968-67901
Q5968A
Envelope feeder
100-pin DDR memory DIMM (dual inline memory module),
64 MB
100-pin DDR memory DIMM, 128 MB
100-pin DDR memory DIMM, 256 MB
HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300
Control-panel assembly
500-sheet stapler/stacker
500 sheet stapler/stacker replacement unit
3-bin mailbox
3-bin mailbox replacement unit
HP LaserJet print cartridge
Optional 500-sheet tray and feeder unit
500–sheet tray
Q5969-67901
Q5969A
Q5970A
Q5997-67901
Q5998-67901
Q5999-67901
Q6496–67901
Q6496–67901
Q6496–67901
Q6496–67901
Duplex-printing assembly
Duplexer (duplex printing accessory)
Storage cabinet
ADF maintenance kit
Printer maintenance kit, 110-volt
Printer maintenance kit, 220-volt
Mylar sheet kit (3 sheets)
ADF mylar replacement kit
ADF mylar replacement kit
ADF mylar replacement kit
Table and page
ADF internal components (3 of 3) on page 541
Control panel and controlpanel overlays on page 484
Stapler/stacker accessory on page 567
3-bin mailbox accessory on page 569
Print cartridge and maintenance kits on page 488
Customer-replaceable components (print engine) on page 477
Duplex-printing assembly on page 565
Print cartridge and maintenance kits on page 488
Print cartridge and maintenance kits on page 488
Print cartridge and maintenance kits on page 488
Customer-replaceable components (ADF and scanner) on page 479
Print cartridge and maintenance kits on page 488
ADF mylar replacement kit on page 555
592 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-48
Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
RC1-0060-000CN Flag, paper-feed sensor
RC1-2782-000CN
RC1-2818-000CN
RC1-2820-000CN
RC1-2821-000CN
RC1-2822-000CN
RC1-2823-000CN
RC1-2827-000CN
RC1-2828-000CN
RC1-2830-000CN
RC1-2833-000CN
RC1-0061-000CN
RC1-0167-000CN
RC1-0245-000CN
RC1-0266-020CN
RC1-0331-000CN
RC1-0378-000CN
RC1-0379-000CN
RC1-0392-000CN
RC1-2597-000CN
RC1-2598-000CN
RC1-2691-000CN
RC1-2758-000CN
Spring, torsion
Spring, tension
Case, envelope-feeder connector
Screw, stepped, M3
Gear, 20T (cassette)
Flag, shutter
Spring, torsion
Spacer, screw
Door, jam access
Rear cover
Rear cover
Limiter, torque
Lever, paper-size-sensing (cassette)
Handle, lock (upper plate)
Cover, lock, front (upper plate)
Cover, rear lock (upper plate)
Link, handle (upper plate)
Cover, front stopper
Arm, door, 1 (top cover)
Arm, door, 2 (top cover)
Rod, link (upper plate)
Cover, door arm (top cover)
Table and page
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Stapler/stacker accessory on page 567
Stapler/stacker accessory on page 567
3-bin mailbox accessory on page 569
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Upper-plate assembly on page 499
Upper-plate assembly on page 499
Upper-plate assembly on page 499
Upper-plate assembly on page 499
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Upper-plate assembly on page 499
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Numerical parts list 593
Table 7-48
Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
RC1-2853-000CN Guide, cartridge (upper plate)
RC1-2854-000CN
RC1-2855-000CN
RC1-2856-000CN
RC1-2863-000CN
RC1-2864-000CN
RC1-2881-000CN
RC1-2884-000CN
RC1-2901-000CN
RC1-2902-000CN
RC1-2911-000CN
RC1-2980-000CN
RC1-3002-000CN
RC1-3003-000CN
RC1-3020-000CN
RC1-3035-000CN
Guide, legal-size (upper plate)
Holder, right shutter (upper plate)
Support, cartridge (upper plate)
Flag, full-detect (output bin)
Holder, output-device-full sensor flag
Cover, handle, lower right
Guide, rear
Hinge, door, right-side
Rod, link
Cross-member, support
Rod, switch, front
Holder, link
Link, switch
Guide, cassette, front
Cover, formatter
RC1-3035-000CN
RC1-3041-000CN
RC1-3042-000CN
RC1-3043-000CN
RC1-3044-000CN
RC1-3052-000CN
Cover, formatter
Cover, inner front
Cover, side, rear
Cover, cassette, left side
Switch, power
Cover, left-side, front
594 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams
Table and page
Upper-plate assembly on page 499
Upper-plate assembly on page 499
Upper-plate assembly on page 499
Upper-plate assembly on page 499
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Customer-replaceable components (print engine) on page 477
External panels and covers on page 497
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
External panels and covers on page 497
External panels and covers on page 497
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-48
Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
RC1-3063-000CN Holder, door switch
RC1-3090-000CN
RC1-3102-000CN
RC1-3106-000CN
RC1-3124-000CN
RK2-0269-000CN
RK2-0272-000CN
RK2-0274-000CN
RK2-0276-000CN
RK2-0278-000CN
RK2-0280-000CN
RK2-0280-000CN
RK2-0349-000CN
RK2-0359-000CN
RK2-0469-000CN
RK2-0470-000CN
RK2-0472-000CN
RK2-0473-000CN
RK2-0474-000CN
RK2-0475-000CN
RK2-0485-000CN
RK2-0486-000CN
Stopper, bushing arm
Block, guide support (upper plate)
Lever, shutter
Stopper, hinge shaft
Solenoid (SL101)
Motor, DC 24-volt, (M101)
Motor, DC 24-volt, (M102)
Solenoid, multipurpose assembly (SL102)
Fan, main cooling (FN101)
Fan, reversing unit (FN103)
Fan, print cartridge (FN102)
Clutch, paper feed, electromagnetic (CL101)
Thermistor (TH3)
Cable, flat-flexible (engine power supply)
Cable, flat-flexible (engine power supply)
Fan, DC controller (FN104)
Motor, crossing, (stepping) (M104)
Motor, reverse-unit (stepping) (M105)
Motor, delivery (stepping) (M106)
Solenoid, reverse-unit (SL105)
Solenoid, reversing-roller separation (SL106)
Table and page
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Upper-plate assembly on page 499
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Multipurpose assembly on page 525
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
Paper-feed roller assembly on page 521
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Electrical/forward assembly on page 511
Electrical/forward assembly on page 511
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
Numerical parts list 595
Table 7-48
Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
RK2-0507-000CN Stapler unit
RL1-0007-000CN
RL1-0019-000CN
Plate, main pad support (multipurpose assembly)
Roller, pickup, multipurpose assembly
RL1-0019-000CN
RL1-0434-000CN
RL1-0436-000CN
RL1-0455-000CN
RL1-0457-000CN
RM1-0005-020CN
RM1-0011-060CN
RM1-0011-060CN
RM1-0012-020CN
RM1-0012-020CN
RM1-0025-040CN
RM1-0034-070CN
RM1-0034-070CN
RM1-0036-000CN
Roller, pickup, multipurpose assembly
Stopper, front lock
Support, gas damper
Cover, envelope-feeder slot
Cover, front corner
Multipurpose tray assembly
Registration assembly
Registration assembly
Roller, paper-feed assembly
Paper-feed roller assembly
Paper-feed assembly
Paper-pickup-drive assembly
Paper-pickup-drive assembly
Roller, paper-pickup (cassette)
RM1-0036-000CN
RM1-0037-000CN
RM1-0037-020CN
RM1-0041-020CN
Roller, paper-pickup (cassette)
Roller, paper-feed (cassette)
Roller, paper-feed (cassette)
Sensor assembly, paper size (SW102)
596 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams
Table and page
Stapler/stacker accessory on page 567
Multipurpose assembly on page 525
Customer-replaceable components (print engine) on page 477
Multipurpose assembly on page 525
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
External panels and covers on page 497
Multipurpose assembly on page 525
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Registration assembly on page 523
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Paper-feed roller assembly on page 521
Electrical/forward assembly on page 511
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Paper-pickup-drive assembly on page 515
Customer-replaceable components (print engine) on page 477
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Customer-replaceable components (print engine) on page 477
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-48
Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
RM1-0043-020CN Swing-plate assembly
RM1-0940-000CN Output bin
RM1-0940-000CN
RM1-0940-000CN
RM1-0940-000CN
RM1-0942-000
RM1-0947-000CN
RM1-0981-000CN
RM1-0985-000CN
RM1-1001–000CN
RM1-1010-000CN
RM1-1011-000CN
RM1-1012-000CN
RM1-1013-000CN
RM1-1014-000CN
RM1-1016-000CN
RM1-1017-000CN
RM1-1018-000CN
RM1-1019-000CN
RM1-1019-000CN
RM1-1022-000CN
RM1-1022-000CN
Output-bin assembly
Paper delivery tray assembly
Paper delivery tray assembly
Front cover
Jog guide assembly
Jam-access door, 3-bin mailbox
Front cover
Cassette (tray 2, 3, 4 or 5)
Guide, paper sensing (PS101)
Cassette rail assembly, left
Cassette rail assembly, right
Power supply, PFC (100–127 volt)
Power supply, PFC (220–240 volt)
Cover, right assembly
Cover, rear
Cover, duplexing-unit assembly
Reverse-separation guide assembly
Reverse-separation-guide assembly
Reverse assembly
Reverse assembly
Table and page
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
Customer-replaceable components (print engine) on page 477
External panels and covers on page 497
Stapler/stacker accessory on page 567
3-bin mailbox accessory on page 569
Stapler/stacker accessory on page 567
Stapler/stacker accessory on page 567
3-bin mailbox accessory on page 569
3-bin mailbox accessory on page 569
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
External panels and covers on page 497
External panels and covers on page 497
External panels and covers on page 497
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Reverse-separation-guide assembly on page 529
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Numerical parts list 597
RM1-1044-000CN
RM1-1044-000CN
RM1-1045-000CN
RM1-1046-000CN
RM1-1046-000CN
RM1-1047-000CN
RM1-1047-000CN
RM1-1047-000CN
RM1-1049-000CN
RM1-1049-000CN
RM1-1100-000CN
Table 7-48
Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
RM1-1027-000CN Guide assembly, flat-flexible cable
RM1-1029-000CN
RM1-1029-000CN
RM1-1033-000CN
RM1-1041-000CN
RM1-1042-000CN
RM1-1043-000CN
Lifter drive assembly
Lifter-drive assembly
Cover, right lower assembly
Engine power supply assembly (100–127 volt)
Engine power supply assembly (220–240 volt)
Fuser, 110-volt, new
RM1-1043-000CN
RM1-1043-000CN
RM1-1044-000CN
Fuser (100–127 volt)
Fuser (100–127 volt)
Fuser, 220-volt, new
Fuser (220–240 volt)
Fuser (220–240 volt)
Sensor assembly, right door
Fuser entrance guide
Fuser entrance guide
Delivery tray assembly
Delivery assembly
Delivery assembly
Main drive assembly
Main drive assembly
Cover, front assembly
598 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams
Table and page
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Lifter-drive assembly on page 517
External panels and covers on page 497
Electrical/forward assembly on page 511
Electrical/forward assembly on page 511
Customer-replaceable components (print engine) on page 477
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Customer-replaceable components (print engine) on page 477
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Customer-replaceable components (print engine) on page 477
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Customer-replaceable components (print engine) on page 477
External panels and covers on page 497
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Main drive assembly on page 513
External panels and covers on page 497
ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-48
Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
RM1-1110-000CN Roller assembly, transfer
RM1-1110-000CN
RM1-1123-000CN
RM1-1124-000CN
RM1-1193-000CN
RM1-1354-000CN
RM1-1367-000CN
RM1-1368-000CN
RM1-1370-000CN
RM1-1371-000CN
RM1-1372-000CN
RM1-1375-000CN
RM1-1376-000CN
RM1-1379-000CN
RM1-1380-000CN
RM1-1381-000CN
RM1-1397-000CN
RM1-1398-000CN
RM1-1400-000CN
RM1-1570-000CN
RM1-1571-000CN
Roller assembly, transfer
Stapler/stacker driver board
MBM driver board
Cable, envelope-feeder connector
DC controller PCA
Cable, laser (print engine)
Cable, output-bin full sensor
Cable, optional 500-sheet feeder connection
Cable, output device connection
Cable, beam-detect to scanner (print engine)
Cable, power
Cable, fan docking (for DC-controller fan)
Reverse-unit PCA
Cable, reverse unit
Cable, control panel
Cable, door switch
Cable, image scanner (print engine)
Cable, duplexing-unit grounding
Sensor, reverse-unit (PS109)
Sensor, reverse-unit jam (PS111)
Table and page
Customer-replaceable components (print engine) on page 477
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Stapler/stacker accessory on page 567
3-bin mailbox accessory on page 569
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Electrical/forward assembly on page 511
Numerical parts list 599
Table 7-48
Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
RM1-1572-000CN Multipurpose tray assembly
RM1-1572-000CN
RM1-1573-000CN
RM1–1001–000CN
RS1-9004-020CN
RU5-0045-020CN
RU5-0050-000CN
RU5-0253-000CN
RU5-0254-000CN
RU5-0256-000CN
RU5-2251-000CN
RU5-2265-000CN
WC4-5139-000CN
WG8-5624-000CN
WS9-0255-000CN
XA9-0650-000CN
XA9-1420-000CN
XA9-1447-000CN
XA9-1449-000CN
XA9-1464-000CN
XA9-1495-000CN
XA9-1500-000CN
XA9-1503-000CN
XB2-7300-607CN
Multipurpose assembly
Laser/scanner assembly
Cassette
Screw, stepped
Gear, 18T
Gear, 30T (paper-feed roller assembly)
Gear, 80T (cassette)
Gear, 14T (cassette)
Gear, 23T
Spring, grounding
Spring, compression
Microswitch (SW101)
Photointerrupter (PS107)
Bolt, hex-head
Screw, M3 x 8
Screw, with washer, M3 x 6
Screw, RS, M3 x 12
Screw, RS, M3 x 8
Screw, flathead, RS, M3 x 6
Screw, RS, M3 x 6
Screw, S, M3 x 8
Screw, tapping, M3 x 6
Screw, with washer, M3 x 6
600 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams
Table and page
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Multipurpose assembly on page 525
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Paper-feed roller assembly on page 521
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Internal components (5 of 5) on page 509
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (4 of 5) on page 507
Electrical/forward assembly on page 511
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Electrical/forward assembly on page 511
Upper-plate assembly on page 499
Internal components (1 of 5) on page 501
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Internal components (2 of 5) on page 503
ENWW
Table 7-48
Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
XB4-7300-809CN Screw, tapping, truss-head, M3 x 8
XB4-7401-0007CN
XB4-7401-605CN
XB6-7300-406CN
XD9-0132-020CN
Screw, tapping, pan-head, M4 x 10
Screw, tapping, truss-head, M4 x 16
Screw, TP, M3 x 4
E-ring (paper-feed roller assembly)
Table and page
Multipurpose assembly on page 525
External panels and covers on page 497
Internal components (3 of 5) on page 505
Paper-feed roller assembly on page 521
ENWW Numerical parts list 601
602 Chapter 7 Parts and diagrams ENWW
A Specifications
●
●
●
●
ENWW 603
Physical specifications
Table A-1
Product dimensions
Product
HP LaserJet M4345 MFP
HP LaserJet M4345x MFP
HP LaserJet M4345xs MFP
HP LaserJet M4345xm MFP
Optional 500-sheet feeder
Optional cabinet
Optional stapler/stacker
Optional 3-bin mailbox
Optional Envelope feeder
Optional duplexer
Height Depth
545 mm (21.5
inches)
667 mm (26.3
inches)
111.0 cm (43.7
inches)
483 mm (19.0
inches)
483 mm (19.0
inches)
483 mm (19.0
inches)
111.0 cm (43.7
inches)
483 mm (19.0
inches)
122 mm (4.8 inches) 483 mm (19.0
inches)
440 mm (17.3
inches)
762 mm (30.0
inches)
Width
762 mm (30.0
inches)
762 mm (30.0
inches)
914 mm (36.0
inches)
914 mm (36.0
inches)
559 mm (22.0
inches)
825.5 mm (32.5
inches)
Weight
44.1kg (97.2 lb)
52.4 kg (115.5 lb)
58.4 kg (128.7 lb)
58.2 kg (128.3 lb)
8.3 kg (18.3 lb)
41.8 kg (92.2 lb)
6.0 kg (13.2 lb)
5.8 kg (12.8 lb)
2.5 kg (5.5 lb)
2.5 kg (5.5 lb)
1 Without print cartridge
Table A-2
Product dimensions, with all doors and trays fully opened
Product
HP LaserJet M4345 MFP
HP LaserJet M4345x MFP
HP LaserJet M4345xs MFP
HP LaserJet M4345xm MFP
Height Depth Width
889 mm (35.0 inches) 876 mm (34.5 inches) 142.2 cm (56.0 inches)
101 cm (39.8 inches)
145 cm (57.0 inches)
145 cm (57.0 inches)
876 mm (34.5 inches)
117 cm (46.0 inches)
117 cm (46.0 inches)
142.2 cm (56.0 inches)
157.5 cm (62.0 inches)
157.5 cm (62.0 inches)
Electrical specifications
WARNING!
Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold.
Do not convert operating voltages. This can damage the printer and void the product warranty.
604 Appendix A Specifications ENWW
Table A-3
Power requirements for the HP LaserJet M4345 Series MFP
Specification
Power requirements
Rated current
110-volt models
110 to 127 volts (10%)
50/60 Hz (2 Hz)
10.0 Amps
230-volt models
220 to 240volts (10%)
50/60 Hz (2 Hz)
4.5 Amps
Table A-4
Power consumption for the HP LaserJet M4345 Series MFP (average, in watts)
Product model
HP LaserJet M4345 MFP
HP LaserJet M4345x MFP
HP LaserJet M4345xs MFP
HP LaserJet M4345xm MFP
Copying
800 W
800 W
800 W
800 W
Printing
Ready
44 W
49 W
49 W
49 W
Sleep
15 W
15 W
15 W
15 W
Off
0.25 W
0.25 W
0.25 W
0.25 W
1
2
3
4
5
6
Values subject to change. See http://www.hp.com/support/ljm4345mfp for current information.
Power numbers are the highest values measured using all standard voltages.
HP LaserJet M4345 Series MFP printing and copying speeds are 45 ppm Letter size and 43 ppm
A4 size.
Default time from Ready mode to Sleep = 60 minutes.
Recovery time from Sleep to start of printing = less than 10 seconds.
Heat dissipation in Ready mode = 167 BTU/hour.
Acoustic specifications
Table A-5
Sound power and pressure level for the HP LaserJet M4345 Series MFP
Sound power level
Printing
Copying
Ready
Sound pressure level
Printing
Copying
Ready
Declared per ISO 9296
L
WAd
= 7.0 Bels (A) [70 dB(A)]
L
WAd
= 7.2 Bels (A) [72 dB(A)]
L pAm
=33 dB (A)
Declared per ISO 9296
L pAm
=55 dB (A)
L pAm
=56 dB (A)
L pAm
=33 dB (A)
1
2
3
Values subject to change. See http://www.hp.com/support/ljm4345mfp for current information.
HP LaserJet M4345 Series MFP speed is 43 ppm A4 size.
Configuration tested (HP LaserJet M4345 MFP): Base model, simplex printing with A4 paper size.
ENWW Acoustic specifications 605
Operating environment
Table A-6
Necessary conditions
Environmental condition Printing
Temperature (printer and print cartridge) 15 to 32.5°C (59 to 89°F)
Relative humidity 10% to 80%
Storage/standby
-20 to 40°C (-4 to 104°F)
10% to 90%
606 Appendix A Specifications ENWW
B Product warranty statements
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement
HP PRODUCT
HP LaserJet M4345 Series MFP
DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY
One-year limited warranty
HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new.
HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects.
HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.
HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use.
Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO
OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND
HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY,
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country/region to country/region, state to state, or province to province. HP's limited warranty is valid in any country/region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and where HP has marketed this product. The level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local standards. HP will not alter form, fit or function of the product to make it operate in a country/region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE
YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR
ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
ENWW Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement 607
CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN
CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY
PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY
STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
Customer Self Repair Warranty Service
HP products are designed with many Customer Self Repair (CSR) parts to minimize repair time and allow for greater flexibility in performing defective parts replacement. If during the diagnosis period,
HP identifies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CSR part, HP will ship that part directly to you for replacement. There are two categories of CSR parts: 1) Parts for which customer self repair is mandatory. If you request HP to replace these parts, you will be charged for the travel and labor costs of this service. 2) Parts for which customer self repair is optional. These parts are also designed for Customer Self Repair. If, however, you require that HP replace them for you, this may be done at no additional charge under the type of warranty service designated for your product.
Based on availability and where geography permits, CSR parts will be shipped for next business day delivery. Same-day or four-hour delivery may be offered at an additional charge where geography permits. If assistance is required, you can call the HP Technical Support Center and a technician will help you over the phone. HP specifies in the materials shipped with a replacement CSR part whether a defective part must be returned to HP. In cases where it is required to return the defective part to
HP, you must ship the defective part back to HP within a defined period of time, normally five (5) business days. The defective part must be returned with the associated documentation in the provided shipping material. Failure to return the defective part may result in HP billing you for the replacement. With a customer self repair, HP will pay all shipping and part return costs and determine the courier/carrier to be used.
608 Appendix B Product warranty statements ENWW
HP Customer Care
Online Services
For 24-hour access to updated HP device-specific software, product information, and support information through an Internet connection, go to the Web site: http://www.hp.com/support/ljm4345mfp .
Go to www.hp.com/support/net_printing for information about the HP Jetdirect external print server.
HP Instant Support Professional Edition (ISPE) is a suite of Web-based troubleshooting tools for desktop computing and printing products. Go to instantsupport.hp.com
.
Telephone support
HP provides free telephone support during the warranty period. For the telephone number for your country/region, see the flyer that shipped with the device, or visit
calling HP, have the following information ready: the product name and serial number, the date of purchase, and a description of the problem.
Software utilities, drivers, and electronic information
http://www.hp.com/go/m4345_software
The Web page for the drivers is in English, but you can download the drivers themselves in several languages.
Fax accessory support
Go to http://www.hp.com/go/faxaccessory300 .
HP direct ordering for accessories or supplies
●
United States: www.hp.com/sbso/product/supplies .
●
Canada: www.hp.ca/catalog/supplies
●
Europe: www.hp.com/supplies
●
Asia-Pacific: www.hp.com/paper/
To order genuine HP parts or accessories, go to the HP Parts Store at www.hp.com/buy/parts (U.S.
and Canada only), or call 1-800-538-8787 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-3154 (Canada).
HP service information
To locate HP-Authorized Dealers, call 1-800-243-9816 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-3867 (Canada).
Outside the United States and Canada, call the customer support number for your country/region.
See the flyer that shipped in the box with the device.
HP service agreements
Call 1-800-HPINVENT (1-800-474-6836 (U.S.)) or 1-800-268-1221 (Canada). Or, go to the HP
SupportPack and Carepaq TM Services Web site at www.hpexpress-services.com/10467a .
For extended service, call 1-800-446-0522.
ENWW HP Customer Care 609
HP Toolbox FX
To check the device status and settings and view troubleshooting information and online documentation, use the HP Toolbox FX. You must have performed a full software installation in order to use the HP Toolbox FX. See
Open the HP Toolbox FX on page 85
.
HP support and information for Macintosh computers
Go to www.hp.com/go/macosx for Macintosh OS X support information and HP subscription service for driver updates.
Go to www.hp.com/go/mac-connect for products that are designed specifically for the Macintosh user.
610 Appendix B Product warranty statements ENWW
HP maintenance agreements
HP has several types of maintenance agreements that meet a wide range of support needs.
Maintenance agreements are not part of the standard warranty. Support services may vary by area.
Check with your local HP dealer to determine the services available to you.
On-site service agreements
To provide you with the level of support best suited to your needs, HP has on-site service agreements with a selection of response times.
Next-day on-site service
This agreement provides support by the next working day following a service request. Extended coverage hours and extended travel beyond HP’s designated service zones are available on most onsite agreements (for additional charges).
Weekly (volume) on-site service
This agreement provides scheduled weekly on-site visits for organizations with many HP products.
This agreement is designated for sites using 25 or more workstation products, including devices, plotters, computers, and disk drives.
Repacking the device
If HP Customer Care determines that your device needs to be returned to HP for repair, follow the steps below to repack the device before shipping it.
CAUTION
Shipping damage as a result of inadequate packing is the customer’s responsibility.
To repack the device
1.
Remove and retain any DIMMs cards that you have purchased and installed in the device. Do not remove the DIMM that came with the device.
CAUTION
Static electricity can damage DIMMs. When handling DIMMs, either wear an antistatic wrist strap, or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then touch bare metal on the device. To remove the DIMMs, see
2.
Remove and retain the print cartridge.
CAUTION
It is
extremely important
to remove the print cartridge before shipping the device. A print cartridge that remains in the device during shipping will leak and entirely cover the device engine and other parts with toner.
To prevent damage to the print cartridge, avoid touching the roller on it, and store the print cartridge in its original packing material or so that it is not exposed to light.
3.
Remove and retain the power cable, interface cable, and optional accessories.
ENWW HP maintenance agreements 611
4.
If possible, include print samples and 50 to 100 sheets of paper or other print media that did not print correctly.
5.
In the U.S., call HP Customer Care to request new packing material. In other areas, use the original packing material, if possible. Hewlett-Packard recommends insuring the equipment for shipment.
Extended warranty
HP Support provides coverage for the HP hardware product and all HP-supplied internal components. The hardware maintenance covers a 1- to 3-year period from date of the HP product purchase. The customer must purchase HP Support within the stated factory warranty. For more information, contact the HP Customer Care Service and Support group.
612 Appendix B Product warranty statements ENWW
C Regulatory information
This section contains the following regulatory information:
●
●
Environmental product stewardship program
●
●
●
ENWW 613
FCC regulations
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If this equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
●
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
●
Increase separation between equipment and receiver.
●
Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located.
●
Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.
NOTE
Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15 of
FCC rules.
614 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW
Environmental product stewardship program
Protecting the environment
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment.
Ozone production
This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O
3
).
Power consumption
Power usage drops significantly while in Ready and Sleep modes, which saves natural resources and saves money without affecting the high performance of this product. This product qualifies for
ENERGY STAR® (Version 3.0), which is a voluntary program to encourage the development of energy-efficient office products.
ENERGY STAR® and the ENERGY STAR mark are U.S. registered marks. As an ENERGY STAR partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has determined that this product meets ENERGY STAR
Guidelines for energy efficiency. For more information, see www.energystar.gov
.
Toner consumption
Economode uses significantly less toner, which might extend the life of the print cartridge.
Paper use
This product’s manual/optional automatic duplex feature (two-sided printing) and N-up printing
(multiple pages printed on one page) capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources.
Plastics
Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life.
ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 615
HP LaserJet print supplies
It’s easy to return and recycle your empty HP LaserJet print cartridges—free of charge—with
HP Planet Partners. HP is committed to providing inventive, high-quality products and services that are environmentally sound, from product design and manufacturing to distribution, operation and recycling processes. We ensure your returned HP LaserJet print cartridges are recycled properly, processing them to recover valuable plastics and metals for new products and diverting millions of tons of waste from landfills. Since this cartridge is being recycled and used in new materials, it will not be returned to you. Your empty HP LaserJet print cartridges are recycled responsibly when you participate in the HP Planet Partners program. Thank you for being environmentally responsible!
In many countries/regions, this product’s printing supplies (for example, print cartridges) can be returned to HP through the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program. An easy-to-use and free take back program is available in more than 35 countries/regions. Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet print cartridge and supplies package.
HP print supplies returns and recycling program information
Since 1992, HP has offered HP LaserJet supplies return and recycling free of charge. In 2004,
HP Planet Partners for LaserJet Supplies was available in 85% of the world market where
HP LaserJet supplies are sold. Postage-paid and pre-addressed labels are included within the instruction guide in most HP LaserJet print cartridge boxes. Labels and bulk boxes are also available through the Web site: www.hp.com/recycle .
Use the label to return empty, original HP LaserJet print cartridges only. Please do not use this label for non-HP cartridges, refilled or remanufactured cartridges, or warranty returns. Printing supplies or other objects inadvertently sent to the HP Planet Partners program cannot be returned.
More than 10 million HP LaserJet print cartridges were recycled globally in 2004 through the
HP Planet Partners supplies recycling program. This record number represents 26 million pounds of print cartridge materials diverted from landfills. Worldwide, in 2004, HP recycled an average of 59% of the print cartridge by weight consisting primarily of plastic and metals. Plastics and metals are used to make new products such as HP products, plastic trays, and spools. The remaining materials are disposed of in an environmentally responsible manner.
●
U.S. returns.
For a more environmentally responsible return of used cartridges and supplies,
HP encourages the use of bulk returns. Simply bundle two or more cartridges together and use the single, pre-paid, pre-addressed UPS label that is supplied in the package. For more information in the U.S., call 1-800-340-2445 or visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/recycle .
●
Non-U.S. returns.
Non-U.S. customers should visit the www.hp.com/recycle Web site for further information regarding availability of the HP Supplies Returns and Recycling Program.
Paper
This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the
HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide
. This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper according to EN12281:2002.
616 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW
Material restrictions
This HP product does not contain added mercury.
This HP product contains a battery that might require special handling at end-of-life. The batteries contained in or supplied by Hewlett-Packard for this product include the following:
HP LaserJet M4345 device
Type
Weight
Location
User-removable
Carbon monofluoride lithium battery BR1632
1.5 g
On formatter board
No
For recycling information, you can go to www.hp.com/recycle , or contact your local authorities or the
Electronics Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org
.
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the
European Union
This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product.
ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 617
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for supplies containing chemical substances (for example, toner) can be obtained by contacting the HP Web site at www.hp.com/go/msds or www.hp.com/ hpinfo/community/environment/productinfo/safety .
For more information
To obtain information about these environmental topics:
●
Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products
●
HP’s commitment to the environment
●
HP’s environmental management system
●
HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program
●
Material Safety Data Sheets
Visit http://www.hp.com/go/environment or http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/community/environment/ productinfo/safety .
618 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW
Telecom statement
The HP LaserJet M4345x, HP LaserJet M4345xs, and HP LaserJet M4345xm models have the HP
LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 already installed to provide communication to the public switch telephone network (PSTN) for fax functionality. See the
HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300
User Guide
for all regulatory approval information and regulatory notices associated with the fax functionality and that device.
ENWW Telecom statement 619
Declaration of conformity
Declaration of Conformity
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014
Manufacturer's Name:
Manufacturer's Address:
Hewlett-Packard Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard,
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA
declares, that the product
Product Name:
Regulatory Model Number 3) :
HP LaserJet M4345 series
BOISB-0407-00 and BOISB-0407-01
Product Options:
Including: CB425A, CB426A, CB427A, CB428A, BOISB-030800 4
ALL
Toner Cartridges: Q5945A
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Safety:
EMC:
IEC 60950-1:2001 / EN60950-1: 2001 +A11
IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN 60825-1:1994 +A1 +A2 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)
GB4943-2001
CISPR 22:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN 55022:1994 +A1 +A2 -- Class B 1)
EN 61000-3-2:2000
EN 61000-3-3:1995 +A1
EN 55024:1998 +A1 +A2
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B 2 / ICES-003, Issue 4 2)
GB9254-1998, GB17625.1-2003
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, and carries the CE-Marking accordingly.
1) The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
2) This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3) For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name or the product number(s).
4) All worldwide modular approvals for analog fax accessory obtained by Hewlett-Packard under the regulatory model number
BOISB-030800 incorporate the Multi-Tech Systems MT5634SMI Socket Modem Module.
Boise, Idaho , USA
March 29, 2006
For regulatory topics only:
Australia Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd., 31-41 Joseph Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia
European Contact: Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQ-TRE / Standards
Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 140, D-71034 Bblingen, Germany, (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, ID 83707-0015, USA,
(Phone: 208-396-6000)
620 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW
Safety statements
Laser safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The device is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance
Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the device is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
WARNING!
Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation.
Canadian DOC regulations
Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements.
« Conforme à la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques. « CEM ». »
VCCI statement (Japan)
Power cord statement (Japan)
EMI statement (Korea)
Laser statement for Finland
Luokan 1 laserlaite
Klass 1 Laser Apparat
HP LaserJet M4345, HP LaserJet M4345x, HP LaserJet M4345xs, HP LaserJet M4345xm, laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen
ENWW Safety statements 621
suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (1994) mukaisesti.
VAROITUS !
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
VARNING !
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
HUOLTO
HP LaserJet M4345, HP LaserJet M4345x, HP LaserJet M4345xs, HP LaserJet M4345xm kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja.
VARO !
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömällelasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.
VARNING !
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen. Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista:
Aallonpituus 775-795 nm Teho 5 m W Luokan 3B laser.
622 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW
Index
Symbols/Numerics
3-bin mailbox
diagrams and part
3-bin mailbox
500-sheet tray.
See
tray 3
500-sheet trays
insert or close error
tray 2 detection switch,
tray 2 jam-access-cover
unexpected size or type error
A
accessories
address books, e-mail
address, device
Macintosh, problem-
ADF
delivery guide (clear mylar
diagrams and part
jam-access cover,
output-bin extension,
separation pad, diagrams and
white mylar-backing,
ADF output bin
adhesive labels.
See
labels
Administration menu, control
Alert Settings window, HP
Attention light
B
bins
bins, output
paper curl, problem-solving 379
blank copies, problem-solving 437
blank pages
blurred print, problem-solving 429
ENWW Index 623
both sides, printing on error
browsers supported, HP
buttons, control panel
C
cabinet/stand
cables
calibrating
capacity
card stock
cartridges
ordering through embedded
status, viewing with HP
cartridges, print
image formation
cartridges, staple
cassette diagrams and part
chosen personality not
cleaning
document feeder delivery
clear mylar sheet, replacing 231
clock
components
diagrams and part
configuration page
connections
control panel
messages, alphabetical list 383 messages, numerical list 383
copying
problems, preventing 434 quality, problem-solving 434
Courier font, problem-solving 470
covers
diagrams and part
624 Index ENWW
top-cover flatbed flange,
top-cover switch (SW101),
creased paper, problem-
curled paper, problem-
curly paper, problem-solving 379
custom-size paper
3-bin mailbox specifications 13
500-sheet tray
customer support
D
Data light
DC controller
DC controller fan (FN104),
default settings
delivery assembly, diagrams and
delivery guide, replacing ADF 231
density
diagnostics
diagrams
electrical/forward assembly 510
paper-feed roller assembly 520
paper-pickup-drive
reverse-separation-guide
digital sending
validating gateway
DIMMs
disabling
Document feeder
documentation, part numbers 490
dots, problem-
double-sided printing error
drivers
Macintosh, problem-
preconfiguration 33 settings 33, 34
duplex printing accessory
diagrams and part
error
duplexer
E
EIO accessory
EIO cards
electrical forward assembly,
Embedded Jetdirect
embedded Web server
ENWW Index 625
engine power supply
diagrams and part
envelope feeder
envelopes
environment for device
environment for printer
environmental stewardship
EPS files, problem-solving 467
Error button, control panel
error messages
Ethernet cards, part
European Union, waste
e-mail validating gateway
F
fans
DC controller (FN104),
print-cartridge (FN102),
reversing-unit (FN103),
fasteners, types used 222, 473
fax accessory
Fax Activity Log
faxes
receiving, problem-solving 439
feed rollers, replacing ADF 228
feed-roller assembly,
Find Other Printers window, HP
Finnish laser safety statement 621
firmware
fonts
EPS files, problem-solving 467
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH)
formatter
front-cover support, removing 269
fuser
diagrams and part
image formation
fuser-entrance guide,
fuses, overcurrent/overvoltage
G
gateways
General Protection FaultException
glass
graphical display, control panel 48
gray background, problem-
H
hard disk
626 Index ENWW
heavy media, guidelines for
Help button, control panel
touchscreen 50 help, control panel 50
high-voltage power supply
Home button, control panel
HP Easy Printer Care
HP Instant Support Professional
HP Jetdirect print server
HP Jetdirect print servers
HP Printer Utility, Macintosh 35
HP Toolbox
HP Web Jetadmin
humidity
I
I/O configuration
image defects, problem-
image formation
image quality
copy, improving 434 copy, problem-solving 434
image repetition, problem-
Information tab, embedded Web
input trays.
See
trays
insert tray error messages 394 install cartridge error message 394
installation
Instant Support Professional
interface ports
internal components, diagrams
IP address
Macintosh, problem-
J
jams
ADF access cover,
print-cartridge area 401 print-quality problems 401
tray 2 access-cover switch,
Jetadmin
Jetdirect print server
Jetdirect print servers
job storage
jobs
K
keys, control panel
L
labels
ENWW Index 627
laser/scanner assembly
diagrams and part
LDAP servers validating gateway
legal paper
letterhead
lifter-drive assembly diagrams and part
light print
lights
lines, problem-solving
loading
unexpected size or type error
locking
loose toner, problem-solving 423
loose toner, troubleshooting 401
low-voltage power supply
M
Macintosh
removing software 35 software 35
supported operating
mailbox, 3-bin
diagrams and part
mailbox, 3-bin
main drive assembly, diagrams
main fan (FN101), removing 258
main motor (M101), removing 283
maintenance kit
margins legal paper, problem-
Material Safety Data Sheet
media
3-bin mailbox specifications 13
500-sheet tray
envelope feeder
letterhead 17 preprinted forms 17
memory
permanent storage error
Memory Enhancement technology
menu map
menus, control panel
messages
628 Index ENWW
misformed characters, problem-
motors
print-cartridge (M102),
multipurpose assembly diagrams and part
multipurpose tray.
See
tray 1
mylar replacement kit, ADF 554
mylar-holder assembly, ADF 552
N
Networking tab, embedded Web
networks
HP Jetdirect print server error
protocol configuration page,
troubleshooting HP Jetdirect
validating gateway
not responding, problem-
NVRAM
O
on-site service agreements 611
operating environment
operating systems supported 31
operations
pickup, feed, and delivery 135
Resolution Enhancement
optical unit
ordering
supplies through embedded
output bins
output path open error
output quality
copy, improving 434 copy, problem-solving 434
output-bin-full sensor,
over-temperature protection 122
overcurrent/overvoltage
overlays, control panel
P
paper
3-bin mailbox specifications 13
500-sheet tray
paper path
paper-feed assembly,
paper-feed roller assembly,
paper-pickup-drive assembly,
ENWW Index 629
paper-pickup-drive assembly,
paper-present sensor(PS101),
paper-size-detection switch
parallel port
part numbers
customer-replaceable
electrical/forward assembly 510
paper-feed roller assembly 520
paper-pickup-drive
print cartridges 488, 576, 592
reverse-separation-guide
parts
password, embedded Web
PCL drivers
PFC (power-factor-correction)
phone cords, part
phone line, connecting fax
photosensitive drum rotation
pickup and feed operations 135
pickup roller, replacing tray 1 237
pickup rollers, replacing ADF 228
pickup-roller assembly, ADF 548
PJL (printer job language) 116
PML (printer management
ports
PostScript
PostScript Printer Description
(PPD) files
power
power cords, part
power supply
overcurrent/overvoltage
power-factor-correction (PFC)
PPDs
preprinted forms
pressure roller operations 131
preventative maintenance kit
print cartridges
image formation
ordering through embedded
status, viewing with HP
print quality
tire tracks 427 white lines 427
print-cartridge fan (FN102),
print-cartridge motor (M102),
printer
printer drivers.
See
drivers
printer job language (PJL) 116
printer maintenance kit
printer management language
printer sequence of
630 Index
ENWW
problem-solving
Error button, control panel
protocol configuration page,
ENWW
Q
quality
copy, improving 434 copy, problem-solving 434
R
Ready light
reattach output bin error
receiving faxes
registration assembly, diagrams
registration assembly,
remote firmware update
removing Macintosh software 35
repeating defects, problem-
replacing printing cartridges 93
resolution
Resolution Enhancement
REt (Resolution Enhancement
reverse assembly, diagrams and
reverse-separation-guide assembly, diagrams and part
reversing assembly
reversing-separation-guide
reversing-unit fan (FN103),
rollers
500-sheet trays, replacing 236
image formation
paper-feed assembly, diagrams and part
S
scanner
scanner assembly, removing 321
scanner diagrams and part numbers
scanner glass
scanner lid backing, cleaning 96
scanner-controller PCA
scanner-controller PCA,
scanning e-mail validating gateway
scanning to e-mail
security
Index 631
Foreign Interface Harness
locking control panel menus 44
sending faxes
sending to e-mail
sending to e-mail validating gateway
sensors
3-bin mailbox jam
paper-present sensor(PS101),
thermistor (TH3), removing 263
separation pad, ADF diagrams and part
service
repacking device 611 service agreements 611
Service menu, control panel 80
settings
Settings tab, embedded Web
setup
size, copy
size, media
3-bin mailbox specifications 13
500-sheet tray
envelope feeder
specifications 13 stacker specifications 13
unexpected, error
skew
Sleep mode
sleep settings
slow printing, problem-solving 380
slow speed, problem-solving
smeared toner, problem-
SMTP servers validating gateway
software
supported operating
specifications
specifications, media
specks, problem-solving 420, 428
speed fax receiving, problem-
spots, problem-solving 420, 428
standard output bin
staple cartridges
stapler/stacker
diagrams and part
too many pages error
Start button, control panel
status
632 Index ENWW
HP Printer Utility, Macintosh 91
Stop button, control panel
storage cabinet
storage, job
storing
supplies
authentication 94 counterfeit 94
ordering through embedded
part
status, viewing with embedded
status, viewing with HP Printer
status, viewing with HP
support
switches
paper-size-detection (SW102),
top-cover (SW101),
tray 2 detection, removing 312
tray 2 jam-access-cover
T
technical support
temperature
thermistor (TH3), removing 263
temperature specifications 606
tests
text, problem-solving
thermistor (TH3), removing 263
Time/Scheduling menu, control
tire tracks, problem-solving 427
toner adhesion problems,
Toolbox.
See
HP Toolbox
top cover
top-cover flatbed flange,
top-cover switch (SW101),
transfer charging roller
transfer rollers, replacing 226
transparencies
tray 1
insert or close error
unexpected size or type error tray 2
tray 2 detection switch,
tray 2 jam-access-cover switch
tray 3
trays
insert or close error
ENWW Index 633
status, viewing with HP
unexpected size or type error
troubleshooting
Alert Settings window, HP
control panel messages,
error messages, alphabetical
error messages, numerical
formatter test 455 half self-test 455
HP Jetdirect print servers 463
network printing, loopback
network printing. ping test 443
two-sided printing error
typefaces
U
unable to connect, copy, or
unexpected size or type error
uninstalling Macintosh software 35
Update Now feature, drivers 33
upper-plate assembly, diagrams
USB cable, part
USB port
V
validating gateway
vertical white or faded stripes 434
W
Warning button, control panel
warranty
wavy paper, problem-
Web Jetadmin
Web sites
HP Web Jetadmin,
Macintosh customer
Material Safety Data Sheet
weight, media specifications
white lines or spots, problem-
Windows
supported operating
wrinkled paper, problem-
634 Index ENWW
© 2006 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
www.hp.com
*CB425-90908*
*CB425-90908*
CB425-90908
Atsisiųsti
Reklama